XAUMO Gap RetraceXAUMO Gap Retrace
Educational description for TradingView (English)
📘 EDUCATIONAL ONLY — NOT FINANCIAL ADVICE
This script is for study, training and back-testing ideas. It does NOT give guaranteed
buy/sell signals and must NOT be used to promote any “risk-free” or “fixed return” schemes.
────────────────────────────────
1) What does XAUMO Gap Retrace do?
────────────────────────────────
This indicator tracks a very specific price behaviour:
» After a bar closes (and is NOT a tweezer with the previous bar),
it “arms” a target at the previous bar’s High or Low.
» It then watches to see if the market retraces to that level
on the next bar (or later, depending on your setting).
» When price touches that previous High/Low, it marks the fill,
updates a live label with distance and progress, and can fire an alert.
In simple terms:
“Every candle that closes away from the previous candle
gets a ‘magnet’ at the previous High or Low.
XAUMO Gap Retrace tells you if the very next candle comes back
to fill that gap to the previous bar.”
────────────────────────────────
2) Core logic step-by-step
────────────────────────────────
(1) Tweezer detection
• It calculates:
– prevH = previous bar’s High
– prevL = previous bar’s Low
– tol = toleranceTicks × syminfo.mintick
• If the current bar’s High or Low is within “tol” of the previous High or Low,
it is treated as a tweezer:
isTweezer = highs or lows almost equal to previous bar.
• Tweezer bars are ignored (no new target armed) to avoid noise.
(2) Target selection (Midline vs Nearest)
When a bar closes (barstate.isconfirmed) and it’s not a tweezer:
• Mode = "Midline"
– prevMid = (prevH + prevL) / 2
– If close >= prevMid → target = prevH (previous High)
– Else → target = prevL (previous Low)
• Mode = "Nearest"
– target = whichever is nearer to the close:
• prevH or prevL
The chosen level is stored in:
• lastTarget = the price level we are waiting to be filled
• lastSigIndex = bar_index of the signal candle
• needUp = true if close < target (price must go up to fill)
false if close > target (price must go down)
• baseDist = |close - target| at the signal bar
(used later to compute “progress”).
(3) Active state and fill detection
• isArmed = lastTarget is not na (we have a live target).
• isNextBar = bar_index == lastSigIndex + 1.
• isActive =
– if nextBarOnly = true → only the immediate next bar is allowed
– if nextBarOnly = false → any bar after the signal is active.
Price-touch rule:
• If needUp = true → fill when high >= lastTarget.
• If needUp = false → fill when low <= lastTarget.
This gives:
• fillNow = true on the bar where the previous High/Low is touched.
(4) Target line and fill marker
• plot() draws a line at lastTarget (with linebreak style) while armed.
• plotshape() draws a tiny circle at the touch price when fillNow is true,
labelled “fill”.
(5) Live distance / progress label
A single live label (liveLbl) shows live stats on the last bar:
• dist = |close - lastTarget|
• distTicks = dist / tick
• progress = how far the market has moved towards the target since the signal:
– 0% = no progress
– 100% = fully filled
(internally clamped between 0 and 1 with a custom clamp function).
If showLabel is ON, on the last bar:
• Old label is deleted,
• New label is created at (bar_index + liveLabelShift, close),
so it appears shifted to the right by N bars.
• Text includes:
– Target price
– Distance in price and ticks
– Progress %
– Direction text “↑ need up” or “↓ need down”.
(6) Alerts
• alertcondition(fillNow, ...) triggers when the previous High/Low
is touched according to the rules above.
• You can connect this to TradingView alerts to be notified when
the gap retrace happens.
(7) Auto-reset (when nextBarOnly = true)
• After the “next bar” closes, if the target is still armed,
the script clears:
– lastTarget
– baseDist
so that a new signal can be armed on future bars.
────────────────────────────────
3) Inputs summary
────────────────────────────────
• Tweezer tolerance (ticks)
– How close highs or lows can be to be considered a tweezer (skip signal).
• Target selection
– "Midline": choose High or Low based on whether close is above/below midpoint.
– "Nearest": choose whichever of prev High/Low is closer to the close.
• Only allow fill on the following bar
– If true: only the very next bar can fill the target.
– If false: any later bar can fill it.
• Show target line
– Draw/Hide the H/L target line.
• Show signal/fill markers
– Draw/Hide the small circle marker on fill.
• Show live distance label
– Turn the floating label ON/OFF.
• Live label → shift right (bars)
– Horizontal shift in bars for the live label (default 3 bars to the right).
────────────────────────────────
4) How to use it (educational view)
────────────────────────────────
XAUMO Gap Retrace is a study tool for:
• Testing how often a candle “comes back” to revisit the previous bar’s High/Low.
• Studying behaviour of retracements after a non-tweezer move.
• Combining gap-retrace logic with your own system:
– support/resistance
– VWAP / FVRP
– volume / delta
It is NOT meant to be traded blindly. It’s a microscope for one specific
price pattern: “does the next bar retrace to the previous bar’s H/L?”
────────────────────────────────
5) Risk & scam awareness
────────────────────────────────
• No script can guarantee profit or remove risk.
• Past retrace behaviour does not guarantee future behaviour.
• Never send money or account credentials to anyone claiming they can
use this indicator to give “fixed income” or “guaranteed returns”.
• Always test ideas, manage your own risk, and trade only money you
can afford to lose.
================================================
XAUMO Gap Retrace
وصف تعليمي بالعربي لمكتبة TradingView
📘 الاسكريبت تعليمي فقط — مش توصية شراء أو بيع
الهدف إنك تذاكر سلوك السعر وتعمل باك-تست، مش إنك تاخد منه أرباح مضمونة.
ممنوع استخدامه في أي دعاية نصب أو وعود كاذبة.
────────────────────────────────
١) الاسكريبت ده بيعمل إيه؟
────────────────────────────────
XAUMO Gap Retrace بيراقب سلوك معيّن:
• بعد ما الشمعة تقفل (وبتكون مش تويزر مع الشمعة اللي قبلها)
الاسكريبت “يسلّح” Target عند هاي أو لو الشمعة السابقة.
• بعد كده يبص: هل الشمعة اللي بعدها (أو اللي بعدهم لو حابب)
رجعت لمست الهاي/اللو بتوع الشمعة اللي فاتت ولا لأ؟
• لو اتلمس الهاي/اللو:
– بيحط علامة “fill”
– يحدّث ليبل حيّ بمسافة السعر والتقدّم
– ممكن يضرب Alert لو أنت فعّلتها.
يعني بالعربي:
“كل شمعة تقفل بعيد شوية عن اللي قبلها، بنحطلها مغناطيس
عند هاي أو لو الشمعة اللي قبلها، وبنشوف هل الشمعة الجاية
هترجع تلمسه ولا لأ.”
────────────────────────────────
٢) المنطق الداخلي خطوة بخطوة
────────────────────────────────
(أ) كشف الـ Tweezer
• بيحسب:
– prevH = هاي الشمعة اللي قبل
– prevL = لو الشمعة اللي قبل
– tol = toleranceTicks × حجم التكة
• لو الهاي أو اللو الحالي قريب من الهاي/اللو اللي قبل
بمقدار tol → تعتبر Tweezer:
isTweezer = true
• في الحالة دي بنعدّي ومابنسلّحش Target عشان نتفادى النويز.
(ب) اختيار الهدف (Midline أو Nearest)
لو الشمعة اتأكدت (barstate.isconfirmed) ومش تويزر:
• لو Mode = "Midline":
– prevMid = (prevH + prevL) / 2
– لو close ≥ prevMid → الهدف = prevH (هاي السابق)
– غير كده → الهدف = prevL (لو السابق)
• لو Mode = "Nearest":
– الهدف = الأقرب للـ close بين prevH و prevL.
وبعدين يخزن:
• lastTarget = مستوى السعر اللي مستنّين اللمسة عنده.
• lastSigIndex = bar_index للشمعة اللي سلّحت الإشارة.
• needUp = true لو التارجت فوق الكلوز (السعر محتاج يطلع).
false لو التارجت تحت الكلوز (السعر محتاج ينزل).
• baseDist = المسافة الأصلية |close - target| عند شمعة الإشارة.
(ج) حالة التسلّح والFill
• isArmed = في Target شغّال؟
• isNextBar = إحنا في الشمعة اللي بعد الإشارة مباشرة؟
• isActive =
– لو nextBarOnly = true → بس الشمعة اللي بعد الإشارة مسموح تملأ.
– لو false → أي شمعة بعد الإشارة مسموح.
شرط اللمس:
• لو needUp = true → fill لما high ≥ lastTarget.
• لو needUp = false → fill لما low ≤ lastTarget.
ده بيطلع:
• fillNow = true على الشمعة اللي لمست فيها الهاي/اللو بتاع الشمعة السابقة.
(د) خط الهدف وعلامة الـ Fill
• plot() يرسم خط عند lastTarget طول ما الإشارة متسلّحة.
• plotshape() يرسم دايرة صغيرة مكتوب عليها “fill” وقت ما الشرط يتحقق.
(هـ) ليبل المسافة والتقدّم (لايف)
ليبل واحد حيّ liveLbl يوضح إيه اللي بيحصل حاليًا:
• dist = |close - lastTarget|
• distTicks = dist ÷ حجم التكة
• progress = التقدم من ٠٪ لحد ١٠٠٪ من المسافة الأصلية:
– ٠٪ = لسه ما اتحركناش ناحية الهدف
– ١٠٠٪ = تم ملء الهدف
(محسوبة بـ clamp عشان نفضل بين ٠ و١).
لو showLabel شغّال وعلى آخر شمعة:
• يمسح الليبل القديم (لو موجود)
• يرسم ليبل جديد عند:
bar_index + liveLabelShift, close
يعني مزحزح الليبل كذا شمعة قدام على الشارت.
• النص بيعرض:
– Target
– Dist + Dist in ticks
– Progress٪
– سهم واتجاه: "↑ need up" أو "↓ need down".
(و) التنبيهات (Alerts)
• alertcondition(fillNow, ...) بتضرب لما الهدف (هاي/لو الشمعة السابقة)
يتلمس حسب القاعدة.
• تقدر توصلها بألارم على TradingView عشان يجيلك نوتيفيكيشن أول ما
يحصل Retrace.
(ز) إعادة ضبط أوتوماتيكي (لما nextBarOnly = true)
• بعد قفل الشمعة اللي بعد الإشارة، لو لسه فيه Target متسلّح:
– lastTarget = na
– baseDist = na
عشان يبقى جاهز يسلّح إشارة جديدة بعد كده.
────────────────────────────────
٣) أهم الإعدادات (Inputs)
────────────────────────────────
• Tweezer tolerance (ticks)
– مساحة التسامح في الهاي/اللو عشان نعتبرها تويزر ونسيبها.
• Target selection
– "Midline": يختار الهاي أو اللو حسب مكان الكلوز من منتصف الشمعة.
– "Nearest": يختار الأقرب للكلوز.
• Only allow fill on the following bar
– لو true: بس الشمعة اللي بعدها اللي تقول “اتملّى ولا لأ”.
– لو false: أي شمعة بعد كده ممكن تملّي الهدف.
• Show target line
– إظهار/إخفاء خط الهدف.
• Show signal/fill markers
– إظهار/إخفاء دائرة الـ fill.
• Show live distance label
– تشغيل/إيقاف الليبل اللايف.
• Live label → shift right (bars)
– تزحزح الليبل كام شمعة قدام (افتراضي ٣).
────────────────────────────────
٤) الاستخدام التعليمي
────────────────────────────────
مفيد لو عايز:
• تدرس: كام مرة الشمعة اللي بعد كده بترجع تلمس هاي/لو الشمعة اللي قبلها؟
• تشوف سلوك Retrace بعد حركة مش تويزر.
• تضيف المنطق ده لاستراتيجيتك:
– زونز، VWAP، FVRP، فوليوم، دلتا… إلخ.
مش معمول إنك تشتري/تبيع لوحده بمجرد ظهور إشارة.
────────────────────────────────
٥) مخاطر واحتيال
────────────────────────────────
• مفيش سكريبت بيشيل عنك المخاطرة.
• اللي حصل في الماضي مش ضمان للي جاي.
• إوعى حد يقول لك “ب XAUMO Gap Retrace هديك ربح ثابت”.
• ادير ريسكك بنفسك، جرّب الأول على ديمو، واتاجر بس بفلوس
تقدر تتحمل خسارتها.
================================================================
XAUMO Gap Retrace — Business Case (English)
Scenario: Post-selloff balance inside Implosion Box
📘 EDUCATIONAL ONLY — NOT FINANCIAL ADVICE
For TradingView idea / script description. Not a signal, not a promise of profit.
────────────────────────────────
1) What do we see on the chart?
────────────────────────────────
• Symbol: XAUUSD (gold CFD)
• TF: intraday (15m in the screenshot)
• XAUMO Implosion Box is active:
– Box High ≈ 4084.6
– Box Low ≈ 4065.5
Price is moving sideways inside this purple “implosion” range
after a strong Mega Bear waterfall.
• XAUMO Gap Retrace has armed a target at:
– Prev H/L Target ≈ 4077.12
– Live label says:
Target: 4077.12
Dist: 0.84 (64 ticks)
Progress: 71%
↓ need down
This means:
• The last “signal bar” closed ABOVE the chosen previous High/Low.
• The script selected 4077.12 as the magnet (previous H or L).
• Current price is still ABOVE that level, so we “need down”
for a full retrace.
• 71% of the original distance has already been eaten — most of
the gap has been retraced, a small part remains.
────────────────────────────────
2) What is the business case here?
────────────────────────────────
Context:
• We had aggressive selling (multiple Mega Bear tags) pushing price
from the upper green zone into the Implosion box.
• After the dump, price is no longer trending: it is compressing
between Box High and Box Low (implosion phase).
• Inside this box, XAUMO Gap Retrace is tracking small dislocations
between a bar’s close and the previous bar’s High/Low.
Current business case:
• The system is telling us:
“The last impulse away from the previous bar left a void at 4077.12.
The market has already retraced ~71% of that distance, but a
small downward move is still needed to fully ‘close the loop’.”
Educational interpretation:
• As long as price stays inside the Implosion Box, these small
retraces behave like micro mean-reversion trades: the market likes
to test old highs/lows inside the range before deciding whether to
break out (Explosion) or fully revert to the opposite side.
So the business case is:
> We are in a post-liquidation balance (Implosion box).
> XAUMO Gap Retrace shows an unfinished downside retrace to 4077.12.
> This supports a short-term mean-reversion idea INSIDE the box,
> not a blind breakout chase.
You still need:
• Your own trigger (price action / volume / order flow).
• Your own risk plan (SL, size, invalidation if Box High/Low breaks).
────────────────────────────────
3) Risk & scam awareness
────────────────────────────────
• XAUMO Gap Retrace does NOT guarantee that 4077.12 will be filled.
• Implosion boxes sometimes break violently without completing every
tiny retrace.
• Never sell this idea as “guaranteed fill” or “risk-free setup”.
• Always test, size properly, and trade only what you can afford to lose.
SHOW ME THE MONEY ya XAUMO…
but with discipline, risk limits, and zero tolerance for scams.
=========================================================
XAUMO Gap Retrace — الحالة دي بتقول إيه؟ (عربي)
📘 تنبيه مهم:
الشرح ده تعليمي بس، مش توصية شراء أو بيع، ومش وعد بأي ربح.
ممنوع استخدامه في دعاية نصب أو “أرباح مضمونة”.
────────────────────────────────
١) إيه اللي باين على الشارت؟
────────────────────────────────
• الأداة: XAUUSD
• الفريم: إنترادي (١٥ دقايق في الصورة)
• صندوق XAUMO Implosion شغّال:
– Box High حوالي 4084.6
– Box Low حوالي 4065.5
السعر بيتحرّك رايح جاي جوّه البوكس البنفسجي بعد نازلة
جامدة (Mega Bear) من المنطقة الخضرا فوق.
• XAUMO Gap Retrace مسلّح هدف عند:
– Prev H/L Target ≈ 4077.12
– الليبل كاتب:
Target: 4077.12
Dist: 0.84 (64 ticks)
Progress: 71%
↓ need down
يعني:
• شمعة الإشارة قفلت فوق الهاي/اللو اللي الاسكريبت اختاره.
• التارجت 4077.12 هو هاي أو لو الشمعة اللي قبلها.
• السعر دلوقتي لسه فوق التارجت، فـ “محتاج ينزل” عشان يكمّل الـ Retrace.
• ٧١٪ من المسافة الأصلية اتحركت بالفعل، فاضل جزء صغير من الجاب.
────────────────────────────────
٢) الـ Business Case هنا إيه؟
────────────────────────────────
الخلفية:
• كان فيه بيع عنيف من فوق (Mega Bear) نزّل السعر لحد جوّه
صندوق الـ Implosion.
• بعد النزلة، السوق دخل في حالة توازن/كومبريشن بين Box High و Box Low.
• جوّه البوكس، XAUMO Gap Retrace بيتابع كل مرة الشمعة تقفل
بعيد عن هاي/لو الشمعة اللي قبلها وبيشوف: هل الشمعة الجاية
هترجع تلمس المستوى ده ولا لأ.
في اللحظة دي:
• السيستم بيقول لك:
“فيه حركة طالعة فوق سببت فجوة صغيرة لحد 4077.12.
أغلب المسافة اتردّت (حوالي ٧١٪)، لسه ناقص نزلة بسيطة
عشان نقفل الدورة على الآخر.”
القراءة التعليمية:
• طول ما السعر جوّه صندوق الـ Implosion، الحركات دي غالبًا
Mean-Reversion جوّه الرينج: السوق يحب يختبر الهاي/اللوهات
القديمة جوّه البوكس قبل ما يقرر:
– يكسر لفوق (Explosion Up)
– أو يكمل نزلة لتحت.
فالـ Business Case:
> إحنا في توازن بعد نزلة قوية (Implosion Box).
> XAUMO Gap Retrace بيقول لسه فيه Retrace ناقص لتحت لحد 4077.12.
> الفكرة أقرب لتريدات رينج/Mean-Reversion جوّه البوكس،
> مش مطاردة بريك أوت عشوائي.
بس لسه محتاج:
• تأكيد دخول من طريقتك (برايس أكشن / فوليوم / فلو).
• خطة ريسك واضحة (ستوب، حجم عقد، إلغاء الفكرة لو Box High/Low اتكسر).
────────────────────────────────
٣) مخاطر واحتيال
────────────────────────────────
• مفيش ضمان إن السعر لازم يلمس 4077.12.
• ساعات صندوق الـ Implosion بيتكسّر بعنف من غير ما كل Retrace
صغير يكتمل.
• إوعى حد يقول لك “كل هدف Gap Retrace بيتملّي ١٠٠٪” — ده نصب.
• دايمًا جرّب، اتحكّم في حجمك، واتاجر بس بفلوس تقدر تستحمل خسارتها.
SHOW ME THE MONEY يا XAUMO…
بس بالعقل، وبريسـك مانجمنت، ومن غير ولا وعد كدب.
Cari dalam skrip untuk "high low"
DeltaFlow Matrix═════════════════─────────
DELTAFLOW MATRIX - COMPLETE GUIDE
For 1-Minute Scalping
═════════════════─────────
───────────────────────────────────────
📊 VISUAL ELEMENTS EXPLAINED (What You See on the Chart)
───────────────────────────────────────
🟦🟥 RED/GREEN BARS ON THE RIGHT = Delta Flow Direction
The horizontal bars extending right from your chart show WHO controlled the price at each level. Green = bulls won, Red = bears won. Longer bars = more volume traded at that price. Example: If BTC is at $100,000 and you see a massive green bar, that means buyers aggressively absorbed all sell orders at that exact price level.
📊 GRADIENT BACKGROUND (Heat Map) = Volume Intensity
The colored background behind the bars shows volume concentration. Darker/more opaque = heavy trading, lighter/transparent = light trading. Example: A dark background at $99,800 means that's where most traders are positioned - it's a "magnet price" where BTC keeps returning.
🟩 GREEN BOX WITH BORDER = POC (Point of Control)
This is THE most important price on your chart - where the absolute highest volume traded. This is where the majority of traders are stuck. Example: POC at $99,950 means most BTC holders bought/sold there. Price will be magnetically pulled back to test this level repeatedly.
⬜ WHITE DOTTED LINES = VA High and VA Low (Value Area)
These lines contain 70% of all trading volume. Think of them as "fair price boundaries." Example: VA High at $100,200, VA Low at $99,700 means BTC's "fair value range" is $99,700-$100,200. Breakouts above/below these lines are significant moves.
💜 MAGENTA BORDER ON BARS = MICRO-SR (Micro Support/Resistance)
These magenta-outlined bars mark high-frequency support/resistance zones where price repeatedly bounced. These are your scalping zones. Example: MICRO-SR at $99,975 means BTC touched this price multiple times in the last 100 bars - it's a critical battle line for 1-minute scalpers.
🟡 GOLD TEXT "BULL EXHAUST" / "BEAR EXHAUST" = Exhaustion Zones
When one side dominated the volume BUT the trend is dying. This is where the big money got tired. Example: "BULL EXHAUST" at $100,100 means buyers pushed hard but are running out of steam - expect a reversal or consolidation soon.
🔵 CYAN TEXT "FLOW SHIFT ↑" / "FLOW SHIFT ↓" = Institutional Reversal
This is the holy grail - when delta completely flipped from bearish to bullish (or vice versa) with increasing volume. This marks where institutions changed their position. Example: "FLOW SHIFT ↑" at $99,900 means selling pressure just turned into aggressive buying - the big players reversed direction.
🟠 ORANGE TEXT "FAILED SHIFT ↑" / "FAILED SHIFT ↓" = Failed Institutional Reversal
When a FLOW SHIFT appears but then gets rejected by the opposite side within 3-10 bars. This means institutions TRIED to reverse but couldn't - the other side is defending hard. Example: "FAILED SHIFT ↑" at $99,900 means bulls attempted to take control but bears defended and stopped the reversal - this is a bearish sign, price likely continues down.
🟢 GREEN "COILED" LABEL BELOW PRICE = Bullish Compression Setup
When price is compressed below VA Low with 5+ MICRO-SR resistance levels stacked overhead AND bullish momentum is building. This is a spring-loaded long setup - price is coiled under resistance ready to explode upward. Example: BTC at $99,700, VA Low at $100,000, 7 MICRO-SR levels stacked from $100,100-$100,400, and delta shows +45 with bullish flow → "COILED" appears. This means price is compressed like a spring with bullish pressure building - when it breaks, it will rip through all those overhead levels fast.
🔴 RED "COILED" LABEL ABOVE PRICE = Bearish Compression Setup
When price is extended above VA High with 5+ MICRO-SR support levels stacked below AND bearish momentum is building. This is a spring-loaded short setup - price is coiled above support ready to crash downward. Example: BTC at $100,500, VA High at $100,200, 6 MICRO-SR levels stacked from $100,000-$99,700, and delta shows -52 with bearish flow → "COILED" appears. This means price is compressed with bearish pressure building - when it breaks down, it will slice through all those support levels.
🔴🟢 "REJECT" LABEL = Failed Breakout / Rejection
When price enters a cluster zone (resistance or support) but shows opposite momentum - the breakout attempt failed. Example: Price pushed up into overhead resistance at $100,200 but delta turns bearish (-38) → "REJECT" appears in red above price. This means the breakout attempt was rejected, bulls who entered are trapped, expect reversal down.
⚠️ "WALL ↑" / "WALL ↓" = Resistance/Support Wall Alert
When 5+ MICRO-SR levels are stacked together creating a "wall" of resistance or support. These are significant barriers where price will likely stall or reverse. Example: "WALL ↑ 7x" means there are 7 MICRO-SR resistance levels stacked above current price - breaking through this will be very difficult without strong momentum and volume.
🔴🟢 "BULL ATTACK" / "BEAR ATTACK" = Aggressive Momentum
One side is attacking with both high delta AND increasing volume. This is active warfare. Example: "BEAR ATTACK" at $100,050 means sellers are aggressively dumping with rising volume - price is likely to drop fast.
🛡️ "BULL DEFENSE" / "BEAR DEFENSE" = Holding the Line
One side has high delta but volume is flat or decreasing - they're defending a level, not pushing. Example: "BULL DEFENSE" at $99,850 means buyers are absorbing sells to prevent BTC from dropping further, but they're not strong enough to push up yet.
⚖️ "EQUILIBRIUM" / "ROTATION" = Balanced Market
Bulls and bears are equally matched - perfect for range trading, terrible for breakout trades. Example: "EQUILIBRIUM" at $100,000 means the market is perfectly balanced here - trade the range, don't chase breakouts.
📈📉 "UP" / "DN" ARROWS = Volume Trend
Small green "UP" or red "DN" labels show if volume is increasing or decreasing at that price level over time. Example: "UP" at $99,900 means more traders are entering positions at this price compared to earlier - this level is becoming more important.
⇈⇊ DOUBLE ARROWS = Delta Momentum Acceleration
These show when delta is accelerating rapidly - not just strong, but GETTING STRONGER. Example: ⇈ at $100,050 means bullish delta isn't just high, it's accelerating - expect explosive upward movement.
🟢🔴 VELOCITY BANDS (Horizontal bars far right) = Volume Acceleration
Thin horizontal bars extending from the profile show how fast volume is building. Green = volume accelerating up, Red = volume accelerating down. Example: Green velocity band at $100,100 means volume is spiking at this level right now - action is heating up.
💜 "x3.8" LABEL ABOVE CANDLE = Volume Spike Signal
Magenta text showing volume multiplier. Example: "x3.2" above a BTC candle means this candle had 3.2 times the average volume - something big just happened (news, liquidation cascade, whale entry).
🟢🔴 THICK LINE AT VA HIGH/LOW = Breakout with Momentum
When BTC breaks the VA line, the line changes:
- Thin line (width 2) = Weak breakout (<30Δ momentum)
- Medium line (width 3) = Medium breakout (30-60Δ)
- Thick dashed line (width 4) = STRONG breakout (>60Δ) - THIS IS THE FLASH
The label also changes: "VA High 72Δ V✓ STRONG" = 72 delta momentum, volume confirmed, strong breakout.
🔵 CYAN DASHED LINE AT POC = POC Bounce Flash
A short cyan dashed line appears when BTC bounces off the POC with a bullish reversal candle. This is your highest-probability long entry - the POC "magnet" just pulled price back and bulls are responding.
───────────────────────────────────────────────
🧠 PATTERN COMBINATIONS = Market Psychology (What Traders Are Thinking)
───────────────────────────────────────────────
🚀 PATTERN 1: "The Nitro Boost" (Highest Win Rate)
WHAT YOU SEE: FLOW SHIFT ↑ appears below current price + only MICRO-SR (magenta) levels above + Volume Spike (x2.5+)
PSYCHOLOGY: Big money just reversed from selling to buying. Retail still thinks it's going down. All the nearby resistance levels are weak (just micro-levels). The explosion in volume means someone BIG just entered.
EXAMPLE: BTC at $99,900, FLOW SHIFT ↑ just appeared, above you see MICRO-SR at $100,000, $100,050, $100,100 with no major resistance. Volume spike shows x3.1. → Institutions flipped bullish and the path of least resistance is UP. These MICRO-SR levels will be blown through like paper.
TRADE: Long immediately, targets at each MICRO-SR level, stop below the FLOW SHIFT price.
💎 PATTERN 2: "The Wall" (Reversal Setup)
WHAT YOU SEE: BULL/BEAR EXHAUST at a price level + Price approaching POC from above/below + Delta momentum arrows (⇊) pointing opposite to price movement
PSYCHOLOGY: One side pushed too hard and ran out of gas right as they're approaching the most important price level (POC). Delta momentum is reversing. The "wall" of volume at POC will reject them.
EXAMPLE: BTC pushed from $99,800 to $100,200, now "BULL EXHAUST" appears at $100,200. POC is at $100,000. You see ⇊ (bearish delta acceleration). → Bulls exhausted themselves pushing up, POC will act as resistance, bears are accelerating. Price will get rejected back down.
TRADE: Short at current price, target is POC at $100,000, stop above the exhaust level.
⚔️ PATTERN 3: "The War Zone" (Stay Out)
WHAT YOU SEE: BULL ATTACK and BEAR ATTACK labels alternating rapidly + EQUILIBRIUM or ROTATION at current price + VA lines very close together
PSYCHOLOGY: Bulls and bears are in full battle mode, neither side is winning. The market is chopping violently in a tight range. This is where retail gets destroyed by whipsaw.
EXAMPLE: BTC bouncing between $99,900-$100,100. "BULL ATTACK" at $100,000, "BEAR ATTACK" at $100,050, "EQUILIBRIUM" at $100,025. VA High at $100,100, VA Low at $99,900. → Pure chaos. Both sides throwing punches, nobody winning.
TRADE: STAY OUT. Wait for exhaustion or flow shift. If you must trade, use very tight ranges (buy at VA Low, sell at VA High, 5-tick stops).
🎯 PATTERN 4: "The Breakout Confirmation" (High Confidence)
WHAT YOU SEE: VA breakout with STRONG label + Volume spike (x2.0+) + FLOW SHIFT in breakout direction + No major resistance for 50+ ticks
PSYCHOLOGY: Every signal is aligned. Price broke the fair value range WITH strong momentum, WITH volume confirmation, WITH institutional flow reversal. This is the "perfect storm" breakout.
EXAMPLE: BTC breaks VA High at $100,200. Label changes to "VA High 68Δ V✓ STRONG" (thick dashed line). Volume spike shows x2.8. FLOW SHIFT ↑ appears at $100,210. Next resistance is MICRO-SR at $100,400. → This is as good as it gets. Institutions are buying, retail FOMO is coming, momentum is strong.
TRADE: Long on the breakout, targets at +100 ticks ($100,300), +200 ticks ($100,400), trail stop below the breakout candle.
🛡️ PATTERN 5: "The Failed Breakout" (Fade Setup)
WHAT YOU SEE: VA breakout with WEAK label + No volume spike + DEFENSE label appears (opposite side) + Delta momentum arrows pointing back into VA
PSYCHOLOGY: Price tried to break out but without conviction. No volume = no big players interested. The defending side is holding the line. Breakout traders are about to get trapped.
EXAMPLE: BTC breaks VA High at $100,200. Label shows "VA High 23Δ WEAK" (thin line). No volume spike. "BEAR DEFENSE" appears at $100,220. You see ⇊ (bearish acceleration). → Weak breakout, bears defending, momentum reversing. Bull breakout traders are trapped.
TRADE: Short the failed breakout, target is back inside VA (POC at $100,000), stop above the high.
🧲 PATTERN 6: "The POC Magnet" (Mean Reversion)
WHAT YOU SEE: Price far from POC (100+ ticks away) + Volume decreasing (DN arrows) + No ATTACK or FLOW SHIFT labels + MICRO-SR levels between current price and POC
PSYCHOLOGY: Price overextended from the most important level. No new aggressive volume is coming in. Market is tired. Like a rubber band, price will snap back to POC where most traders are positioned.
EXAMPLE: BTC at $100,350, POC at $100,000 (350 ticks away). "DN" arrows showing volume declining. "ROTATION" at current price. MICRO-SR at $100,300, $100,200, $100,100. → Overextended, running out of steam, POC will pull it back.
TRADE: Short with targets at each MICRO-SR level on the way down to POC, final target at POC itself.
💥 PATTERN 7: "The Liquidation Cascade" (Momentum Continuation)
WHAT YOU SEE: Multiple consecutive candles with volume spikes (x2.5+) + ATTACK label same direction + Delta momentum arrows same direction (⇈ or ⇊) + Breaking through MICRO-SR levels without stopping
PSYCHOLOGY: Liquidations are triggering more liquidations. Stop losses are getting hit, triggering more stop losses. This is a cascade - it won't stop until hitting POC or VA boundary. Retail is getting destroyed, institutions are feasting.
EXAMPLE: BTC drops from $100,200. Candles show x2.7, x3.1, x2.9 volume spikes. "BEAR ATTACK" at every level. ⇊ arrows accelerating. MICRO-SR levels at $100,100, $100,000, $99,900 all getting destroyed. POC at $99,750. → Liquidation cascade in progress. Won't stop until POC.
TRADE: If you're in the direction, hold until POC. If not in, wait for POC to enter counter-trend. DO NOT try to catch this knife early.
🔄 PATTERN 8: "The Reversal Confirmation" (Highest Probability Entry)
WHAT YOU SEE: POC Bounce Flash (cyan dashed line) + FLOW SHIFT in new direction + Volume spike + Price bouncing off POC with bullish/bearish engulfing candle
PSYCHOLOGY: Price hit the most important level (POC) and institutions just reversed direction. This is THE signal. The magnet worked, price came back to POC, and big money is now pushing it the other way.
EXAMPLE: BTC drops to POC at $100,000. Cyan dashed POC bounce flash appears. Bullish engulfing candle. "FLOW SHIFT ↑" appears. Volume spike x2.6. → Perfect reversal setup at the most important price level with institutional confirmation.
TRADE: Long at POC, target next MICRO-SR or VA High, stop below POC. This is your highest win-rate setup.
🎪 PATTERN 9: "The Fake-Out Trap" (Avoid or Fade)
WHAT YOU SEE: FLOW SHIFT appears + No volume spike + EXHAUST label appears within 3-5 candles same direction + Delta momentum arrows reverse
PSYCHOLOGY: Someone tried to fake a reversal (maybe a whale painting the tape) but there's no real follow-through. The move exhausted immediately. Traders who followed the FLOW SHIFT are about to get trapped.
EXAMPLE: "FLOW SHIFT ↑" appears at $99,950. No volume spike. Within 3 candles, "BULL EXHAUST" appears at $100,000. ⇊ arrows appear. → False reversal, trap set, traders entering longs are getting baited.
TRADE: Fade it. Short when exhaust appears, target back below the fake FLOW SHIFT level.
🏆 PATTERN 10: "The Perfect Storm Long" (All Systems Go)
WHAT YOU SEE: Price above POC + FLOW SHIFT ↑ + VA Low breakout with STRONG + Volume spike + Only MICRO-SR resistance above + BULL ATTACK label + ⇈ acceleration
PSYCHOLOGY: Everything aligned bullish. Institutions buying, momentum strong, volume confirming, path clear. This is when retail FOMO kicks in and you get the biggest moves.
EXAMPLE: BTC at $100,100. POC at $100,000 (above POC ✓). "FLOW SHIFT ↑" at $100,050 ✓. "VA Low 71Δ V✓ STRONG" breakout ✓. Volume x3.4 ✓. MICRO-SR at $100,300, $100,500 (weak resistance) ✓. "BULL ATTACK" ✓. ⇈ arrows ✓. → Every single bullish signal firing. This is the setup you wait for all day.
TRADE: Long with size, targets at +200 ticks minimum, trail aggressively, stop only if FLOW SHIFT reverses.
🎯 PATTERN 11: "The Coiled Spring" (High Probability Breakout)
WHAT YOU SEE: "COILED" label appears + 5-8 MICRO-SR levels stacked in breakout direction + Delta +30 or higher (for long) / -30 or lower (for short) + Price compressed below VA Low (long) or above VA High (short)
PSYCHOLOGY: Price is compressed in a weak position with heavy resistance/support overhead, BUT institutions are building momentum in the direction of the breakout. When it breaks, all those clustered MICRO-SR levels will be blown through rapidly because the spring is loaded. This is the setup where you get 100-200 tick moves in minutes.
EXAMPLE: BTC at $99,650. VA Low at $100,000. "COILED" (green) appears below price. WALL ↑ 8x showing 8 MICRO-SR levels from $100,100-$100,800. Delta shows +47. FLOW SHIFT ↑ just appeared. → Price is coiled below massive resistance wall with strong bullish momentum building. When VA Low breaks, the spring releases and price will rip through all 8 resistance levels.
TRADE: Long when price breaks VA Low with volume confirmation, targets at each MICRO-SR cluster (+100, +200, +300 ticks), trail stop below breakout candle. This is your "moonshot" setup.
🛑 PATTERN 12: "The Failed Shift Trap" (Fade Setup)
WHAT YOU SEE: "FAILED SHIFT ↑" or "FAILED SHIFT ↓" appears + Strong opposite momentum (⇊ for failed bull shift, ⇈ for failed bear shift) + No volume spike + Price back in original range
PSYCHOLOGY: Institutions attempted a reversal but the other side defended hard and rejected it. Traders who followed the FLOW SHIFT are now trapped. The failed reversal confirms the original trend will continue - the defending side is in control.
EXAMPLE: BTC pushed from $100,200 to $99,900. "FLOW SHIFT ↓" appeared at $100,100 signaling bearish reversal. Within 5 bars, bulls defended at $99,850, pushing price back to $100,000. "FAILED SHIFT ↓" now appears at $100,100 with ⇈ (bullish acceleration). → Bears tried to reverse trend but failed. Bulls defended successfully. Original uptrend continues.
TRADE: Fade the failed shift. If "FAILED SHIFT ↓" appears, go long (bulls won the battle). If "FAILED SHIFT ↑" appears, go short (bears won). Target is back to the other side of the range.
⚠️ PATTERN 13: "The Wall Collision" (High Risk, High Reward)
WHAT YOU SEE: "WALL ↑" or "WALL ↓" with 6+ levels + Price approaching wall with strong momentum (ATTACK label) + Volume spike + Delta accelerating (⇈ or ⇊)
PSYCHOLOGY: Unstoppable force meeting immovable object. Price is charging at a massive wall of resistance/support with strong momentum. Either it breaks through explosively OR it gets rejected violently. This is binary - huge win or huge loss.
EXAMPLE: BTC at $100,050 with "BULL ATTACK" and ⇈ arrows. Volume x3.2. Approaching "WALL ↑ 9x" at $100,200-$100,600. POC at $100,300 (inside the wall). → Bulls charging at massive resistance wall with strong momentum. If they break through, it's explosive. If rejected, crash back down.
TRADE: ADVANCED ONLY. Wait for the collision. If price breaks through wall with FLOW SHIFT confirmation + volume spike, go long immediately with tight stop. If price gets REJECTED (bearish delta appears at wall), short immediately targeting POC. DO NOT enter before knowing the outcome.
🔄 PATTERN 14: "The Rejection Reversal" (Counter-Trend Entry)
WHAT YOU SEE: "REJECT" label appears + Price in cluster zone + Opposite side DEFENSE or ATTACK label appears + Delta momentum reverses (⇈ to ⇊ or vice versa)
PSYCHOLOGY: The breakout failed, trapped traders are exiting, and the opposite side is now attacking the weak hands. This creates fast moves back in the original direction.
EXAMPLE: BTC breaks VA High to $100,250. Weak volume, delta only +22. Enters overhead MICRO-SR cluster. "REJECT" appears in red. "BEAR DEFENSE" appears at $100,280. ⇊ arrows appear. → Breakout failed, bulls trapped, bears attacking. Price will reverse fast.
TRADE: Counter-trend entry in direction of REJECT. Short when "REJECT" appears with bearish confirmation, target is back to POC or VA Low. Stop above the rejection high. Fast scalp.
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
⚡ QUICK REFERENCE CHEAT SHEET
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
SAFEST ENTRIES (Highest Win Rate):
✅ POC Bounce Flash + FLOW SHIFT (Pattern 8)
✅ FLOW SHIFT + Only MICRO-SR above + Volume Spike (Pattern 1)
✅ Strong VA Breakout + Volume Spike + FLOW SHIFT (Pattern 4)
✅ COILED label + Multiple stacked MICRO-SR + Delta >30 (Pattern 11)
DANGER ZONES (Stay Out):
⛔ BULL ATTACK + BEAR ATTACK alternating (Pattern 3)
⛔ FLOW SHIFT + No volume + Quick exhaust (Pattern 9)
⛔ EQUILIBRIUM at current price with tight VA range
⛔ WALL collision without clear direction (Pattern 13 - wait for outcome)
FADE/REVERSAL SETUPS:
🔄 EXHAUST at price level + Approaching POC (Pattern 2)
🔄 Weak VA Breakout + DEFENSE opposite side (Pattern 5)
🔄 Price far from POC + Volume declining (Pattern 6)
🔄 FAILED SHIFT appears + Opposite momentum (Pattern 12)
🔄 REJECT label + Opposite ATTACK/DEFENSE (Pattern 14)
HOLD/MOMENTUM CONTINUATION:
🚀 Multiple volume spikes + ATTACK label + ⇈/⇊ arrows (Pattern 7)
🚀 All bullish/bearish signals aligned (Pattern 10)
🚀 COILED spring release through wall (Pattern 11)
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
Remember: The indicator shows you WHERE the big money is (POC), WHAT they're doing (FLOW SHIFT), and HOW HARD they're doing it (volume spikes, momentum). Your job is to follow the big money, not fight them. When institutions shift, you shift. When they exhaust, you fade. When they're in a war, you stay out. Trade with the whales, not against them.
════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
ENHANCED DELTA VOLUME PROFILE - TECHNICAL CALCULATIONS GUIDE
How Each Element is Actually Calculated
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
🧮 CORE CALCULATIONS (The Math Behind What You See)
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
📊 VOLUME BINS = Price range divided into 40 horizontal slices
The indicator takes the last 100 candles (configurable), finds the highest and lowest price touched, then divides that range into 40 equal "bins" (horizontal price levels). Each bin collects volume from candles that touched that price range. Example: BTC ranged from $99,500 to $100,500 in the last 100 bars. That's $1,000 range ÷ 40 bins = $25 per bin. Bin 1 = $99,500-$99,525, Bin 2 = $99,525-$99,550, etc.
🟦🟥 DELTA CALCULATION = (Bull Volume - Bear Volume) / Total Volume × 100
For each bin, the indicator separates bullish candles (close > open) from bearish candles (close < open). Delta = ((bull volume - bear volume) / total volume) × 100. This gives you a percentage from -100% (pure selling) to +100% (pure buying). Example: At $100,000, if 70 BTC was traded on green candles and 30 BTC on red candles, delta = ((70-30)/100) × 100 = 40% bullish.
🎨 GRADIENT COLOR = Delta converted to color spectrum
The delta percentage (-100 to +100) is mapped to a color gradient. -100% = pure bearish color (orange/red), 0% = neutral, +100% = pure bullish color (cyan/blue). The color you see on each bar directly represents the delta. Example: A bright cyan bar = high positive delta (strong buying), orange bar = high negative delta (strong selling), gray bar = balanced (delta near 0%).
🟩 POC (Point of Control) = Bin with the absolute highest total volume
The indicator sums up all volume in each of the 40 bins, then finds which bin has the most. That's your POC. Example: Bin 15 (around $100,000) collected 1,250 BTC of volume, which is more than any other bin. Bin 15 is your POC. This is where the most trading happened and where most traders are positioned.
⬜ VALUE AREA (VA) = The bins containing 70% of total volume, centered on POC
Starting from the POC, the indicator expands up and down, adding bins one at a time (choosing the bin with more volume each time) until it has captured 70% of all volume. The top of this range = VA High, bottom = VA Low. Example: POC at $100,000. Expanding out captures 70% of volume from $99,700 to $100,300. VA Low = $99,700, VA High = $100,300.
📈📉 VOLUME TREND = (Recent Volume - Old Volume) / Total Volume
The indicator splits your 100-bar lookback into three periods: Recent (last 15 bars), Mid (bars 15-30), and Older (last 15 bars of the 100). For each bin, it compares recent volume to older volume. If recent > older, trend is UP. If recent < older, trend is DOWN. Example: At $100,000, recent 15 bars had 80 BTC volume, older 15 bars had 40 BTC. Trend = (80-40)/(80+40) = 0.33 = UP. This shows volume is increasing at this level.
💜 MICRO-SR DETECTION = High volume (>60% of max) + High hits (>20% of max) + Active volume trend
A bin becomes MICRO-SR if: (1) Its volume is at least 60% of the highest-volume bin, (2) Price touched it frequently (at least 20% as many times as the most-touched bin), (3) Volume trend isn't flat (absolute trend > 0.05). Example: Bin at $99,975 has 750 BTC (75% of max), was hit 45 times (30% of max hits), volume trend = 0.08. = MICRO-SR (magenta border).
🟡 EXHAUSTION DETECTION = Extreme delta (>65%) + Declining volume trend (<-0.15) OR Extreme delta + Volume spike (>1.5× average)
Two ways to detect exhaustion: (1) One side dominated (delta > 65% or < -65%) BUT volume is decreasing (trend < -0.15), meaning participation is dropping. (2) Extreme delta WITH a huge volume spike (>1.5× average for that bin), meaning climactic volume. Example: At $100,200, delta = 72% bullish, but volume trend = -0.22 (declining). = BULL EXHAUST. Bulls won but are running out of steam.
🔵 FLOW SHIFT DETECTION = Delta changed sign (+ to - or - to +) + Delta change >40% + Volume trend increasing (>0.1)
Compares each bin's delta to the previous bin's delta. If delta flipped from negative to positive (or vice versa) by more than 40%, AND volume is increasing, = FLOW SHIFT. Example: Previous bin at $99,950 had -35% delta (bearish). Current bin at $100,000 has +45% delta (bullish). Change = 80% (flipped + exceeded 40%), volume trend = +0.15. = FLOW SHIFT ↑.
⇈⇊ DELTA MOMENTUM = Current delta - Average delta of last 3 bins
For each bin, the indicator looks at the previous 3 bins, calculates their average delta, then compares current delta to that average. If current delta is significantly higher/lower than the 3-bin average, momentum arrows appear. Example: Last 3 bins had deltas of 20%, 25%, 30% (average = 25%). Current bin delta = 55%. Momentum = 55 - 25 = +30 = ⇈ (strong bullish acceleration).
🟢🔴 VOLUME ACCELERATION = Rate of change of volume trend across three periods
Compares how volume changed from Old→Mid vs Mid→Recent. If Recent increased MORE than Mid did compared to Old, = positive acceleration. Formula: ((Recent-Mid) - (Mid-Old)) / |Mid-Old|. Example: Old=100, Mid=120, Recent=160. Mid increased by 20, Recent increased by 40. Acceleration = (40-20)/20 = 1.0 = strong acceleration (green velocity band).
⚖️ BALANCE SCORE = Combines volume balance, price range balance, and hit frequency
Three factors weighted equally: (1) How balanced is bull vs bear volume? (1 - |bull-bear|/total). (2) How tight is the price range? (1 - avgRange/maxRange). (3) How frequently was it hit? (hits/maxHits). Multiply these together. Score >0.7 = EQUILIBRIUM. Example: Volume is 55% bull / 45% bear = 0.9 balance. Range is tight = 0.8. Hit frequently = 0.85. Score = 0.9 × 0.8 × 0.85 = 0.61 = ROTATION.
📊 BULL/BEAR ATTACK/DEFENSE = Delta threshold (>60% or <-60%) + Volume trend direction
ATTACK = High delta (>60% either direction) + Volume trend increasing (>0.15). DEFENSE = High delta (>60% either direction) + Volume trend NOT increasing (≤0.15). Example: Delta = 68% bullish, volume trend = 0.22 = BULL ATTACK (buying with increasing volume). Delta = 68% bullish, volume trend = 0.05 = BULL DEFENSE (buying but volume not increasing).
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
🎯 SIGNAL CALCULATIONS (The New Features)
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
💜 VOLUME SPIKE = Current bar volume / 20-bar average volume
Takes the current candle's volume and divides it by the simple moving average of the last 20 candles' volume. If ratio >2.0 (configurable), spike detected. The label shows the exact multiplier. Example: Current candle = 450 BTC volume. 20-bar average = 140 BTC. Ratio = 450/140 = 3.21 = "x3.2" label appears in magenta above the candle.
🟢🔴 VA BREAKOUT MOMENTUM = POC bin's delta (absolute value)
When price breaks VA High or VA Low, the indicator looks at the POC bin's delta to measure momentum strength. Uses absolute value (ignore direction). <30 = WEAK, 30-60 = MED, >60 = STRONG. Line thickness and style change based on this. Example: BTC breaks VA High. POC bin delta = 72%. Momentum = 72 = STRONG. Line = width 4 (thick), dashed (flash effect), label shows "VA High 72Δ V✓ STRONG".
📊 BREAKOUT LINE THICKNESS = Momentum-based dynamic sizing
- Momentum <30: Line width = 2 (thin), solid line
- Momentum 30-60: Line width = 3 (medium), solid line
- Momentum >60: Line width = 4 (thick), dashed line (creates flash effect)
Example: Breakout with 45% momentum = width 3 solid line. Breakout with 75% momentum = width 4 dashed line (flashing).
✓ VOLUME CONFIRMATION = Current volume / 20-bar average >1.5
Checks if the breakout candle has strong volume. If current volume is at least 1.5× the 20-bar average, adds "V✓" to the label. Example: Breakout candle has 280 BTC volume, 20-bar average is 160 BTC. Ratio = 280/160 = 1.75 > 1.5 = "V✓" appears in label.
🔵 POC BOUNCE DETECTION = Price within 0.5 bin-step of POC + Bullish reversal candle + Previous candle was bearish
Three conditions must all be true: (1) Current close price is within half a bin's height from POC price. (2) Current candle is bullish (close > open). (3) Previous candle was bearish (close < open). If all true = POC bounce, cyan dashed flash line appears. Example: POC at $100,000, bin step = $25. Current close = $100,008 (within $12.50 of POC ✓). Current candle green ✓. Previous candle red ✓. = POC Bounce Flash.
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
⚙️ TECHNICAL PARAMETERS (What You Can Adjust)
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
🔢 LOOKBACK PERIOD (Default: 100 bars) = How much history to analyze
The number of candles backwards from current that get analyzed. More bars = more stable but slower to react. Fewer bars = more reactive but noisier. For 1-minute BTC scalping, 100 bars = last 100 minutes = 1 hour 40 minutes of data. Example: Setting to 50 bars makes it more reactive to recent action but less stable. Setting to 200 bars makes it smoother but slower to show new developments.
🎚️ NUMBER OF BINS (Default: 40) = Resolution of price levels
How many horizontal slices to divide the price range into. More bins = finer resolution but more noise. Fewer bins = smoother but less precise. 40 bins for 1-minute = good balance. Example: With $1,000 range, 40 bins = $25 per level. 20 bins would be $50 per level (less precise). 60 bins would be $16.67 per level (more precise but noisier).
📏 DISPLAY OFFSET (Default: 10 bars) = How far right the profile extends
How many bars to the right of current candle the volume profile displays. Purely visual - doesn't affect calculations. Example: Offset = 10 means the profile extends 10 bars to the right. Offset = 30 means it extends further right (more separation from candles).
📊 VOLUME TREND PERIOD (Default: 15 bars) = How many recent bars define "recent"
The number of bars considered "recent" vs "old" when calculating volume trends. Shorter = more sensitive to very recent changes. Longer = smoother trends. Example: 15 bars means "recent" = last 15 candles (last 15 minutes on 1m chart). Setting to 5 would make it hyper-reactive to the last 5 minutes. Setting to 30 would make it smoother.
🎯 EXHAUSTION THRESHOLD (Default: 65%) = How extreme delta must be for exhaustion
The minimum delta percentage to trigger exhaustion detection. Higher = more selective (only extreme cases). Lower = more signals but more false positives. Example: 65% means delta must be >65% or <-65% to qualify. Setting to 75% would only catch the most extreme exhaustion. Setting to 55% would catch more cases.
💜 MICRO-LEVEL THRESHOLD (Default: 60%) = How strong a level must be for MICRO-SR
The minimum volume percentage (relative to max) required for MICRO-SR detection. Higher = fewer, stronger levels. Lower = more levels but weaker. Example: 60% means bin must have at least 60% of the max bin's volume. Setting to 70% would show only the strongest levels. Setting to 50% would show more levels.
⚡ DELTA MOMENTUM PERIOD (Default: 3 bars) = How many bins to average for momentum
How many previous bins to average when calculating delta momentum. Shorter = more sensitive acceleration signals. Longer = smoother, less noisy. Example: 3 bins means compares current to average of last 3. Setting to 5 would smooth out momentum detection. Setting to 2 would make it more reactive.
🌊 FLOW SHIFT SENSITIVITY (Default: 40%) = Minimum delta change for flow shift
How much delta must change between consecutive bins to trigger FLOW SHIFT. Lower = more flow shift signals (more sensitive). Higher = fewer, stronger signals. Example: 40% means delta must flip by at least 40% (e.g., from -20% to +20% or from +10% to -30%). Setting to 60% would only catch major reversals. Setting to 25% would catch smaller shifts.
💥 VOLUME SPIKE THRESHOLD (Default: 2.0x) = Multiplier to trigger spike signal
How many times above average volume must be to show the spike label. Higher = fewer spikes shown (only extreme). Lower = more spikes shown. Example: 2.0× means current volume must be at least double the 20-bar average. Setting to 3.0× would only show massive spikes. Setting to 1.5× would show more moderate spikes.
🚀 BREAKOUT MOMENTUM MINIMUM (Default: 20%) = Minimum delta for breakout signal
How much delta momentum required at POC for VA breakout to trigger. Higher = fewer breakout signals (more selective). Lower = more signals but more false positives. Example: 20% means POC delta must be at least 20% (or -20%) when price breaks VA. Setting to 30% would only show strong breakouts. Setting to 10% would show weaker breakouts too.
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
🔬 ADVANCED TECHNICAL DETAILS
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
📐 BIN POSITIONING = Price-to-bin mapping formula
For any price P, its bin index = floor((P - MinPrice) / BinStep). BinStep = (MaxPrice - MinPrice) / NumBins. Example: Range $99,000-$100,000, 40 bins. BinStep = $1,000/40 = $25. Price $99,550 → Bin 22: (99,550 - 99,000) / 25 = 22.
📊 VOLUME DISTRIBUTION = Proportional allocation across bins
When a candle spans multiple bins, its volume is distributed proportionally based on how much of the candle's range overlapped each bin. Example: Candle from $99,950 to $100,050 (range = $100) with 50 BTC volume. Bin 1 ($99,950-$99,975) gets 25% of range = 12.5 BTC. Bin 2 ($99,975-$100,000) gets 25% = 12.5 BTC. Bin 3 ($100,000-$100,025) gets 25% = 12.5 BTC. Bin 4 ($100,025-$100,050) gets 25% = 12.5 BTC.
🎨 COLOR GRADIENT MAPPING = Delta to RGB conversion
Delta percentage is normalized to 0-1 scale (from -100/+100 range), then mapped to RGB gradient. -100% (0.0) = Full bearish color RGB. 0% (0.5) = Neutral gray. +100% (1.0) = Full bullish color RGB. Example: Delta = 60% → Normalized = 0.8 → 80% towards full bullish color (bright cyan).
⚖️ BALANCE SCORE FORMULA = Weighted geometric mean
BalanceScore = (VolumeBalance^w) × (PriceBalance^w) × (HitBalance^w), where w=weight (default 1.0). VolumeBalance = 1 - |BullVol - BearVol|/TotalVol. PriceBalance = 1 - AvgRange/MaxRange. HitBalance = Hits/MaxHits. Example: Vol=0.9, Price=0.8, Hit=0.7 → Score = 0.9 × 0.8 × 0.7 = 0.504.
🔄 DELTA HISTORY TRACKING = Rolling array per bin
Each bin maintains an array of its last N delta values (where N = delta momentum period). When calculating momentum, current delta is compared to the average of this array. Example: Bin's delta history = . Average = 25%. Current = 55%. Momentum = 55 - 25 = 30.
📈 VOLUME VELOCITY = Second derivative of volume
Measures acceleration of volume change. Recent change = (Recent - Mid). Old change = (Mid - Old). Acceleration = (Recent change - Old change) / |Old change|. Positive = accelerating. Negative = decelerating. Example: Old=100, Mid=150, Recent=220. Recent change = 70. Old change = 50. Accel = (70-50)/50 = 0.4 = 40% acceleration.
🎯 VA EXPANSION ALGORITHM = Greedy breadth-first from POC
Start at POC bin. While accumulated volume < 70% of total: Look at bin above and bin below POC boundary. Choose whichever has more volume. Add that bin to VA. Repeat. Example: POC at bin 20. Bin 21 (above) has 80 BTC, Bin 19 (below) has 95 BTC. Add bin 19. Now VA = bins 19-20. Next: Bin 21 has 80, Bin 18 has 70. Add bin 21. VA = bins 19-21. Continue until 70% captured.
⏱️ REAL-TIME UPDATES = Recalculates on every new bar close
The entire profile recalculates when barstate.islast = true (current bar). All 40 bins are cleared and rebuilt from scratch using the last N candles. This ensures the profile is always accurate to the current market state. Example: On 1-minute chart, the profile fully recalculates every 60 seconds when the new candle opens.
🎨 RENDERING OPTIMIZATION = 500-bar future limit management
TradingView limits drawing objects to 500 bars into the future. The indicator calculates safe offsets: maxFutureBar = bar_index + 499, then caps all box/line/label positions to stay under this limit. Example: Current bar_index = 1000. Max future = 1499. Display offset wanted = 200. Safe offset = min(200, 400 - 100) = min(200, 300) = 200 ✓ safe.
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
💡 INTERPRETATION TIPS
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
🔢 Understanding Percentages:
- Delta 0-30%: Weak bias, essentially balanced
- Delta 30-60%: Moderate bias, one side has control
- Delta 60-85%: Strong bias, one side dominated
- Delta 85-100%: Extreme bias, one-sided market (exhaustion likely)
📊 Volume Trend Interpretation:
- Trend -1.0 to -0.3: Strong decline in participation
- Trend -0.3 to -0.1: Moderate decline
- Trend -0.1 to +0.1: Stable/flat volume
- Trend +0.1 to +0.3: Moderate increase
- Trend +0.3 to +1.0: Strong increase in participation
🎯 Balance Score Ranges:
- 0.0-0.3: Heavily imbalanced, strong directional bias
- 0.3-0.5: Moderate imbalance, rotation forming
- 0.5-0.7: Balanced rotation zone
- 0.7-1.0: Perfect equilibrium, range-bound
⚡ Momentum Thresholds:
- <10: Negligible momentum change
- 10-20: Moderate acceleration
- 20-40: Strong acceleration (arrow appears)
- >40: Extreme acceleration (very rare, very significant)
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
Understanding these calculations helps you know WHY the indicator is showing what it's showing. When you see "FLOW SHIFT ↑", you now know it calculated a >40% delta flip with increasing volume. When you see MICRO-SR, you know that level has >60% of max volume, >20% of max hits, and active participation. When you see ⇈, you know delta jumped significantly above its 3-bin average. Use this knowledge to trust the signals and understand their strength.
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
LE ScannerGENERAL OVERVIEW:
The LE Scanner is a multi-ticker dashboard that scans up to 20 tickers in real time and displays their current trend, price, volume, and key level conditions directly on your chart. It tracks how each ticker interacts with both the Previous Day’s High/Low (PDH/PDL) and Pre-Market High/Low (PMH/PML) to determine whether price is breaking above, below, or remaining inside those levels. The indicator automatically classifies each ticker as Bullish, Bearish, or Neutral based on these break conditions.
This indicator was developed by Flux Charts in collaboration with Ellis Dillinger (Ellydtrades).
What is the purpose of the indicator?:
The LE Scanner helps traders keep track of up to 20 tickers at once without switching between charts. It puts all the key information in one place, including price, daily percentage change, volume, and how each ticker is reacting around the previous day’s and pre-market highs and lows. The layout is simple and easy to read, with progress bars that show where price is relative to those levels. The goal is to save time and make it easier to understand market strength and weakness across your watchlist.
What’s the theory behind the indicator?:
The LE Scanner is built around the idea that key levels define bias. The previous day’s high and low show where the market traded most actively during the prior session, and the pre-market range reveals how price behaved before the open. When a ticker breaks both the previous day’s high and the pre-market high, it shows that buyers are in control. When it breaks both the previous day’s low and the pre-market low, sellers are in control. If neither side has full control, the bias is seen as neutral.
LE SCANNER FEATURES:
Multi-Ticker Dashboard
Key Level Tracking
Trend Classification
Sorting
Customization
Multi-Ticker Dashboard:
The LE Scanner can monitor up to 20 tickers at the same time. Each ticker has its own row in the dashboard showing:
Ticker Name
Current Price
Volume
Daily % Change
PDH Break
PDL Break
PMH Break
PML Break
Trend (bullish, bearish, or neutral)
You can enable or disable each ticker individually, so if you only want to track 5 or 10 tickers, you can simply toggle the rest off. Each ticker input lets you type in any valid ticker that’s available on TradingView.
Ticker Name:
Shows the ticker you selected in your input settings
Current Price:
Displays the latest price of that ticker based on your chart’s selected timeframe.
Volume:
Tracks the total trading volume for the current session.
Daily % Change:
Measures how much price has moved since the previous session’s close.
The remaining elements of the dashboard are explained in full detail throughout the remaining sections of this write-up.
Key Level Tracking:
The core of the LE Scanner is its ability to track and visualize how price interacts with four key levels for every ticker:
Previous Day High (PDH)
Previous Day Low (PDL)
Pre-Market High (PMH)
Pre-Market Low (PML)
These levels are updated automatically and compared to the current market price for each ticker inputted into the indicator. They show you whether the market is staying inside yesterday’s range or expanding beyond it.
🔹Previous Day High (PDH) & Previous Day Low (PDL)
The Previous Day High (PDH) marks where price reached its highest point during the last full trading session, while the Previous Day Low (PDL) marks the lowest point. Together, they define the previous day’s range and help traders understand where price is trading relative to that prior structure.
When the current price of a user-selected ticker moves above the PDH, it signals that buyers are taking control and that the ticker is now trading above yesterday’s range. In the dashboard, this change triggers a 🟢 icon under the “PDH Break” column. Once the PDH Break is confirmed, the opposite PDL Break column for that same ticker becomes blank.
When the current price of the user-selected ticker moves below the PDL, it shows that sellers are taking control and that the ticker is trading below yesterday’s range. In the dashboard, this change triggers a 🔴 icon under the “PDL Break” column. Once the PDL Break is confirmed, the opposite PDH Break column for that same ticker becomes blank.
🔹 Pre-Market High (PMH) & Pre-Market Low (PML)
The Pre-Market High (PMH) and Pre-Market Low (PML) show where price reached its highest and lowest points before the main trading session begins. On most U.S. exchanges, the pre-market session is from 4:00 AM to 9:29 AM Eastern Standard Time (EST), just before the New York session opens at 9:30 AM EST. These levels are important because they reflect how traders positioned themselves during the early morning hours. Many traders use the pre-market session to react to overnight news. The PMH and PML outline that entire pre-market range, showing where buyers and sellers fought for control and where the early balance between the two sides was established before the market opens.
When the current price of a ticker moves above the Pre-Market High, it means buyers are in control and that price has pushed through the top of the pre-market range. In the dashboard, this triggers a 🟢 icon under the “PMH Break” column. Once this break is confirmed, the opposite PML Break column for that ticker becomes blank.
When the current price moves below the Pre-Market Low, it means sellers are in control and that price has fallen beneath the pre-market range. In the dashboard, this triggers a 🔴 icon under the “PML Break” column. Once a PML Break is confirmed, the opposite PMH Break column for that ticker becomes blank.
🔹Progress Bars
The LE Scanner indicator includes progress bars that show how far the current price is from key levels.
When price is between the Previous Day High (PDH) and Previous Day Low (PDL), the progress bar measures price’s distance relative to those two points.
When price is between the Pre-Market High (PMH) and Pre-Market Low (PML), the bar tracks how far price is from those pre-market boundaries.
The closer price gets to either side, the more the bar fills, giving you a quick visual sense of how close a breakout or breakdown might be. A bar that’s nearly full means price is approaching one of the levels, while a shorter bar means it’s still far away from it. By seeing this relationship directly in the dashboard, you can see which tickers are getting ready to test key levels without flipping through multiple charts.
🔹PDH Progress Bar
The PDH progress bar measures how close price is to breaking above the previous day’s high.
When the bar is nearly full, it means the current price is trading just below yesterday’s high.
When the bar is low or mostly empty, it means price is far from the PDH and trading near the middle or lower end of the previous day’s range.
Once price breaks above the PDH, the progress bar is replaced with a green confirmation icon in the PDH Break column.
🔹Previous Day Low (PDL) Progress Bar
The PDL progress bar measures how close price is to breaking below the previous day’s low.
When the bar is nearly full, it means the current price is trading just above yesterday’s low.
When the bar is low or mostly empty, it means price is far from the PDL and trading near the middle or upper end of the previous day’s range.
Once price breaks below the PDL, the progress bar is replaced with a red confirmation icon in the PDL Break column.
🔹Pre-Market High (PMH) Progress Bar
The PMH progress bar shows how close price is to breaking above the pre-market high.
When the bar is nearly full, it means the current price is trading just below the pre-market high.
When the bar is low or mostly empty, it means price is far from the PMH and trading near the middle or lower end of the pre-market range.
Once price breaks above the PMH, the progress bar is replaced with a green confirmation icon in the PMH Break column.
🔹Pre-Market Low (PML) Progress Bar
The PML progress bar shows how close price is to breaking below the pre-market low.
When the bar is nearly full, it means the current price is trading just above the pre-market low.
When the bar is low or mostly empty, it means price is far from the PML and trading near the middle or upper end of the pre-market range.
Once price breaks below the PML, the progress bar is replaced with a red confirmation icon in the PML Break column.
Trend Classification:
The LE Scanner automatically classifies each user-inputted ticker as bullish, bearish, or neutral based on how price is interacting with its key levels.
Each trend type follows a specific set of conditions and is displayed in its own column under Trend on the dashboard.
🔹 Bullish Trend
A bullish trend occurs when price has broken above both the Previous Day High (PDH) and the Pre-Market High (PMH). This shows that buyers are in full control and that the ticker is trading firmly above the prior session’s and pre-market range.
When this condition is met, the Trend column displays a green background with an upward-facing triangle icon (▲).
🔹 Bearish Trend
A bearish trend occurs when price has broken below both the Previous Day Low (PDL) and the Pre-Market Low (PML). This indicates that sellers are in control and that the ticker is trading firmly below the prior session’s and pre-market range.
When this happens, the Trend column switches to a red background with a downward-facing triangle icon (▼).
🔹 Neutral Trend
A neutral trend occurs when price is trading inside the range, meaning it hasn’t broken above the PDH/PMH or below the PDL/PML. This indicates that neither bulls nor bears has clear control, and the ticker is consolidating between the prior session’s and pre-market range.
When this condition is active, the Trend column appears with a warning sign icon (⚠️). This helps distinguish tickers that are still forming setups from those that have already shown decisive strength or weakness.
Sorting:
The LE Scanner includes a built-in sorting feature that lets you reorder the dashboard in either descending or ascending order based on one of four metrics:
% Change
Volume
Price
Trend
Sorting is handled directly in the indicator settings, where you can toggle “Sort By” and then select your preferred Sort By criteria and Order (Ascending or Descending). When enabled, the dashboard automatically repositions every ticker to match the selected sorting method.
🔹 % Change Sorting
When you sort by % Change, the dashboard ranks tickers based on their daily percentage movement relative to the previous session’s close.
If you choose descending order, the biggest gainers appear at the top.
If you choose ascending order, the biggest decliners appear at the top.
🔹 Volume Sorting
When you sort by Volume, the dashboard arranges tickers based on their total traded volume for the current session.
If you choose descending order, the highest-volume tickers appear at the top.
If you choose ascending order, the lowest-volume tickers appear at the top.
🔹 Price Sorting
When you sort by Price, the dashboard arranges tickers by their current market price.
If you choose descending order, the highest-priced tickers appear at the top.
If you choose ascending order, the lowest-priced tickers appear at the top.
🔹 Trend Sorting
When you sort by Trend, the dashboard organizes tickers based on their directional classification.
If you choose descending order, bullish tickers appear first, followed by neutral and bearish.
If you choose ascending order, bearish tickers appear first, followed by neutral and bullish.
Customization:
The LE Scanner includes several settings that let you customize how the dashboard appears on your chart. All visual and positional elements can be adjusted to fit your personal layout preferences.
🔹 Dashboard Position
You can move the dashboard anywhere on your chart using the “Table Position” setting. Options include:
Bottom-Center
Bottom-Left
Bottom-Right
Middle-Center
Middle-Left
Middle-Right
Top-Center
Top-Left
Top-Right
🔹 Dashboard Size
The dashboard size can be adjusted to be larger or smaller. Users can choose between the following options:
Tiny
Small
Normal
Large
Huge
🔹 Color Customization
All color elements in the dashboard are customizable. You can change the following:
Background Color
Border Color
Frame Color
Text Color
Bullish Trend Color
Bearish Trend Color
Important Notes:
Because the LE Scanner tracks multiple tickers and updates all data in real time, it performs several background calculations at once. On rare occasions, this can cause the following issue:
Computation Error:
Scanning up to 20 tickers at the same time requires multiple request.security() calls. This process is resource-intensive and can sometimes trigger a calculation timeout message in TradingView. If this occurs, simply force the indicator to refresh by changing one of its settings (for example, toggling a ticker off and back on) or by removing and re-adding the indicator to your chart.
Uniqueness:
The LE Scanner is unique because it combines real-time multi-ticker tracking, sortable data, and visual feedback into one tool. It can track up to 20 tickers simultaneously, automatically sort them by % change, volume, price, or trend. The built-in progress bars provide a clear visual of how close price is to breaking key levels, while the trend classification instantly shows whether each ticker is bullish, bearish, or neutral.
LE LevelsGENERAL OVERVIEW:
The LE Levels indicator plots yesterday’s high/low and today’s pre-market high/low directly on your chart, then layers signal logic around those levels and a set of EMA waves. You can choose “Inside” setups, “Outside” setups, or both. You can also pick entries that trigger at levels, entries that trigger off the EMA wave, or both.
This indicator was developed by Flux Charts in collaboration with Ellis Dillinger (Ellydtrades).
What is the purpose of the indicator?:
The purpose of the LE Levels indicator is to give traders a clear view of how price is behaving around key session levels and EMA structure. It follows the same model EllyD teaches by showing where price is relative to the Previous Day High and Low and the Pre-Market High and Low, then printing signals when specific reactions occur around those levels.
What is the theory behind the indicator?:
The theory behind the LE Levels indicator is based on the concept of inside and outside days. An inside day occurs when price trades within the previous day’s high and low, signaling compression and potential breakout conditions. An outside day occurs when price moves beyond those boundaries, confirming expansion and directional bias. When price trades above the PDH or PMH, it reflects bullish control and potential continuation if supported by volume and momentum. When price trades below the PDL or PML, it shows bearish control and possible downside continuation. The idea is to combine this logic with tickers that have catalysts or news, since these events often bring higher-than-normal volume.
LE SCANNER FEATURES:
Key Levels
Signals
EMA Waves
Key Levels:
The LE Levels indicator automatically plots four key levels each day:
Previous Day High (PDH)
Previous Day Low (PDL)
Pre-Market High (PMH)
Pre-Market Low (PML)
🔹How are Key Levels used in the indicator?:
The key levels are a crucial factor in determining if the trend is bullish, bearish, or neutral trend bias. The indicator uses the key levels as a condition for identifying inside or outside setups (explained below). After determining a trend bias and setup type, the indicator prints long and short entry signals based on how price interacts with the key levels and 8 EMA Wave. (explained below).
These levels define where price previously reacted or reversed, helping traders visualize how current price action relates to prior session structure. They update automatically each day and pre-market session, allowing traders to see if price is trading inside, above, or below prior key ranges without manually drawing them.
Please Note: Pre-market times are based on U.S. market hours (Eastern Standard Time) and may vary for non-U.S. tickers or exchanges.
🔹Previous Day High (PDH):
The PDH marks the highest price reached during the previous regular trading session. It shows where buyers pushed price to its highest point before the market closed. This value is automatically pulled from the daily chart and projected forward onto intraday timeframes.
🔹Previous Day Low (PDL):
The PDL marks the lowest price reached during the previous regular trading session. It shows where selling pressure reached its lowest point before buyers stepped in. Like the PDH, this level is retrieved from the prior day’s data and extended into the current session.
🔹Pre-Market High (PMH):
The PMH is the highest price reached between 4:00 AM and 9:29 AM EST, before the regular market open. It shows how far buyers managed to push price up during the pre-market session.
🔹Pre-Market Low (PML):
The PML is the lowest price reached between 4:00 AM and 9:29 AM EST, before the regular market open. It shows how far sellers were able to drive price down during the pre-market session.
🔹Customization Options:
Extend Levels:
Extends each plotted line a user-defined number of bars into the future, keeping them visible even as new candles print. This helps maintain a clear visual reference as the session progresses.
Extend PDH/L Left & Extend PMH/L Left:
These settings let you extend the Previous Day and Pre-Market levels back to their origin point, so you can see exactly where each level was formed on the prior trading day. This makes it easy to understand the context of each level and how it developed. When this option is disabled, the lines begin at the regular session open instead of extending backward into the previous day’s data.
Show Name / Show Price:
Enabling Show Name displays labels (PDH, PDL, PMH, PML) beside each line, while Show Price adds the exact price value. You can choose to show just the name, just the price, or both for a complete label format.
Line Color and Style:
Each level can be fully customized. You can change the line color and select between solid, dashed, or dotted styles to visually distinguish each level type.
At the bottom of the indicator settings, under the ‘Miscellaneous’ section, two additional options allow further control over how levels are displayed:
Hide Previous Day Highs/Lows:
When enabled, the previous day’s high and low levels aren’t shown. When disabled, users can view previous day levels without using replay mode. By default, this setting is enabled.
Disabled:
Enabled:
Hide Previous Pre-Market Highs/Lows:
When enabled, the previous pre-market high and low levels aren’t shown. When disabled, users can view previous pre-market levels without using replay mode. By default, this setting is enabled.
Disabled:
Enabled:
Signals:
The LE Levels indicator automatically prints long and short entry signals based on how price interacts with its key levels (PDH, PDL, PMH, PML) and the EMA Waves. It identifies moments when price either breaks out beyond prior ranges or retests those levels in alignment with momentum shown by the EMA Waves.
There are two types of setups (Inside and Outside) and two entry types ((L)evels and (E)MAs). Together, these settings allow traders to customize the type of structure the indicator recognizes and how signals are generated.
🔹What is an Inside Setup?
An Inside Setup occurs when the current trading session forms entirely within the previous day’s range, meaning price has not yet broken above the Previous Day High (PDH) or below the Previous Day Low (PDL). In the LE Levels indicator, inside setups are recognized when price trades within the previous day’s boundaries while also considering the pre-market range (Pre-Market High and Pre-Market Low).
Inside Setups have two main conditions, depending on directional bias:
Bullish Inside Setup:
Price trades above the Pre-Market High (PMH) and above the Previous Day Low (PDL), while still below the Previous Day High (PDH).
Bearish Inside Setup:
Price trades below the Pre-Market Low (PML) and below the Previous Day High (PDH), while still above the Previous Day Low (PDL).
🔹What is an Outside Setup?
An Outside Setup occurs when the current trading session extends beyond the previous day’s range, meaning price has broken above the Previous Day High (PDH) or below the Previous Day Low (PDL). This structure reflects expansion and directional control, showing that either buyers or sellers have taken price into new territory beyond the prior session’s boundaries.
In the indicator, an Outside Setup forms once price closes beyond both the previous day and pre-market boundaries, showing bias in one direction.
Bullish Outside Setup:
Price closes above both the PDH and the PMH, confirming buyers have pushed through every key resistance from the prior session and the pre-market.
Bearish Outside Setup:
Price closes below both the PDL and the PML, showing sellers have pushed price beneath all key support levels from the previous session and the pre-market.
🔹Entry Types: (L)evels and (E)MAs
Once a setup type (Inside or Outside) has been established, the LE Levels indicator generates trade signals using one of two entry confirmation methods: (L) for Key Level based Entries and (E) for EMA Wave based Entries. These determine how the signal prints and what triggers it within.
🔹(L)evels Entry:
The (L)evels entry type is built around how price reacts to the key levels (PDH, PDL, PMH, PML). It prints when price retests those levels during an active setup. The logic focuses on retests, where price returns to confirm a previous breakout or breakdown before continuing in the same direction.
Bullish Outside (L)evels Setup:
A Bullish Outside Setup forms when price breaks above both the PDH and PMH. Once this breakout occurs, the indicator waits for a pullback to one of those levels. For a signal to print, the 8 EMA Wave must also be near that level, showing momentum is supporting the structure. A small buffer is applied between price and the level so that even if price only comes close, without fully touching, the retest still counts. When price holds above the PDH or PMH with the 8 EMA nearby, the indicator prints an (L) ▲ entry.
Bearish Outside (L)evels Setup:
A Bearish Outside Setup forms when price breaks below both the PDL and PML. Once this breakdown occurs, the indicator waits for a pullback to one of those levels. For a signal to print, the 8 EMA Wave must also be near that area, confirming momentum is aligned with the move. A small buffer is included so that even if price comes close but doesn’t fully touch the level, the retest still qualifies. When price holds below the PDL or PML with the 8 EMA nearby, the indicator prints an (L) ▼ entry.
Bullish Inside (L)evels Setup:
A Bullish Inside Setup forms when price trades above the PMH but stays below the PDH and above the PDL. Once this condition is met, the indicator waits for a pullback to the PMH. For a signal to print, the 8 EMA Wave must also be near that level. A small buffer is applied so that even if price only comes close to the level, the retest still counts. When price holds above the PMH with the 8 EMA nearby, the indicator prints an (L) ▲ entry.
Bearish Inside (L)evels Setup:
A Bearish Inside Setup forms when price trades below the PML but stays above the PDL and below the PDH. Once this condition is met, the indicator waits for a pullback to the PML. For a signal to print, the 8 EMA Wave must also be near that level. A small buffer is applied so that even if price only comes close, the retest still counts. When price holds below the PML with the 8 EMA nearby, the indicator prints an (L) ▼ entry.
🔹(E)MAs Entry:
The (E)MA Entry type focuses on how price reacts to the 8 EMA Wave. It identifies when price first interacts with the EMAs, then confirms continuation once momentum resumes in the setup’s direction. The first candle that touches the EMA prints an (E) marker, and the confirmation signal triggers only after price breaks above or below that candle, depending on the bias.
Bullish Outside (E)MA Setup:
A Bullish Outside Setup forms when price is trading above both the PDH and PMH. Once this breakout occurs, the indicator waits for price to pull back and touch the 8 EMA Wave, which prints the initial (E) label. If price then breaks above that candle’s high, the continuation setup is confirmed.
Bearish Outside (E)MA Setup:
A Bearish Outside Setup forms when price is trading below both the PDL and PML. After the breakdown, the indicator waits for price to pull back to the 8 EMA Wave, marking the candle that touches it with an (E) label. If price then breaks below that candle’s low, the continuation setup is confirmed.
Bullish Inside (E)MA Setup:
A Bullish Inside Setup forms when price trades above the PMH but remains below the PDH and above the PDL. The indicator waits for price to retrace and touch the 8 EMA Wave, which prints the initial (E) label. If price then breaks above that candle’s high, the continuation setup is confirmed.
Bearish Inside (E)MA Setup:
A Bearish Inside Setup forms when price trades below the PML but remains above the PDL and below the PDH. Once price touches the 8 EMA Wave, the indicator prints an (E) marker. If price then breaks below that candle’s low, the continuation setup is confirmed.
🔹Signal Settings:
At the bottom of the indicator settings panel, three core controls define how signals are displayed and which setups the indicator actively scans for. These settings allow you to refine signal generation based on your trading approach and chart preference.
Setup Type:
This setting determines which structural conditions the indicator tracks.
Inside Setups: Signals only appear when price is trading within the previous day’s range (between PDH and PDL).
Outside Setups: Signals only appear when price breaks outside the previous day’s range (above PDH/PMH or below PDL/PML).
Both: Enables signals for both Inside and Outside setups.
Entry Type:
Controls how the indicator confirms entries.
(E)MAs: Prints signals based on price interacting with the 8 EMA Wave.
(L)evels: Prints signals based on price retesting key levels such as PDH, PDL, PMH, or PML.
Both: Allows both EMA and Level-based signals to appear on the same chart.
Signal Filters (Long, Short, and Re-Entry):
These toggles let you control which trade directions are active.
Long: Displays only bullish entries and ignores all short setups.
Short: Displays only bearish entries and ignores long setups.
Re-Entry: Enables or disables repeated signals in the same direction after the first valid setup has printed. When off, only the initial signal is shown until conditions reset.
EMA Waves:
The EMA Waves help identify potential entries and show directional bias. They’re made of grouped EMAs that form shaded areas to create a “wave” look. The color-coding on the waves allows users to view when price is consolidating, in a bullish trend, or in a bearish trend. The wave updates in real time as new candles form and does not repaint historical data.
🔹8 EMA Wave
The 8 EMA Wave is used directly in the indicator’s signal logic described earlier. It reacts fastest to price compared to the other EAM Waves and determines when (L) and (E) signals can trigger.
How It Works:
The wave is made from the 8, 9, and 10 EMAs and fills the space between them to create a “wave” look. The 8 EMA Wave continuously updates its color based on where price trades relative to the key levels (PDH, PDL, PMH, PML). The color changes are conditional and based solely on price position relative to key levels.
Price is above both PDH and PMH: The wave is bright green, and the top half is purple.
Price is between PDH and PMH: The wave is dark green, and the top half is purple.
Price is below both PDL and PML: The wave is bright red, and the bottom half is purple.
Price is between PDL and PML: The wave is dark red, and the bottom half is purple.
Price is between all four levels: The wave is gray to represent consolidation or neutral bias.
🔹8 EMA Wave Signal Function:
For (L)evels entries, the 8 EMA must be close to the key level being retested, with a small buffer that allows near touches to qualify.
For (E)MA entries, the first candle that touches the wave prints an (E), and the confirmation signal appears when price breaks that candle’s high or low.
🔹8 EMA Wave Customization:
Users can customize all colors for bullish, bearish, and neutral conditions directly in the settings. The purple overlay color cannot be changed, as it is hard-coded into the indicator. The 8 EMA Wave can also be toggled on or off. Turning it off only removes the visual display from the chart and does not affect signals.
🔹20 EMA Wave
The 20 EMA Wave measures medium-term momentum and helps visualize larger pullbacks. It reacts more slowly than the 8 EMA Wave, giving a smoother wave look. No signals are generated from it. It’s purely a visual guide for spotting potential pullback areas for continuation setups.
How It Works:
The wave is made from the 19, 20, and 21 EMAs and fills the space between them to create a shaded “wave.” The color updates continuously based on where price trades relative to the key levels (PDH, PDL, PMH, PML). The color changes are conditional and based only on price position relative to these levels.
Price is above both PDH and PMH: The wave is bright green, and the top half is blue.
Price is between PDH and PMH: The wave is dark green, and the top half is blue.
Price is below both PDL and PML: The wave is bright red, and the bottom half is blue.
Price is between PDL and PML: The wave is dark red, and the bottom half is blue.
Price is between all four levels: The wave is gray to represent consolidation or neutral bias.
🔹20 EMA Wave Use Case:
After 12:00 PM EST, the 20 EMA Wave is used to spot larger pullbacks that form later in the session. No signals are generated from it; it only serves as a visual guide for identifying potential continuation areas.
Bullish Continuation Pullback:
Bearish Continuation Pullback:
🔹20 EMA Wave Customization:
Users can customize all colors for bullish, bearish, and neutral conditions directly in the settings. The blue overlay color cannot be changed, as it is hard-coded into the indicator. The 20 EMA Wave can also be toggled on or off.
🔹200 EMA Wave
The 200 EMA Wave is used to determine long-term trend bias. When price is above it, the bias is bullish; when price is below it, the bias is bearish. It updates automatically in real time and is used to define the broader directional bias for the day.
How it Works:
The 200 EMA Wave is created using the 190, 199, and 200 EMAs, with the area between them shaded to form a “wave.”
🔹200 EMA Wave Use Case:
When price is above the 200 EMA Wave and both the 8 and 20 EMA Waves are stacked above it, the overall trend is bullish.
When price is below the 200 EMA Wave and both shorter-term waves are also below it, the overall trend is bearish.
🔹200 EMA Wave Customization:
Users can customize both colors that form the 200 EMA Wave. The entire wave can also be toggled on or off in the settings.
Uniqueness:
The LE Levels indicator is unique because it combines signal logic with a clear visual structure. It automatically detects inside and outside setups, printing (L) and (E) entries based on how price reacts to key levels and the EMA Waves. Each signal follows strict conditions tied to the 8 EMA and key levels. The color-coded EMA Waves make it simple to understand where price is in relation to the key levels and getting a quick trend bias overview.
TraderDemircan Auto Fibonacci RetracementDescription:
What This Indicator Does:This indicator automatically identifies significant swing high and swing low points within a customizable lookback period and draws comprehensive Fibonacci retracement and extension levels between them. Unlike the manual Fibonacci tool that requires you to constantly redraw levels as price action evolves, this automated version continuously updates the Fibonacci grid based on the most recent major swing points, ensuring you always have current and relevant support/resistance zones displayed on your chart.Key Features:
Automatic Swing Detection: Continuously scans the specified lookback period to find the most significant high and low points, eliminating manual drawing errors
Comprehensive Level Coverage: Plots 16 Fibonacci levels including 7 retracement levels (0.0 to 1.0) and 9 extension levels (1.115 to 3.618)
Top-Down Methodology: Draws from swing high to swing low (right-to-left), following the traditional Fibonacci retracement convention where 100% is at the top
Dual Labeling System: Shows both exact price values and Fibonacci percentages for easy reference
Complete Customization: Individual toggle controls and color selection for each of the 16 levels
Flexible Display Options: Adjust line thickness (1-5), style (solid/dashed/dotted), and extension direction (left/right/both)
Visual Swing Markers: Red diamond at the swing high (starting point) and green diamond at the swing low (ending point)
Optional Trend Line: Connects the two swing points to visualize the overall price movement direction
How It Works:The indicator employs a sophisticated swing point detection algorithm that operates in two stages:Stage 1 - Find the Swing Low (Support Base):
Scans the entire lookback period to identify the lowest low, which becomes the anchor point (0.0 level in traditional retracement terms, though displayed at the bottom of the grid).Stage 2 - Find the Swing High (Resistance Peak):
After identifying the swing low, searches for the highest high that occurred after that low point, establishing the swing range. This creates a valid price movement range for Fibonacci analysis.Fibonacci Calculation Method:
The indicator uses the top-down approach where:
1.0 Level = Swing High (100% retracement, the top)
0.0 Level = Swing Low (0% retracement, the bottom)
Retracement Levels (0.236 to 0.786) = Potential support zones during pullbacks from the high
Extension Levels (1.115 to 3.618) = Potential target zones below the swing low
Formula: Price = SwingHigh - (SwingHigh - SwingLow) × FibonacciLevelThis ensures that 0.0 is at the bottom and extensions (>1.0) plot below the swing low, following standard Fibonacci retracement convention.Fibonacci Levels Explained:Retracement Levels (0.0 - 1.0):
0.0 (Gray): Swing low - the base support level
0.236 (Red): Shallow retracement, first minor support
0.382 (Orange): Moderate retracement, commonly watched support
0.5 (Purple): Psychological midpoint, significant support/resistance
0.618 (Blue - Golden Ratio): The most important retracement level, high-probability reversal zone
0.786 (Cyan): Deep retracement, last defense before full reversal
1.0 (Gray): Swing high - the initial resistance level
Extension Levels (1.115 - 3.618):
1.115 (Green): First extension, minimal downside target
1.272 (Light Green): Minor extension, common profit target
1.414 (Yellow-Green): Square root of 2, mathematical significance
1.618 (Gold - Golden Extension): Primary downside target, most watched extension level
2.0 (Orange-Red): 200% extension, psychological round number
2.382 (Pink): Secondary extension target
2.618 (Purple): Deep extension, major target zone
3.272 (Deep Purple): Extreme extension level
3.618 (Blue): Maximum extension, rare but powerful target
How to Use:For Retracement Trading (Buying Pullbacks in Uptrends):
Wait for price to make a significant move up from swing low to swing high
When price starts pulling back, watch for reactions at key Fibonacci levels
Most common entry zones: 0.382, 0.5, and especially 0.618 (golden ratio)
Enter long positions when price shows reversal signals (candlestick patterns, volume increase) at these levels
Place stop loss below the next Fibonacci level
Target: Return to swing high or higher extension levels
For Extension Trading (Profit Targets):
After price breaks below the swing low (0.0 level), use extensions as profit targets
First target: 1.272 (conservative)
Primary target: 1.618 (golden extension - most commonly reached)
Extended target: 2.618 (for strong trends)
Extreme target: 3.618 (only in powerful trending moves)
For Counter-Trend Trading (Fading Extremes):
When price reaches deep retracements (0.786 or below), look for exhaustion signals
Watch for divergences between price and momentum indicators at these levels
Enter reversal trades with tight stops below the swing low
Target: 0.5 or 0.382 levels on the bounce
For Trend Continuation:
In strong uptrends, shallow retracements (0.236 to 0.382) often hold
Use these as low-risk entry points to join the existing trend
Failure to hold 0.5 suggests weakening momentum
Breaking below 0.618 often indicates trend reversal, not just retracement
Multi-Timeframe Strategy:
Use daily timeframe Fibonacci for major support/resistance zones
Use 4H or 1H Fibonacci for precise entry timing within those zones
Confluence between multiple timeframe Fibonacci levels creates high-probability zones
Example: Daily 0.618 level aligning with 4H 0.5 level = strong support
Settings Guide:Lookback Period (10-500):
Short (20-50): Captures recent swings, more frequent updates, suited for day trading
Medium (50-150): Balanced approach, good for swing trading (default: 100)
Long (150-500): Identifies major market structure, suited for position trading
Higher values = more stable levels but slower to adapt to new trends
Pivot Sensitivity (1-20):
Controls how many candles are required to confirm a swing point
Low (1-5): More sensitive, identifies minor swings (default: 5)
High (10-20): Less sensitive, only major swings qualify
Use higher sensitivity on lower timeframes to filter noise
Individual Level Toggles:
Enable only the levels you actively trade to reduce chart clutter
Common minimalist setup: Show only 0.382, 0.5, 0.618, 1.0, 1.618, 2.618
Comprehensive setup: Enable all levels for maximum information
Visual Customization:
Line Thickness: Thicker lines (3-5) for presentation, thinner (1-2) for trading
Line Style: Solid for primary levels (0.5, 0.618, 1.618), dashed/dotted for secondary
Price Labels: Essential for knowing exact entry/exit prices
Percent Labels: Helpful for quickly identifying which Fibonacci level you're looking at
Extension Direction: Extend right for forward-looking analysis, left for historical context
What Makes This Original:While Fibonacci indicators are common on TradingView, this script's originality comes from:
Intelligent Two-Stage Detection: Unlike simple high/low finders, this uses a sequential approach (find low first, then find the high that occurred after it), ensuring logical price flow representation
Comprehensive Level Set: Includes 16 levels spanning from retracement to extreme extensions, more than most Fibonacci tools
Top-Down Methodology: Properly implements the traditional Fibonacci retracement convention (high to low) rather than the reverse
Automatic Range Validation: Only draws Fibonacci when both swing points are valid and in the correct temporal order
Dual Extension Options: Separate controls for extending lines left (historical context) and right (forward projection)
Smart Label Positioning: Places percentage labels on the left and price labels on the right for clarity
Visual Swing Confirmation: Diamond markers at swing points help users understand why levels are positioned where they are
Important Considerations:
Historical Nature: Fibonacci retracements are based on past price swings; they don't predict future moves, only suggest potential support/resistance
Self-Fulfilling Prophecy: Fibonacci levels work partly because many traders watch them, creating actual support/resistance at those levels
Not All Levels Hold: In strong trends, price may slice through multiple Fibonacci levels without pausing
Context Matters: Fibonacci works best when aligned with other support/resistance (previous highs/lows, moving averages, trendlines)
Volume Confirmation: The most reliable Fibonacci reversals occur with volume spikes at key levels
Dynamic Updates: The levels will redraw as new swing highs/lows form, so don't rely solely on static screenshots
Best Practices:
Don't Trade Blindly: Fibonacci levels are zones, not exact prices. Look for confirmation (candlestick patterns, indicators, volume)
Combine with Price Action: Watch for pin bars, engulfing candles, or doji at key Fibonacci levels
Use Stop Losses: Place stops beyond the next Fibonacci level to give trades room but limit risk
Scale In/Out: Consider entering partial positions at 0.5 and adding more at 0.618 rather than all-in at one level
Check Multiple Timeframes: Daily Fibonacci + 4H Fibonacci convergence = high-probability zone
Respect the 0.618: This golden ratio level is historically the most reliable for reversals
Extensions Need Strong Trends: Don't expect extensions to be hit unless there's clear momentum beyond the swing low
Optimal Timeframes:
Scalping (1-5 minutes): Lookback 20-30, watch 0.382, 0.5, 0.618 only
Day Trading (15m-1H): Lookback 50-100, all retracement levels important
Swing Trading (4H-Daily): Lookback 100-200, focus on 0.5, 0.618, 0.786, and extensions
Position Trading (Daily-Weekly): Lookback 200-500, all levels relevant for long-term planning
Common Fibonacci Trading Mistakes to Avoid:
Wrong Swing Selection: Choosing insignificant swings produces meaningless levels
Premature Entry: Entering as soon as price touches a Fibonacci level without confirmation
Ignoring Trend: Fighting the main trend by buying deep retracements in downtrends
Over-Reliance: Using Fibonacci in isolation without confirming with other technical factors
Static Analysis: Not updating your Fibonacci as market structure evolves
Arbitrary Lookback: Using the same lookback period for all assets and timeframes
Integration with Other Tools:Fibonacci + Moving Averages:
When 0.618 level aligns with 50 or 200 EMA, confluence creates stronger support
Price bouncing from both Fibonacci and MA simultaneously = high-probability trade
Fibonacci + RSI/Stochastic:
Oversold indicators at 0.618 or deeper retracements = strong buy signal
Overbought indicators at swing high (1.0) = potential reversal warning
Fibonacci + Volume Profile:
High-volume nodes aligning with Fibonacci levels create robust support/resistance
Low-volume areas near Fibonacci levels may see rapid price movement through them
Fibonacci + Trendlines:
Fibonacci retracement level + ascending trendline = double support
Breaking both simultaneously confirms trend change
Technical Notes:
Uses ta.lowest() and ta.highest() for efficient swing detection across the lookback period
Implements dynamic line and label arrays for clean redraws without memory leaks
All calculations update in real-time as new bars form
Extension options allow customization without modifying core code
Format.mintick ensures price labels match the symbol's minimum price increment
Tooltip on swing markers shows exact price values for precision
Atif's Liquidity Toolkit💎 GENERAL OVERVIEW:
Atif’s Liquidity Toolkit is a price-action-based indicator used to identify Buyside & Sellside Liquidity Levels, Liquidity Sweeps, FVG Sweeps, and Buy/Sell signals, following specific rules from Atif Hussain.
This indicator was developed by Flux Charts in collaboration with Atif Hussain.
🔹Purpose of this indicator:
The purpose of Atif’s Liquidity Toolkit is to help traders understand where liquidity is forming, when it’s being taken, and how momentum shifts immediately afterward. It automates the entire process of identifying buyside & sellside liquidity, detecting liquidity sweeps, and confirming whether displacement followed through a Fair Value Gap. The goal is to give traders a consistent, rule-based framework to interpret market structure.
🎯ATIF’S LIQUIDITY TOOLKIT FEATURES:
Atif’s Liquidity Toolkit indicator includes 6 main features:
Fair Value Gaps
Multi-Timeframe Liquidity Levels
Liquidity Sweeps
Fair Value Gap Sweeps
Buy & Sell Signals with Take-Profit & Stop-Loss Levels
Alerts
1️⃣Fair Value Gaps
🔹What is a Fair Value Gap?:
A Fair Value Gap (FVG) is an area where the market’s perception of fair value suddenly changes. On your chart, it appears as a three-candle pattern: a large candle in the middle, with smaller candles on each side that don’t fully overlap it. A bullish FVG forms when a bullish candle is between two smaller bullish/bearish candles, where the first and third candles’ wicks don’t overlap each other at all. A bearish FVG forms when a bearish candle is between two smaller bullish/bearish candles, where the first and third candles’ wicks don’t overlap each other at all.
Bullish & Bearish FVGs:
In the settings, you can toggle on/off FVGs, choose the invalidation method, adjust the sensitivity, and toggle on FVG Midline & Labels.
🔹Invalidation Method:
The Invalidation Method setting allows traders to choose how an FVG is invalidated. You can choose between Close and Wick.
Close: A candle must close below a bullish FVG or above a bearish FVG to invalidate it.
Wick: A candle’s wick must go below a bullish FVG or above a bearish FVG to invalidate it.
🔹Sensitivity:
The sensitivity setting determines the minimum gap size required for an FVG detection. A higher sensitivity will filter out smaller gaps, while a lower sensitivity will detect more frequent, smaller gaps. Setting the sensitivity to 0 will display all gaps, regardless of their size.
On the left, the sensitivity is 5. On the right, the sensitivity is 0.
🔹Midline:
When enabled, a dashed line is drawn at the center of the FVG.
🔹Labels:
When enabled, a text label will be plotted with the gap, clearly identifying the zone as a FVG.
2️⃣ Multi-Timeframe Liquidity Levels
The indicator automatically detects and plots Buyside Liquidity (BSL) & Sellside Liquidity (SSL) Levels across up to three timeframes simultaneously.
🔹What is Buyside Liquidity?
Buyside Liquidity (BSL) represents price levels where many buy stop orders are sitting, usually from traders holding short positions. When price moves into these areas, those stop-loss orders get triggered and short sellers are forced to buy back their positions. These zones often form above key highs such as the previous day, week, or month. Understanding BSL is important because when price reaches these levels, the sudden wave of buy orders can create sharp reactions or reversals as liquidity is taken from the market.
🔹What is Sellside Liquidity?
Sellside Liquidity (SSL) represents price levels where many sell stop orders are waiting, usually from traders holding long positions. When price drops into these areas, those stop-loss orders are triggered and long traders are forced to sell their positions. These zones often form below key lows such as the previous day, week, or month. Understanding SSL is important because when price reaches these levels, the surge of sell orders can cause sharp reactions or reversals as liquidity is taken from the market.
Atif’s Liquidity Toolkit indicator automatically plots Buyside & Sellside Liquidity levels using the following levels:
Previous Day High (PDH) & Previous Day Low (PDL)
Previous Week High (PWH) & Previous Week Low (PWL)
Previous Month High (PMH) & Previous Month Low (PML)
Asia Session Highs/Lows
London Session Highs/Lows
New York Session Highs/Lows
The session start and end times are not customizable. The following times in EST are used for each session:
Asia Session: 20:00-00:00
London Session: 02:00-05:00
New York Sessions:
NY AM: 09:30-11:00
NY Lunch: 12:00-13:00
NY PM: 14:00-16:00
Users can also plot swing highs/lows using a lookback period and choosing the higher timeframe. Users can choose two custom higher timeframes and also enable swing highs/lows from the current chart’s timeframe.
There are three settings to customize for the current chart’s timeframe and higher timeframes:
Current TF - when toggled on, swing highs/lows will be plotted from the chart’s timeframe using the pivot length input
HTF 1 - when toggled on, swing highs/lows will be plotted from the user-inputted timeframe using the pivot length input
HTF 2 - when toggled on, swing highs/lows will be plotted from the user-inputted timeframe using the pivot length input
The Pivot Length controls how far back the indicator checks to confirm whether a candle’s high or low is a true swing point (also called a “pivot”). When detecting a swing high, the indicator checks if that candle’s high is higher than the highs of the previous X candles and the next X candles. For a swing low, it checks if the candle’s low is lower than the lows of the previous X candles and the next X candles. The number X comes from your Pivot Length setting.
A lower Pivot Length input (for example, 3 or 4) means the indicator only looks at a few candles on each side, so it will detect more swing points, including smaller, less significant ones. A higher Pivot Length input (for example, 20 or 25) makes the indicator look at more candles on each side, so it only marks major turning points that stand out clearly on the chart.
In short:
Low Pivot Length = more frequent, smaller levels (short-term focus)
High Pivot Length = fewer, stronger levels (major swing focus)
The Pivot Length input for each setting (Current TF, HTF 1, and HTF 2) are displayed below in the red boxes:
Each liquidity level is plotted with a text label, making it easy to identify where a level came from. You can turn off the ‘Show Levels’ setting if you don’t want to see the levels on your chart.
Please note: Liquidity Levels play a key role in finding liquidity sweeps, FVG Sweeps, and Buy/Sell signals. Keeping the levels turned off will not stop the indicator from using the levels that are enabled from being used for the other features mentioned.
3️⃣Liquidity Sweeps:
The indicator automatically detects bullish and bearish liquidity sweeps using the liquidity levels you have enabled.
🔹What is a Liquidity Sweep?
A liquidity sweep is a market phenomenon where significant players, such as institutional traders, deliberately drive prices through key levels to trigger clusters of pending buy or sell orders. It’s how the market gathers the liquidity needed for larger participants to enter positions.
Traders often place stop-loss orders around obvious highs and lows, such as the previous day’s, week’s, or month’s levels. When price pushes through one of these areas, it triggers the stops placed there and generates a burst of volume. This often creates a short-term fake-out before the market reverses in the opposite direction.
By detecting these sweeps in real time, traders can identify potential reversal areas or “trap” areas where liquidity has been taken.
🔹Bullish Liquidity Sweep
These occur when price dips below a Sellside Liquidity (SSL) level, taking out the stop-loss orders placed by long traders below that low. The indicator marks a zone around the candle that swept the SSL to highlight where liquidity was removed from the market.
When this happens, it shows that the market just cleared out sell-side liquidity, meaning traders who were long had their stops hit. This is often followed by a reversal or strong reaction upward, because the market no longer has pending liquidity to fill below that level.
🔹Bearish Liquidity Sweep
These occur when price dips above a Buyside Liquidity (BSL) level, taking out the stop-loss orders placed by short seller traders above that high. The indicator marks a zone around the candle that swept the BSL to highlight where liquidity was removed from the market.
When this happens, it shows that the market just cleared out buyside liquidity, meaning short traders had their stops hit. This is often followed by a reversal or strong reaction downward, because the market no longer has pending liquidity to fill above that level.
Under the ‘Liquidity Sweeps’ section in the settings, you can toggle on/off Bullish Regular Sweeps and Bearish Regular Sweeps. You can also customize the line style and color of liquidity levels that have been swept.
🔹How to Use Liquidity Sweeps
Liquidity sweeps are not direct trade signals. They are best used as context when forming a directional bias. A sweep shows that the market has removed liquidity from one side, which can hint at where the next move may develop.
For example:
When Buyside Liquidity (BSL) is swept, it often signals that buy stops have been triggered and the market may be preparing to move lower. Traders may then begin looking for short opportunities.
When Sellside Liquidity (SSL) is swept, it often signals that sell stops have been triggered and the market may be preparing to move higher. Traders may then begin looking for long opportunities.
It’s common practice to use liquidity sweeps as the first step in building a trade idea. Many traders will wait for additional confirmation, such as a fair value gap forming after the sweep, before opening a position.
Under the ‘Liquidity Sweeps’ section in the settings, you can toggle on/off:
Bullish Regular Sweeps - when disabled, Bullish Regular Sweeps won’t appear on your chart.
Bearish Regular Sweeps - when disabled, Bearish Regular Sweeps won’t appear on your chart.
4️⃣Fair Value Gap Sweeps:
The indicator automatically detects bullish and bearish Fair Value Gap sweeps (FVG Sweep) using the liquidity levels you have enabled.
🔹What is a FVG Sweep?
A FVG Sweep is a specific type of liquidity sweep that not only clears liquidity above or below a key level, but also forms a Fair Value Gap (FVG) immediately afterward.
The liquidity sweep shows where stop orders were triggered, areas where the market aggressively took out one side’s liquidity. The formation of a Fair Value Gap right after the sweep confirms that displacement followed. This means that the sweep was not just a stop hunt, but a deliberate move backed by momentum.
In simple terms, a regular liquidity sweep only tells you that liquidity was taken. A FVG Sweep tells you that liquidity was taken and a strong directional move started immediately after, leaving an imbalance in price. That imbalance represents where aggressive buyers or sellers entered the market without enough opposite-side orders to keep price balanced. This combination adds a confirmation and intent behind regular liquidity sweeps.
🔹Bullish FVG Sweep
The indicator automatically detects bullish FVG Sweeps when price takes out a Sellside Liquidity (SSL) level and then forms a bullish FVG within the next few candles. This sequence shows that sellers were stopped out and buyers immediately entered the market with momentum.
🔹Bearish FVG Sweep
The indicator automatically detects bearish FVG Sweeps when price takes out a Buyside Liquidity (BSL) level and then forms a bearish FVG shortly after. This shows that short sellers’ stops were triggered, and new selling pressure entered the market right away.
🔹How to Use FVG Sweeps
Unlike regular liquidity sweeps, FVG Sweeps can be used as trade entries because they confirm both liquidity being cleared and immediate momentum. A regular sweep only shows that stop-losses were triggered, but an FVG Sweep proves that price not only cleared liquidity but also moved away with momentum, leaving behind an imbalance (Fair Value Gap). This shift often marks the start of a new short-term trend.
We’ll cover this in more detail in the Buy and Sell Signal section below, but in short, a bullish FVG Sweep can act as confirmation for a potential long entry after price takes out a low, while a bearish FVG Sweep can confirm a short entry after price takes out a high.
The strongest FVG Sweeps come from extremely sharp reversals. On the chart, they look like a “V” shape for bullish setups or an inverted “V” shape for bearish setups. This shape shows how quickly momentum shifted after liquidity was cleared. When price instantly reverses and leaves a Fair Value Gap behind, it’s a clear sign that buyers or sellers stepped in aggressively and absorbed all available liquidity on the opposite side.
In practice, traders often use FVG Sweeps as a trigger to align their bias. For example, after a bullish FVG Sweep, the focus shifts toward looking for long setups within the new imbalance or during a small retracement into the Fair Value Gap. After a bearish FVG Sweep, traders focus on short setups as price retraces back into the gap before continuing lower. The key takeaway is that FVG Sweeps show conviction.
Under the ‘Liquidity Sweeps’ section in the settings, you can toggle on/off:
Bullish FVG Sweeps - when disabled, Bullish FVG Sweeps won’t appear on your chart.
Bearish FVG Sweeps - when disabled, Bearish FVG Sweeps won’t appear on your chart.
Please Note: the settings you choose to use for Fair Value Gaps, under the ‘Fair Value Gaps’ section, will be used for FVG Sweeps. This is important because if you increase the sensitivity value for FVGs, not all FVG Sweeps will appear if the FVG’s size doesn’t meet the sensitivity threshold.
5️⃣Buy & Sell Signals:
This indicator also plots Buy & Sell signals. These signals follow logic based on Atif Hussain’s FVG trading model. The entry requirements for a Long & Short signal are outlined below.
🔹Buy Signal:
In order for a Buy Signal to generate, the following conditions must occur in order:
Bullish FVG Sweep
Price Retraces to the Bullish FVG
🔹Sell Signal:
In order for a Buy Signal to generate, the following conditions must occur in order:
Bearish FVG Sweep
Price Retraces to the FVG
🔹Require Retracement:
Under the ‘Signals’ section in the settings, you can toggle on/off the ‘Require Retracement’ setting. When disabled, a long/short signal will appear immediately after a Bullish or Bearish FVG Sweep, instead of waiting for price to retrace back to the gap.
Please Note: the liquidity levels you enable under the ‘Liquidity Levels’ section will be the levels used for signals. Thus, if you only have the Previous Day Highs/Lows enabled, then only those levels will be used to generate buy/sell signals. Also, long Signals will only appear if Bullish FVG Sweeps are enabled, and Short Signals will only appear if Bearish FVG Sweeps are enabled.
When a Buy Signal or Sell Signal is plotted, three suggested take-profit levels and one suggested stop-loss level are plotted. There are two different Take-Profit methods you can choose from within the indicator settings: Manual or Auto.
🔹Manual Take-Profit:
If you’re using manual take-profit levels, you can customize the Risk-to-Reward (RR) for Take-Profit 1, 2, and 3 by adjusting the “RR 1”, “RR 2”, and “RR 3” settings. Setting RR 1 to 1 means take-profit 1 is a 1:1 risk-to-reward ratio. The stop-loss will always be placed at the recent low for Buy Signals, and at the recent high for Sell Signals.
🔹Auto Take-Profit:
If you select to use Auto Take-Profit instead of Manual, then Take-Profit 1, 2, and 3 will be automatically determined based on nearby liquidity levels. The stop-loss will be placed at the recent low for Buy Signals, and at the recent high for Sell Signals. Take-Profit Levels 1, 2, and 3 will be placed at the three closest opposite liquidity levels. If the take-profit 2 and take-profit 3 levels are too far away, only one take-profit level will be displayed.
🔹Signal Settings:
Long Signals:
When enabled, long signals are shown. When disabled, long signals will not appear.
Short Signals:
When enabled, short signals are shown. When disabled, short signals will not appear.
Require Retracement:
When enabled, price must retrace to a FVG after a FVG Sweep in order for a signal to be generated.
Take-Profit Levels:
When enabled, take-profit levels (TP 1, TP 2, and TP 3) are shown with long/short signals. When disabled, take-profit levels and their price labels are not displayed.
Take-Profit Labels:
When enabled, take-profit labels are displayed when price reaches one of the three take-profit levels. When disabled, labels won’t appear when price reaches take-profit levels.
Stop-Loss Levels:
When enabled, stop-loss levels are shown for long/short signals. When disabled, the stop-loss level and its price label are not displayed.
Stop-Loss Labels:
When enabled, stop-loss levels are shown for long/short signals. When disabled, a label won’t appear when price reaches the stop-loss level.
6️⃣Alerts:
The indicator supports alerts, so you never miss a key market move. You can choose to receive alerts for each of the following conditions:
Bearish Liquidity Sweep
Bullish Liquidity Sweep
Bearish FVG Sweep
Bullish FVG Sweep
Long Signal
Short Signal
TP 1
TP 2
TP 3
Stop-Loss
‼️Important Notes:
TradingView has limitations when running features on multiple timeframes, such as the liquidity levels, which can result in the following error:
🔹Computation Error:
The computation of using MTF features are very intensive on TradingView. This can sometimes cause calculation timeouts. When this occurs, simply force the recalculation by modifying one indicator’s settings or by removing the indicator and adding it to your chart again.
🚩 UNIQUENESS:
This indicator is unique because it identifies a specific type of liquidity event referred to as FVG Sweeps, where price takes liquidity and then immediately forms a Fair Value Gap in the opposite direction. These FVG Sweeps serve as the foundation of the model, and the script uses them as the required condition for generating Buy and Sell signals. Once an FVG Sweep is confirmed, the indicator automatically produces a fully defined trade idea with a stop-loss and up to three take-profit targets, following a consistent rule-based execution approach.
Manifold Singularity EngineManifold Singularity Engine: Catastrophe Theory Detection Through Multi-Dimensional Topology Analysis
The Manifold Singularity Engine applies catastrophe theory from mathematical topology to multi-dimensional price space analysis, identifying potential reversal conditions by measuring manifold curvature, topological complexity, and fractal regime states. Unlike traditional reversal indicators that rely on price pattern recognition or momentum oscillators, this system reconstructs the underlying geometric surface (manifold) that price evolves upon and detects points where this topology undergoes catastrophic folding—mathematical singularities that correspond to forced directional changes in price dynamics.
The indicator combines three analytical frameworks: phase space reconstruction that embeds price data into a multi-dimensional coordinate system, catastrophe detection that measures when this embedded manifold reaches critical curvature thresholds indicating topology breaks, and Hurst exponent calculation that classifies the current fractal regime to adaptively weight detection sensitivity. This creates a geometry-based reversal detection system with visual feedback showing topology state, manifold distortion fields, and directional probability projections.
What Makes This Approach Different
Phase Space Embedding Construction
The core analytical method reconstructs price evolution as movement through a three-dimensional coordinate system rather than analyzing price as a one-dimensional time series. The system calculates normalized embedding coordinates: X = normalize(price_velocity, window) , Y = normalize(momentum_acceleration, window) , and Z = normalize(volume_weighted_returns, window) . These coordinates create a trajectory through phase space where price movement traces a path across a geometric surface—the market manifold.
This embedding approach differs fundamentally from traditional technical analysis by treating price not as a sequential data stream but as a dynamical system evolving on a curved surface in multi-dimensional space. The trajectory's geometric properties (curvature, complexity, folding) contain information about impending directional changes that single-dimension analysis cannot capture. When this manifold undergoes rapid topological deformation, price must respond with directional change—this is the mathematical basis for catastrophe detection.
Statistical normalization using z-score transformation (subtracting mean, dividing by standard deviation over a rolling window) ensures the coordinate system remains scale-invariant across different instruments and volatility regimes, allowing identical detection logic to function on forex, crypto, stocks, or indices without recalibration.
Catastrophe Score Calculation
The catastrophe detection formula implements a composite anomaly measurement combining multiple topology metrics: Catastrophe_Score = 0.45×Curvature_Percentile + 0.25×Complexity_Ratio + 0.20×Condition_Percentile + 0.10×Gradient_Percentile . Each component measures a distinct aspect of manifold distortion:
Curvature (κ) is computed using the discrete Laplacian operator: κ = √ , which measures how sharply the manifold surface bends at the current point. High curvature values indicate the surface is folding or developing a sharp corner—geometric precursors to catastrophic topology breaks. The Laplacian measures second derivatives (rate of change of rate of change), capturing acceleration in the trajectory's path through phase space.
Topological Complexity counts sign changes in the curvature field over the embedding window, measuring how chaotically the manifold twists and oscillates. A smooth, stable surface produces low complexity; a highly contorted, unstable surface produces high complexity. This metric detects when the geometric structure becomes informationally dense with multiple local extrema, suggesting an imminent topology simplification event (catastrophe).
Condition Number measures the Jacobian matrix's sensitivity: Condition = |Trace| / |Determinant|, where the Jacobian describes how small changes in price produce changes in the embedding coordinates. High condition numbers indicate numerical instability—points where the coordinate transformation becomes ill-conditioned, suggesting the manifold mapping is approaching a singularity.
Each metric is converted to percentile rank within a rolling window, then combined using weighted sum. The percentile transformation creates adaptive thresholds that automatically adjust to each instrument's characteristic topology without manual recalibration. The resulting 0-100% catastrophe score represents the current bar's position in the distribution of historical manifold distortion—values above the threshold (default 65%) indicate statistically extreme topology states where reversals become geometrically probable.
This multi-metric ensemble approach prevents false signals from isolated anomalies: all four geometric features must simultaneously indicate distortion for a high catastrophe score, ensuring only true manifold breaks trigger detection.
Hurst Exponent Regime Classification
The Hurst exponent calculation implements rescaled range (R/S) analysis to measure the fractal dimension of price returns: H = log(R/S) / log(n) , where R is the range of cumulative deviations from mean and S is the standard deviation. The resulting value classifies market behavior into three fractal regimes:
Trending Regime (H > 0.55) : Persistent price movement where future changes are positively correlated with past changes. The manifold exhibits directional momentum with smooth topology evolution. In this regime, catastrophe signals receive 1.2× confidence multiplier because manifold breaks in trending conditions produce high-magnitude directional changes.
Mean-Reverting Regime (H < 0.45) : Anti-persistent price movement where future changes tend to oppose past changes. The manifold exhibits oscillatory topology with frequent small-scale distortions. Catastrophe signals receive 0.8× confidence multiplier because reversal significance is diminished in choppy conditions where the manifold constantly folds at minor scales.
Random Walk Regime (H ≈ 0.50) : No statistical correlation in returns. The manifold evolution is geometrically neutral with moderate topology stability. Standard 1.0× confidence multiplier applies.
This adaptive weighting system solves a critical problem in reversal detection: the same geometric catastrophe has different trading implications depending on the fractal regime. A manifold fold in a strong trend suggests a significant reversal opportunity; the same fold in mean-reversion suggests a minor oscillation. The Hurst-based regime filter ensures detection sensitivity automatically adjusts to market character without requiring trader intervention.
The implementation uses logarithmic price returns rather than raw prices to ensure
stationarity, and applies the calculation over a configurable window (default 5 bars) to balance responsiveness with statistical validity. The Hurst value is then smoothed using exponential moving average to reduce noise while maintaining regime transition detection.
Multi-Layer Confirmation Architecture
The system implements five independent confirmation filters that must simultaneously validate
before any singularity signal generates:
1. Catastrophe Threshold : The composite anomaly score must exceed the configured threshold (default 0.65 on 0-1 scale), ensuring the manifold distortion is statistically extreme relative to recent history.
2. Pivot Structure Confirmation : Traditional swing high/low patterns (using ta.pivothigh and ta.pivotlow with configurable lookback) must form at the catastrophe bar. This ensures the geometric singularity coincides with observable price structure rather than occurring mid-swing where interpretation is ambiguous.
3. Swing Size Validation : The pivot magnitude must exceed a minimum threshold measured in ATR units (default 1.5× Average True Range). This filter prevents signals on insignificant price jiggles that lack meaningful reversal potential, ensuring only substantial swings with adequate risk/reward ratios generate signals.
4. Volume Confirmation : Current volume must exceed 1.3× the 20-period moving average, confirming genuine market participation rather than low-liquidity price noise. Manifold catastrophes without volume support often represent false topology breaks that don't translate to sustained directional change.
5. Regime Validity : The market must be classified as either trending (ADX > configured threshold, default 30) or volatile (ATR expansion > configured threshold, default 40% above 30-bar average), and must NOT be in choppy/ranging state. This critical filter prevents trading during geometrically unfavorable conditions where edge deteriorates.
All five conditions must evaluate true simultaneously for a signal to generate. This conjunction-based logic (AND not OR) dramatically reduces false positives while preserving true reversal detection. The architecture recognizes that geometric catastrophes occur frequently in noisy data, but only those catastrophes that align with confirming evidence across price structure, participation, and regime characteristics represent tradable opportunities.
A cooldown mechanism (default 8 bars between signals) prevents signal clustering at extended pivot zones where the manifold may undergo multiple small catastrophes during a single reversal process.
Direction Classification System
Unlike binary bull/bear systems, the indicator implements a voting mechanism combining four
directional indicators to classify each catastrophe:
Pivot Vote : +1 if pivot low, -1 if pivot high, 0 otherwise
Trend Vote : Based on slow frequency (55-period EMA) slope—+1 if rising, -1 if falling, 0 if flat
Flow Vote : Based on Y-gradient (momentum acceleration)—+1 if positive, -1 if negative, 0 if neutral
Mid-Band Vote : Based on price position relative to medium frequency (21-period EMA)—+1 if above, -1 if below, 0 if at
The total vote sum classifies the singularity: ≥2 votes = Bullish , ≤-2 votes = Bearish , -1 to +1 votes = Neutral (skip) . This majority-consensus approach ensures directional classification requires alignment across multiple timeframes and analysis dimensions rather than relying on a single indicator. Neutral signals (mixed voting) are displayed but should not be traded, as they represent geometric catastrophes without clear directional resolution.
Core Calculation Methodology
Embedding Coordinate Generation
Three normalized phase space coordinates are constructed from price data:
X-Dimension (Velocity Space):
price_velocity = close - close
X = (price_velocity - mean) / stdev over hurstWindow
Y-Dimension (Acceleration Space):
momentum = close - close
momentum_accel = momentum - momentum
Y = (momentum_accel - mean) / stdev over hurstWindow
Z-Dimension (Volume-Weighted Space):
vol_normalized = (volume - mean) / stdev over embedLength
roc = (close - close ) / close
Z = (roc × vol_normalized - mean) / stdev over hurstWindow
These coordinates define a point in 3D phase space for each bar. The trajectory connecting these points is the reconstructed manifold.
Gradient Field Calculation
First derivatives measure local manifold slope:
dX/dt = X - X
dY/dt = Y - Y
Gradient_Magnitude = √
The gradient direction indicates where the manifold is "pushing" price. Positive Y-gradient suggests upward topological pressure; negative Y-gradient suggests downward pressure.
Curvature Tensor Components
Second derivatives measure manifold bending using discrete Laplacian:
Laplacian_X = X - 2×X + X
Laplacian_Y = Y - 2×Y + Y
Laplacian_Magnitude = √
This is then normalized:
Curvature_Normalized = (Laplacian_Magnitude - mean) / stdev over embedLength
High normalized curvature (>1.5) indicates sharp manifold folding.
Complexity Accumulation
Sign changes in curvature field are counted:
Sign_Flip = 1 if sign(Curvature ) ≠ sign(Curvature ), else 0
Topological_Complexity = sum(Sign_Flip) over embedLength window
This measures oscillation frequency in the geometry. Complexity >5 indicates chaotic topology.
Condition Number Stability Analysis
Jacobian matrix sensitivity is approximated:
dX/dp = dX/dt / (price_change + epsilon)
dY/dp = dY/dt / (price_change + epsilon)
Jacobian_Determinant = (dX/dt × dY/dp) - (dX/dp × dY/dt)
Jacobian_Trace = dX/dt + dY/dp
Condition_Number = |Trace| / (|Determinant| + epsilon)
High condition numbers indicate numerical instability near singularities.
Catastrophe Score Assembly
Each metric is converted to percentile rank over embedLength window, then combined:
Curvature_Percentile = percentrank(abs(Curvature_Normalized), embedLength)
Gradient_Percentile = percentrank(Gradient_Magnitude, embedLength)
Condition_Percentile = percentrank(abs(Condition_Z_Score), embedLength)
Complexity_Ratio = clamp(Topological_Complexity / embedLength, 0, 1)
Final score:
Raw_Anomaly = 0.45×Curvature_P + 0.25×Complexity_R + 0.20×Condition_P + 0.10×Gradient_P
Catastrophe_Score = Raw_Anomaly × Hurst_Multiplier
Values are clamped to range.
Hurst Exponent Calculation
Rescaled range analysis on log returns:
Calculate log returns: r = log(close) - log(close )
Compute cumulative deviations from mean
Find range: R = max(cumulative_dev) - min(cumulative_dev)
Calculate standard deviation: S = stdev(r, hurstWindow)
Compute R/S ratio
Hurst = log(R/S) / log(hurstWindow)
Clamp to and smooth with 5-period EMA
Regime Classification Logic
Volatility Regime:
ATR_MA = SMA(ATR(14), 30)
Vol_Expansion = ATR / ATR_MA
Is_Volatile = Vol_Expansion > (1.0 + minVolExpansion)
Trend Regime (Corrected ADX):
Calculate directional movement (DM+, DM-)
Smooth with Wilder's RMA(14)
Compute DI+ and DI- as percentages
Calculate DX = |DI+ - DI-| / (DI+ + DI-) × 100
ADX = RMA(DX, 14)
Is_Trending = ADX > (trendStrength × 100)
Chop Detection:
Is_Chopping = NOT Is_Trending AND NOT Is_Volatile
Regime Validity:
Regime_Valid = (Is_Trending OR Is_Volatile) AND NOT Is_Chopping
Signal Generation Logic
For each bar:
Check if catastrophe score > topologyStrength threshold
Verify regime is valid
Confirm Hurst alignment (trending or mean-reverting with pivot)
Validate pivot quality (price extended outside spectral bands then re-entered)
Confirm volume/volatility participation
Check cooldown period has elapsed
If all true: compute directional vote
If vote ≥2: Bullish Singularity
If vote ≤-2: Bearish Singularity
If -1 to +1: Neutral (display but skip)
All conditions must be true for signal generation.
Visual System Architecture
Spectral Decomposition Layers
Three harmonic frequency bands visualize entropy state:
Layer 1 (Surface Frequency):
Center: EMA(8)
Width: ±0.3 × 0.5 × ATR
Transparency: 75% (most visible)
Represents fast oscillations
Layer 2 (Mid Frequency):
Center: EMA(21)
Width: ±0.5 × 0.5 × ATR
Transparency: 85%
Represents medium cycles
Layer 3 (Deep Frequency):
Center: EMA(55)
Width: ±0.7 × 0.5 × ATR
Transparency: 92% (most transparent)
Represents slow baseline
Convergence of layers indicates low entropy (stable topology). Divergence indicates high entropy (catastrophe building). This decomposition reveals how different frequency components of price movement interact—when all three align, the manifold is in equilibrium; when they separate, topology is unstable.
Energy Radiance Fields
Concentric boxes emanate from each singularity bar:
For each singularity, 5 layers are generated:
Layer n: bar_index ± (n × 1.5 bars), close ± (n × 0.4 × ATR)
Transparency gradient: inner 75% → outer 95%
Color matches signal direction
These fields visualize the "energy well" of the catastrophe—wider fields indicate stronger topology distortion. The exponential expansion creates a natural radiance effect.
Singularity Node Geometry
N-sided polygon (default hexagon) at each signal bar:
Vertices calculated using polar coordinates
Rotation angle: bar_index × 0.1 (creates animation)
Radius: ATR × singularity_strength × 2
Connects vertices with colored lines
The rotating geometric primitive marks the exact catastrophe bar with visual prominence.
Gradient Flow Field
Directional arrows display manifold slope:
Spawns every 3 bars when gradient_magnitude > 0.1
Symbol: "↗" if dY/dt > 0.1, "↘" if dY/dt < -0.1, "→" if neutral
Color: Bull/bear/neutral based on direction
Density limited to flowDensity parameter
Arrows cluster when gradient is strong, creating intuitive topology visualization.
Probability Projection Cones
Forward trajectory from each singularity:
Projects 10 bars forward
Direction based on vote classification
Center line: close + (direction × ATR × 3)
Uncertainty width: ATR × singularity_strength × 2
Dashed boundaries, solid center
These are mathematical projections based on current gradient, not price targets. They visualize expected manifold evolution if topology continues current trajectory.
Dashboard Metrics Explanation
The real-time control panel displays six core metrics plus regime status:
H (Hurst Exponent):
Value: Current Hurst (0-1 scale)
Label: TREND (>0.55), REVERT (<0.45), or RANDOM (0.45-0.55)
Icon: Direction arrow based on regime
Purpose: Shows fractal character—only trade when favorable
Σ (Catastrophe Score):
Value: Current composite anomaly (0-100%)
Bar gauge shows relative strength
Icon: ◆ if above threshold, ○ if below
Purpose: Primary signal strength indicator
κ (Curvature):
Value: Normalized Laplacian magnitude
Direction arrow shows sign
Color codes severity (green<0.8, yellow<1.5, red≥1.5)
Purpose: Shows manifold bending intensity
⟳ (Topology Complexity):
Value: Count of sign flips in curvature
Icon: ◆ if >3, ○ otherwise
Color codes chaos level
Purpose: Indicates geometric instability
V (Volatility Expansion):
Value: ATR expansion percentage above 30-bar average
Icon: ● if volatile, ○ otherwise
Purpose: Confirms energy present for reversal
T (Trend Strength):
Value: ADX reading (0-100)
Icon: ● if trending, ○ otherwise
Purpose: Shows directional bias strength
R (Regime):
Label: EXPLOSIVE / TREND / VOLATILE / CHOP / NEUTRAL
Icon: ✓ if valid, ✗ if invalid
Purpose: Go/no-go filter for trading
STATE (Bottom Display):
Shows: "◆ BULL SINGULARITY" (green), "◆ BEAR SINGULARITY" (red), "◆ WEAK/NEUTRAL" (orange), or "— Monitoring —" (gray)
Purpose: Current signal status at a glance
How to Use This Indicator
Initial Setup and Configuration
Apply the indicator to your chart with default settings as a starting point. The default parameters (21-bar embedding, 5-bar Hurst window, 2.5σ singularity threshold, 0.65 topology confirmation) are optimized for balanced detection across most instruments and timeframes. For very fast markets (scalping crypto, 1-5min charts), consider reducing embedding depth to 13-15 bars and Hurst window to 3 bars for more responsive detection. For slower markets (swing trading stocks, 4H-Daily charts), increase embedding depth to 34-55 bars and Hurst window to 8-10 bars for more stable topology measurement.
Enable the dashboard (top right recommended) to monitor real-time metrics. The control panel is your primary decision interface—glancing at the dashboard should instantly communicate whether conditions favor trading and what the current topology state is. Position and size the dashboard to remain visible but not obscure price action.
Enable regime filtering (strongly recommended) to prevent trading during choppy/ranging conditions where geometric edge deteriorates. This single setting can dramatically improve overall performance by eliminating low-probability environments.
Reading Dashboard Metrics for Trade Readiness
Before considering any trade, verify the dashboard shows favorable conditions:
Hurst (H) Check:
The Hurst Exponent reading is your first filter. Only consider trades when H > 0.50 . Ideal conditions show H > 0.60 with "TREND" label—this indicates persistent directional price movement where manifold catastrophes produce significant reversals. When H < 0.45 (REVERT label), the market is mean-reverting and catastrophes represent minor oscillations rather than substantial pivots. Do not trade in mean-reverting regimes unless you're explicitly using range-bound strategies (which this indicator is not optimized for). When H ≈ 0.50 (RANDOM label), edge is neutral—acceptable but not ideal.
Catastrophe (Σ) Monitoring:
Watch the Σ percentage build over time. Readings consistently below 50% indicate stable topology with no imminent reversals. When Σ rises above 60-65%, manifold distortion is approaching critical levels. Signals only fire when Σ exceeds the configured threshold (default 65%), so this metric pre-warns you of potential upcoming catastrophes. High-conviction setups show Σ > 75%.
Regime (R) Validation:
The regime classification must read TREND, VOLATILE, or EXPLOSIVE—never trade when it reads CHOP or NEUTRAL. The checkmark (✓) must be present in the regime cell for trading conditions to be valid. If you see an X (✗), skip all signals until regime improves. This filter alone eliminates most losing trades by avoiding geometrically unfavorable environments.
Combined High-Conviction Profile:
The strongest trading opportunities show simultaneously:
H > 0.60 (strong trending regime)
Σ > 75% (extreme topology distortion)
R = EXPLOSIVE or TREND with ✓
κ (Curvature) > 1.5 (sharp manifold fold)
⟳ (Complexity) > 4 (chaotic geometry)
V (Volatility) showing elevated ATR expansion
When all metrics align in this configuration, the manifold is undergoing severe distortion in a favorable fractal regime—these represent maximum-conviction reversal opportunities.
Signal Interpretation and Entry Logic
Bullish Singularity (▲ Green Triangle Below Bar):
This marker appears when the system detects a manifold catastrophe at a price low with bullish directional consensus. All five confirmation filters have aligned: topology score exceeded threshold, pivot low structure formed, swing size was significant, volume/volatility confirmed participation, and regime was valid. The green color indicates the directional vote totaled +2 or higher (majority bullish).
Trading Approach: Consider long entry on the bar immediately following the signal (bar after the triangle). The singularity bar itself is where the geometric catastrophe occurred—entering after allows you to see if price confirms the reversal. Place stop loss below the singularity bar's low (with buffer of 0.5-1.0 ATR for volatility). Initial target can be the previous swing high, or use the probability cone projection as a guide (though not a guarantee). Monitor the dashboard STATE—if it flips to "◆ BEAR SINGULARITY" or Hurst drops significantly, consider exiting even if target not reached.
Bearish Singularity (▼ Red Triangle Above Bar):
This marker appears when the system detects a manifold catastrophe at a price high with bearish directional consensus. Same five-filter confirmation process as bullish signals. The red color indicates directional vote totaled -2 or lower (majority bearish).
Trading Approach: Consider short entry on the bar following the signal. Place stop loss above the singularity bar's high (with buffer). Target previous swing low or use cone projection as reference. Exit if opposite signal fires or Hurst deteriorates.
Neutral Signal (● Orange Circle at Price Level):
This marker indicates the catastrophe detection system identified a topology break that passed catastrophe threshold and regime filters, but the directional voting system produced a mixed result (vote between -1 and +1). This means the four directional components (pivot, trend, flow, mid-band) are not in agreement about which way the reversal should resolve.
Trading Approach: Skip these signals. Neutral markers are displayed for analytical completeness but should not be traded. They represent geometric catastrophes without clear directional resolution—essentially, the manifold is breaking but the direction of the break is ambiguous. Trading neutral signals dramatically increases false signal rate. Only trade green (bullish) or red (bearish) singularities.
Visual Confirmation Using Spectral Layers
The three colored ribbons (spectral decomposition layers) provide entropy visualization that helps confirm signal quality:
Divergent Layers (High Entropy State):
When the three frequency bands (fast 8-period, medium 21-period, slow 55-period) are separated with significant gaps between them, the manifold is in high entropy state—different frequency components of price movement are pulling in different directions. This geometric tension precedes catastrophes. Strong signals often occur when layers are divergent before the signal, then begin reconverging immediately after.
Convergent Layers (Low Entropy State):
When all three ribbons are tightly clustered or overlapping, the manifold is in equilibrium—all frequency components agree. This stable geometry makes catastrophe detection more reliable because topology breaks clearly stand out against the baseline stability. If you see layers converge, then a singularity fires, then layers diverge, this pattern suggests a genuine regime transition.
Signal Quality Assessment:
High-quality singularity signals should show:
Divergent layers (high entropy) in the 5-10 bars before signal
Singularity bar occurs when price has extended outside at least one of the spectral bands (shows pivot extended beyond equilibrium)
Close of singularity bar re-enters the spectral band zone (shows mean reversion starting)
Layers begin reconverging in 3-5 bars after signal (shows new equilibrium forming)
This pattern visually confirms the geometric narrative: manifold became unstable (divergence), reached critical distortion (extended outside equilibrium), broke catastrophically (singularity), and is now stabilizing in new direction (reconvergence).
Using Energy Fields for Trade Management
The concentric glowing boxes around each singularity visualize the topology distortion
magnitude:
Wide Energy Fields (5+ Layers Visible):
Large radiance indicates strong catastrophe with high manifold curvature. These represent significant topology breaks and typically precede larger price moves. Wide fields justify wider profit targets and longer hold times. The outer edge of the largest box can serve as a dynamic support/resistance zone—price often respects these geometric boundaries.
Narrow Energy Fields (2-3 Layers):
Smaller radiance indicates moderate catastrophe. While still valid signals (all filters passed), expect smaller follow-through. Use tighter profit targets and be prepared for quicker exit if momentum doesn't develop. These are valid but lower-conviction trades.
Field Interaction Zones:
When energy fields from consecutive signals overlap or touch, this indicates a prolonged topology distortion region—often corresponds to consolidation zones or complex reversal patterns (head-and-shoulders, double tops/bottoms). Be more cautious in these areas as the manifold is undergoing extended restructuring rather than a clean catastrophe.
Probability Cone Projections
The dashed cone extending forward from each singularity is a mathematical projection, not a
price target:
Cone Direction:
The center line direction (upward for bullish, downward for bearish, flat for neutral) shows the expected trajectory based on current manifold gradient and singularity direction. This is where the topology suggests price "should" go if the catastrophe completes normally.
Cone Width:
The uncertainty band (upper and lower dashed boundaries) represents the range of outcomes given current volatility (ATR-based). Wider cones indicate higher uncertainty—expect more price volatility even if direction is correct. Narrower cones suggest more constrained movement.
Price-Cone Interaction:
Price following near the center line = catastrophe resolving as expected, geometric projection accurate
Price breaking above upper cone = stronger-than-expected reversal, consider holding for larger targets
Price breaking below lower cone (for bullish signal) = catastrophe failing, manifold may be re-folding in opposite direction, consider exit
Price oscillating within cone = normal reversal process, hold position
The 10-bar projection length means cones show expected behavior over the next ~10 bars. Don't confuse this with longer-term price targets.
Gradient Flow Field Interpretation
The directional arrows (↗, ↘, →) scattered across the chart show the manifold's Y-gradient (vertical acceleration dimension):
Upward Arrows (↗):
Positive Y-gradient indicates the momentum acceleration dimension is pushing upward—the manifold topology has upward "slope" at this location. Clusters of upward arrows suggest bullish topological pressure building. These often appear before bullish singularities fire.
Downward Arrows (↘):
Negative Y-gradient indicates downward topological pressure. Clusters precede bearish singularities.
Horizontal Arrows (→):
Neutral gradient indicates balanced topology with no strong directional pressure.
Using Flow Field:
The arrows provide real-time topology state information even between singularity signals. If you're in a long position from a bullish singularity and begin seeing increasing downward arrows appearing, this suggests manifold gradient is shifting—consider tightening stops. Conversely, if arrows remain upward or neutral, topology supports continuation.
Don't confuse arrow direction with immediate price direction—arrows show geometric slope, not price prediction. They're confirmatory context, not entry signals themselves.
Parameter Optimization for Your Trading Style
For Scalping / Fast Trading (1m-15m charts):
Embedding Depth: 13-15 bars (faster topology reconstruction)
Hurst Window: 3 bars (responsive fractal detection)
Singularity Threshold: 2.0-2.3σ (more sensitive)
Topology Confirmation: 0.55-0.60 (lower barrier)
Min Swing Size: 0.8-1.2 ATR (accepts smaller moves)
Pivot Lookback: 3-4 bars (quick pivot detection)
This configuration increases signal frequency for active trading but requires diligent monitoring as false signal rate increases. Use tighter stops.
For Day Trading / Standard Approach (15m-4H charts):
Keep default settings (21 embed, 5 Hurst, 2.5σ, 0.65 confirmation, 1.5 ATR, 5 pivot)
These are balanced for quality over quantity
Best win rate and risk/reward ratio
Recommended for most traders
For Swing Trading / Position Trading (4H-Daily charts):
Embedding Depth: 34-55 bars (stable long-term topology)
Hurst Window: 8-10 bars (smooth fractal measurement)
Singularity Threshold: 3.0-3.5σ (only extreme catastrophes)
Topology Confirmation: 0.75-0.85 (high conviction only)
Min Swing Size: 2.5-4.0 ATR (major moves only)
Pivot Lookback: 8-13 bars (confirmed swings)
This configuration produces infrequent but highly reliable signals suitable for position sizing and longer hold times.
Volatility Adaptation:
In extremely volatile instruments (crypto, penny stocks), increase Min Volatility Expansion to 0.6-0.8 to avoid over-signaling during "always volatile" conditions. In stable instruments (major forex pairs, blue-chip stocks), decrease to 0.3 to allow signals during moderate volatility spikes.
Trend vs Range Preference:
If you prefer trading only strong trends, increase Min Trend Strength to 0.5-0.6 (ADX > 50-60). If you're comfortable with volatility-based trading in weaker trends, decrease to 0.2 (ADX > 20). The default 0.3 balances both approaches.
Complete Trading Workflow Example
Step 1 - Pre-Session Setup:
Load chart with MSE indicator. Check dashboard position is visible. Verify regime filter is enabled. Review recent signals to gauge current instrument behavior.
Step 2 - Market Assessment:
Observe dashboard Hurst reading. If H < 0.45 (mean-reverting), consider skipping this session or using other strategies. If H > 0.50, proceed. Check regime shows TREND, VOLATILE, or EXPLOSIVE with checkmark—if CHOP, wait for regime shift alert.
Step 3 - Signal Wait:
Monitor catastrophe score (Σ). Watch for it climbing above 60%. Observe spectral layers—look for divergence building. If you see curvature (κ) rising above 1.0 and complexity (⟳) increasing, catastrophe is building. Do not anticipate—wait for the actual signal marker.
Step 4 - Signal Recognition:
▲ Bullish or ▼ Bearish triangle appears at a bar. Dashboard STATE changes to "◆ BULL/BEAR SINGULARITY". Energy field appears around the signal bar. Check signal quality:
Was Σ > 70% at signal? (Higher quality)
Are energy fields wide? (Stronger catastrophe)
Did layers diverge before and reconverge after? (Clean break)
Is Hurst still > 0.55? (Good regime)
Step 5 - Entry Decision:
If signal is green/red (not orange neutral), all confirmations look strong, and no immediate contradicting factors appear, prepare entry on next bar open. Wait for confirmation bar to form—ideally it should close in the signal direction (bullish signal → bar closes higher, bearish signal → bar closes lower).
Step 6 - Position Entry:
Enter at open or shortly after open of bar following signal bar. Set stop loss: for bullish signals, place stop at singularity_bar_low - (0.75 × ATR); for bearish signals, place stop at singularity_bar_high + (0.75 × ATR). The buffer accommodates volatility while protecting against catastrophe failure.
Step 7 - Trade Management:
Monitor dashboard continuously:
If Hurst drops below 0.45, consider reducing position
If opposite singularity fires, exit immediately (manifold has re-folded)
If catastrophe score drops below 40% and stays there, topology has stabilized—consider partial profit taking
Watch gradient flow arrows—if they shift to opposite direction persistently, tighten stops
Step 8 - Profit Taking:
Use probability cone as a guide—if price reaches outer cone boundary, consider taking partial profits. If price follows center line cleanly, hold for larger target. Traditional technical targets work well: previous swing high/low, round numbers, Fibonacci extensions. Don't expect precision—manifold projections give direction and magnitude estimates, not exact prices.
Step 9 - Exit:
Exit on: (a) opposite signal appears, (b) dashboard shows regime became invalid (checkmark changes to X), (c) technical target reached, (d) Hurst deteriorates significantly, (e) stop loss hit, or (f) time-based exit if using session limits. Never hold through opposite singularity signals—the manifold has broken in the other direction and your trade thesis is invalidated.
Step 10 - Post-Trade Review:
After exit, review: Did the probability cone projection align with actual price movement? Were the energy fields proportional to move size? Did spectral layers show expected reconvergence? Use these observations to calibrate your interpretation of signal quality over time.
Best Performance Conditions
This topology-based approach performs optimally in specific market environments:
Favorable Conditions:
Well-Developed Swing Structure: Markets with clear rhythm of advances and declines where pivots form at regular intervals. The manifold reconstruction depends on swing formation, so instruments that trend in clear waves work best. Stocks, major forex pairs during active sessions, and established crypto assets typically exhibit this characteristic.
Sufficient Volatility for Topology Development: The embedding process requires meaningful price movement to construct multi-dimensional coordinates. Extremely quiet markets (tight consolidations, holiday trading, after-hours) lack the volatility needed for manifold differentiation. Look for ATR expansion above average—when volatility is present, geometry becomes meaningful.
Trending with Periodic Reversals: The ideal environment is not pure trend (which rarely reverses) nor pure range (which reverses constantly at small scale), but rather trending behavior punctuated by occasional significant counter-trend reversals. This creates the catastrophe conditions the system is designed to detect: manifold building directional momentum, then undergoing sharp topology break at extremes.
Liquid Instruments Where EMAs Reflect True Flow: The spectral layers and frequency decomposition require that moving averages genuinely represent market consensus. Thinly traded instruments with sporadic orders don't create smooth manifold topology. Prefer instruments with consistent volume where EMA calculations reflect actual capital flow rather than random tick sequences.
Challenging Conditions:
Extremely Choppy / Whipsaw Markets: When price oscillates rapidly with no directional persistence (Hurst < 0.40), the manifold undergoes constant micro-catastrophes that don't translate to tradable reversals. The regime filter helps avoid these, but awareness is important. If you see multiple neutral signals clustering with no follow-through, market is too chaotic for this approach.
Very Low Volatility Consolidation: Tight ranges with ATR below average cause the embedding coordinates to compress into a small region of phase space, reducing geometric differentiation. The manifold becomes nearly flat, and catastrophe detection loses sensitivity. The regime filter's volatility component addresses this, but manually avoiding dead markets improves results.
Gap-Heavy Instruments: Stocks that gap frequently (opening outside previous close) create discontinuities in the manifold trajectory. The embedding process assumes continuous evolution, so gaps introduce artifacts. Most gaps don't invalidate the approach, but instruments with daily gaps >2% regularly may show degraded performance. Consider using higher timeframes (4H, Daily) where gaps are less proportionally significant.
Parabolic Moves / Blowoff Tops: When price enters an exponential acceleration phase (vertical rally or crash), the manifold evolves too rapidly for the standard embedding window to track. Catastrophe detection may lag or produce false signals mid-move. These conditions are rare but identifiable by Hurst > 0.75 combined with ATR expansion >2.0× average. If detected, consider sitting out or using very tight stops as geometry is in extreme distortion.
The system adapts by reducing signal frequency in poor conditions—if you notice long periods with no signals, the topology likely lacks the geometric structure needed for reliable catastrophe detection. This is a feature, not a bug: it prevents forced trading during unfavorable environments.
Theoretical Justification for Approach
Why Manifold Embedding?
Traditional technical analysis treats price as a one-dimensional time series: current price is predicted from past prices in sequential order. This approach ignores the structure of price dynamics—the relationships between velocity, acceleration, and participation that govern how price actually evolves.
Dynamical systems theory (from physics and mathematics) provides an alternative framework: treat price as a state variable in a multi-dimensional phase space. In this view, each market condition corresponds to a point in N-dimensional space, and market evolution is a trajectory through this space. The geometry of this space (its topology) constrains what trajectories are possible.
Manifold embedding reconstructs this hidden geometric structure from observable price data. By creating coordinates from velocity, momentum acceleration, and volume-weighted returns, we map price evolution onto a 3D surface. This surface—the manifold—reveals geometric relationships that aren't visible in price charts alone.
The mathematical theorem underlying this approach (Takens' Embedding Theorem from dynamical systems theory) proves that for deterministic or weakly stochastic systems, a state space reconstruction from time-delayed observations of a single variable captures the essential dynamics of the full system. We apply this principle: even though we only observe price, the embedded coordinates (derivatives of price) reconstruct the underlying dynamical structure.
Why Catastrophe Theory?
Catastrophe theory, developed by mathematician René Thom (Fields Medal 1958), describes how continuous systems can undergo sudden discontinuous changes when control parameters reach critical values. A classic example: gradually increasing force on a beam causes smooth bending, then sudden catastrophic buckling. The beam's geometry reaches a critical curvature where topology must break.
Markets exhibit analogous behavior: gradual price changes build tension in the manifold topology until critical distortion is reached, then abrupt directional change occurs (reversal). Catastrophes aren't random—they're mathematically necessary when geometric constraints are violated.
The indicator detects these geometric precursors: high curvature (manifold bending sharply), high complexity (topology oscillating chaotically), high condition number (coordinate mapping becoming singular). These metrics quantify how close the manifold is to a catastrophic fold. When all simultaneously reach extreme values, topology break is imminent.
This provides a logical foundation for reversal detection that doesn't rely on pattern recognition or historical correlation. We're measuring geometric properties that mathematically must change when systems reach critical states. This is why the approach works across different instruments and timeframes—the underlying geometry is universal.
Why Hurst Exponent?
Markets exhibit fractal behavior: patterns at different time scales show statistical self-similarity. The Hurst exponent quantifies this fractal structure by measuring long-range dependence in returns.
Critically for trading, Hurst determines whether recent price movement predicts future direction (H > 0.5) or predicts the opposite (H < 0.5). This is regime detection: trending vs mean-reverting behavior.
The same manifold catastrophe has different trading implications depending on regime. In trending regime (high Hurst), catastrophes represent significant reversal opportunities because the manifold has been building directional momentum that suddenly breaks. In mean-reverting regime (low Hurst), catastrophes represent minor oscillations because the manifold constantly folds at small scales.
By weighting catastrophe signals based on Hurst, the system adapts detection sensitivity to the current fractal regime. This is a form of meta-analysis: not just detecting geometric breaks, but evaluating whether those breaks are meaningful in the current fractal context.
Why Multi-Layer Confirmation?
Geometric anomalies occur frequently in noisy market data. Not every high-curvature point represents a tradable reversal—many are artifacts of microstructure noise, order flow imbalances, or low-liquidity ticks.
The five-filter confirmation system (catastrophe threshold, pivot structure, swing size, volume, regime) addresses this by requiring geometric anomalies to align with observable market evidence. This conjunction-based logic implements the principle: extraordinary claims require extraordinary evidence .
A manifold catastrophe (extraordinary geometric event) alone is not sufficient. We additionally require: price formed a pivot (visible structure), swing was significant (adequate magnitude), volume confirmed participation (capital backed the move), and regime was favorable (trending or volatile, not chopping). Only when all five dimensions agree do we have sufficient evidence that the geometric anomaly represents a genuine reversal opportunity rather than noise.
This multi-dimensional approach is analogous to medical diagnosis: no single test is conclusive, but when multiple independent tests all suggest the same condition, confidence increases dramatically. Each filter removes a different category of false signals, and their combination creates a robust detection system.
The result is a signal set with dramatically improved reliability compared to any single metric alone. This is the power of ensemble methods applied to geometric analysis.
Important Disclaimers
This indicator applies mathematical topology and catastrophe theory to multi-dimensional price space reconstruction. It identifies geometric conditions where manifold curvature, topological complexity, and coordinate singularities suggest potential reversal zones based on phase space analysis. It should not be used as a standalone trading system.
The embedding coordinates, catastrophe scores, and Hurst calculations are deterministic mathematical formulas applied to historical price data. These measurements describe current and recent geometric relationships in the reconstructed manifold but do not predict future price movements. Past geometric patterns and singularity markers do not guarantee future market behavior will follow similar topology evolution.
The manifold reconstruction assumes certain mathematical properties (sufficient embedding dimension, quasi-stationarity, continuous dynamics) that may not hold in all market conditions. Gaps, flash crashes, circuit breakers, news events, and other discontinuities can violate these assumptions. The system attempts to filter problematic conditions through regime classification, but cannot eliminate all edge cases.
The spectral decomposition, energy fields, and probability cones are visualization aids that represent mathematical constructs, not price predictions. The probability cone projects current gradient forward assuming topology continues current trajectory—this is a mathematical "if-then" statement, not a forecast. Market topology can and does change unexpectedly.
All trading involves substantial risk. The singularity markers represent analytical conditions where geometric mathematics align with threshold criteria, not certainty of directional change. Use appropriate risk management for every trade: position sizing based on account risk tolerance (typically 1-2% maximum risk per trade), stop losses placed beyond recent structure plus volatility buffer, and never risk capital needed for living expenses.
The confirmation filters (pivot, swing size, volume, regime) are designed to reduce false signals but cannot eliminate them entirely. Markets can produce geometric anomalies that pass all filters yet fail to develop into sustained reversals. This is inherent to probabilistic systems operating on noisy real-world data.
No indicator can guarantee profitable trades or eliminate losses. The catastrophe detection provides an analytical framework for identifying potential reversal conditions, but actual trading outcomes depend on numerous factors including execution, slippage, spreads, position sizing, risk management, psychological discipline, and market conditions that may change after signal generation.
Use this tool as one component of a comprehensive trading plan that includes multiple forms of analysis, proper risk management, emotional discipline, and realistic expectations about win rates and drawdowns. Combine catastrophe signals with additional confirmation methods such as support/resistance analysis, volume patterns, multi-timeframe alignment, and broader market context.
The spacing filter, cooldown mechanism, and regime validation are designed to reduce noise and over-signaling, but market conditions can change rapidly and render any analytical signal invalid. Always use stop losses and never risk capital you cannot afford to lose. Past performance of detection accuracy does not guarantee future results.
Technical Implementation Notes
All calculations execute on closed bars only—signals and metric values do not repaint after bar close. The indicator does not use any lookahead bias in its calculations. However, the pivot detection mechanism (ta.pivothigh and ta.pivotlow) inherently identifies pivots with a lag equal to the lookback parameter, meaning the actual pivot occurred at bar but is recognized at bar . This is standard behavior for pivot functions and is not repainting—once recognized, the pivot bar never changes.
The normalization system (z-score transformation over rolling windows) requires approximately 30-50 bars of historical data to establish stable statistics. Values in the first 30-50 bars after adding the indicator may show instability as the rolling means and standard deviations converge. Allow adequate warmup period before relying on signals.
The spectral layer arrays, energy field boxes, gradient flow labels, and node geometry lines are subject to TradingView drawing object limits (500 lines, 500 boxes, 500 labels per indicator as specified in settings). The system implements automatic cleanup by deleting oldest objects when limits approach, but on very long charts with many signals, some historical visual elements may be removed to stay within limits. This does not affect signal generation or dashboard metrics—only historical visual artifacts.
Dashboard and visual rendering update only on the last bar to minimize computational overhead. The catastrophe detection logic executes on every bar, but table cells and drawing objects refresh conditionally to optimize performance. If experiencing chart lag, reduce visual complexity: disable spectral layers, energy fields, or flow field to improve rendering speed. Core signal detection continues to function with all visual elements disabled.
The Hurst calculation uses logarithmic returns rather than raw price to ensure stationarity, and implements clipping to range to handle edge cases where R/S analysis produces invalid values (which can occur during extended periods of identical prices or numerical overflow). The 5-period EMA smoothing reduces noise while maintaining responsiveness to regime transitions.
The condition number calculation adds epsilon (1e-10) to denominators to prevent division by zero when Jacobian determinant approaches zero—which is precisely the singularity condition we're detecting. This numerical stability measure ensures the indicator doesn't crash when detecting the very phenomena it's designed to identify.
The indicator has been tested across multiple timeframes (5-minute through daily) and multiple asset classes (forex majors, stock indices, individual equities, cryptocurrencies, commodities, futures). It functions identically across all instruments due to the adaptive normalization approach and percentage-based metrics. No instrument-specific code or parameter sets are required.
The color scheme system implements seven preset themes plus custom mode. Color assignments are applied globally and affect all visual elements simultaneously. The opacity calculation system multiplies component-specific transparency with master opacity to create hierarchical control—adjusting master opacity affects all visuals proportionally while maintaining their relative transparency relationships.
All alert conditions trigger only on bar close to prevent false alerts from intrabar fluctuations. The regime transition alerts (VALID/INVALID) are particularly useful for knowing when trading edge appears or disappears, allowing traders to adjust activity levels accordingly.
— Dskyz, Trade with insight. Trade with anticipation.
Dynamic Equity Allocation Model"Cash is Trash"? Not Always. Here's Why Science Beats Guesswork.
Every retail trader knows the frustration: you draw support and resistance lines, you spot patterns, you follow market gurus on social media—and still, when the next bear market hits, your portfolio bleeds red. Meanwhile, institutional investors seem to navigate market turbulence with ease, preserving capital when markets crash and participating when they rally. What's their secret?
The answer isn't insider information or access to exotic derivatives. It's systematic, scientifically validated decision-making. While most retail traders rely on subjective chart analysis and emotional reactions, professional portfolio managers use quantitative models that remove emotion from the equation and process multiple streams of market information simultaneously.
This document presents exactly such a system—not a proprietary black box available only to hedge funds, but a fully transparent, academically grounded framework that any serious investor can understand and apply. The Dynamic Equity Allocation Model (DEAM) synthesizes decades of financial research from Nobel laureates and leading academics into a practical tool for tactical asset allocation.
Stop drawing colorful lines on your chart and start thinking like a quant. This isn't about predicting where the market goes next week—it's about systematically adjusting your risk exposure based on what the data actually tells you. When valuations scream danger, when volatility spikes, when credit markets freeze, when multiple warning signals align—that's when cash isn't trash. That's when cash saves your portfolio.
The irony of "cash is trash" rhetoric is that it ignores timing. Yes, being 100% cash for decades would be disastrous. But being 100% equities through every crisis is equally foolish. The sophisticated approach is dynamic: aggressive when conditions favor risk-taking, defensive when they don't. This model shows you how to make that decision systematically, not emotionally.
Whether you're managing your own retirement portfolio or seeking to understand how institutional allocation strategies work, this comprehensive analysis provides the theoretical foundation, mathematical implementation, and practical guidance to elevate your investment approach from amateur to professional.
The choice is yours: keep hoping your chart patterns work out, or start using the same quantitative methods that professionals rely on. The tools are here. The research is cited. The methodology is explained. All you need to do is read, understand, and apply.
The Dynamic Equity Allocation Model (DEAM) is a quantitative framework for systematic allocation between equities and cash, grounded in modern portfolio theory and empirical market research. The model integrates five scientifically validated dimensions of market analysis—market regime, risk metrics, valuation, sentiment, and macroeconomic conditions—to generate dynamic allocation recommendations ranging from 0% to 100% equity exposure. This work documents the theoretical foundations, mathematical implementation, and practical application of this multi-factor approach.
1. Introduction and Theoretical Background
1.1 The Limitations of Static Portfolio Allocation
Traditional portfolio theory, as formulated by Markowitz (1952) in his seminal work "Portfolio Selection," assumes an optimal static allocation where investors distribute their wealth across asset classes according to their risk aversion. This approach rests on the assumption that returns and risks remain constant over time. However, empirical research demonstrates that this assumption does not hold in reality. Fama and French (1989) showed that expected returns vary over time and correlate with macroeconomic variables such as the spread between long-term and short-term interest rates. Campbell and Shiller (1988) demonstrated that the price-earnings ratio possesses predictive power for future stock returns, providing a foundation for dynamic allocation strategies.
The academic literature on tactical asset allocation has evolved considerably over recent decades. Ilmanen (2011) argues in "Expected Returns" that investors can improve their risk-adjusted returns by considering valuation levels, business cycles, and market sentiment. The Dynamic Equity Allocation Model presented here builds on this research tradition and operationalizes these insights into a practically applicable allocation framework.
1.2 Multi-Factor Approaches in Asset Allocation
Modern financial research has shown that different factors capture distinct aspects of market dynamics and together provide a more robust picture of market conditions than individual indicators. Ross (1976) developed the Arbitrage Pricing Theory, a model that employs multiple factors to explain security returns. Following this multi-factor philosophy, DEAM integrates five complementary analytical dimensions, each tapping different information sources and collectively enabling comprehensive market understanding.
2. Data Foundation and Data Quality
2.1 Data Sources Used
The model draws its data exclusively from publicly available market data via the TradingView platform. This transparency and accessibility is a significant advantage over proprietary models that rely on non-public data. The data foundation encompasses several categories of market information, each capturing specific aspects of market dynamics.
First, price data for the S&P 500 Index is obtained through the SPDR S&P 500 ETF (ticker: SPY). The use of a highly liquid ETF instead of the index itself has practical reasons, as ETF data is available in real-time and reflects actual tradability. In addition to closing prices, high, low, and volume data are captured, which are required for calculating advanced volatility measures.
Fundamental corporate metrics are retrieved via TradingView's Financial Data API. These include earnings per share, price-to-earnings ratio, return on equity, debt-to-equity ratio, dividend yield, and share buyback yield. Cochrane (2011) emphasizes in "Presidential Address: Discount Rates" the central importance of valuation metrics for forecasting future returns, making these fundamental data a cornerstone of the model.
Volatility indicators are represented by the CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) and related metrics. The VIX, often referred to as the market's "fear gauge," measures the implied volatility of S&P 500 index options and serves as a proxy for market participants' risk perception. Whaley (2000) describes in "The Investor Fear Gauge" the construction and interpretation of the VIX and its use as a sentiment indicator.
Macroeconomic data includes yield curve information through US Treasury bonds of various maturities and credit risk premiums through the spread between high-yield bonds and risk-free government bonds. These variables capture the macroeconomic conditions and financing conditions relevant for equity valuation. Estrella and Hardouvelis (1991) showed that the shape of the yield curve has predictive power for future economic activity, justifying the inclusion of these data.
2.2 Handling Missing Data
A practical problem when working with financial data is dealing with missing or unavailable values. The model implements a fallback system where a plausible historical average value is stored for each fundamental metric. When current data is unavailable for a specific point in time, this fallback value is used. This approach ensures that the model remains functional even during temporary data outages and avoids systematic biases from missing data. The use of average values as fallback is conservative, as it generates neither overly optimistic nor pessimistic signals.
3. Component 1: Market Regime Detection
3.1 The Concept of Market Regimes
The idea that financial markets exist in different "regimes" or states that differ in their statistical properties has a long tradition in financial science. Hamilton (1989) developed regime-switching models that allow distinguishing between different market states with different return and volatility characteristics. The practical application of this theory consists of identifying the current market state and adjusting portfolio allocation accordingly.
DEAM classifies market regimes using a scoring system that considers three main dimensions: trend strength, volatility level, and drawdown depth. This multidimensional view is more robust than focusing on individual indicators, as it captures various facets of market dynamics. Classification occurs into six distinct regimes: Strong Bull, Bull Market, Neutral, Correction, Bear Market, and Crisis.
3.2 Trend Analysis Through Moving Averages
Moving averages are among the oldest and most widely used technical indicators and have also received attention in academic literature. Brock, Lakonishok, and LeBaron (1992) examined in "Simple Technical Trading Rules and the Stochastic Properties of Stock Returns" the profitability of trading rules based on moving averages and found evidence for their predictive power, although later studies questioned the robustness of these results when considering transaction costs.
The model calculates three moving averages with different time windows: a 20-day average (approximately one trading month), a 50-day average (approximately one quarter), and a 200-day average (approximately one trading year). The relationship of the current price to these averages and the relationship of the averages to each other provide information about trend strength and direction. When the price trades above all three averages and the short-term average is above the long-term, this indicates an established uptrend. The model assigns points based on these constellations, with longer-term trends weighted more heavily as they are considered more persistent.
3.3 Volatility Regimes
Volatility, understood as the standard deviation of returns, is a central concept of financial theory and serves as the primary risk measure. However, research has shown that volatility is not constant but changes over time and occurs in clusters—a phenomenon first documented by Mandelbrot (1963) and later formalized through ARCH and GARCH models (Engle, 1982; Bollerslev, 1986).
DEAM calculates volatility not only through the classic method of return standard deviation but also uses more advanced estimators such as the Parkinson estimator and the Garman-Klass estimator. These methods utilize intraday information (high and low prices) and are more efficient than simple close-to-close volatility estimators. The Parkinson estimator (Parkinson, 1980) uses the range between high and low of a trading day and is based on the recognition that this information reveals more about true volatility than just the closing price difference. The Garman-Klass estimator (Garman and Klass, 1980) extends this approach by additionally considering opening and closing prices.
The calculated volatility is annualized by multiplying it by the square root of 252 (the average number of trading days per year), enabling standardized comparability. The model compares current volatility with the VIX, the implied volatility from option prices. A low VIX (below 15) signals market comfort and increases the regime score, while a high VIX (above 35) indicates market stress and reduces the score. This interpretation follows the empirical observation that elevated volatility is typically associated with falling markets (Schwert, 1989).
3.4 Drawdown Analysis
A drawdown refers to the percentage decline from the highest point (peak) to the lowest point (trough) during a specific period. This metric is psychologically significant for investors as it represents the maximum loss experienced. Calmar (1991) developed the Calmar Ratio, which relates return to maximum drawdown, underscoring the practical relevance of this metric.
The model calculates current drawdown as the percentage distance from the highest price of the last 252 trading days (one year). A drawdown below 3% is considered negligible and maximally increases the regime score. As drawdown increases, the score decreases progressively, with drawdowns above 20% classified as severe and indicating a crisis or bear market regime. These thresholds are empirically motivated by historical market cycles, in which corrections typically encompassed 5-10% drawdowns, bear markets 20-30%, and crises over 30%.
3.5 Regime Classification
Final regime classification occurs through aggregation of scores from trend (40% weight), volatility (30%), and drawdown (30%). The higher weighting of trend reflects the empirical observation that trend-following strategies have historically delivered robust results (Moskowitz, Ooi, and Pedersen, 2012). A total score above 80 signals a strong bull market with established uptrend, low volatility, and minimal losses. At a score below 10, a crisis situation exists requiring defensive positioning. The six regime categories enable a differentiated allocation strategy that not only distinguishes binarily between bullish and bearish but allows gradual gradations.
4. Component 2: Risk-Based Allocation
4.1 Volatility Targeting as Risk Management Approach
The concept of volatility targeting is based on the idea that investors should maximize not returns but risk-adjusted returns. Sharpe (1966, 1994) defined with the Sharpe Ratio the fundamental concept of return per unit of risk, measured as volatility. Volatility targeting goes a step further and adjusts portfolio allocation to achieve constant target volatility. This means that in times of low market volatility, equity allocation is increased, and in times of high volatility, it is reduced.
Moreira and Muir (2017) showed in "Volatility-Managed Portfolios" that strategies that adjust their exposure based on volatility forecasts achieve higher Sharpe Ratios than passive buy-and-hold strategies. DEAM implements this principle by defining a target portfolio volatility (default 12% annualized) and adjusting equity allocation to achieve it. The mathematical foundation is simple: if market volatility is 20% and target volatility is 12%, equity allocation should be 60% (12/20 = 0.6), with the remaining 40% held in cash with zero volatility.
4.2 Market Volatility Calculation
Estimating current market volatility is central to the risk-based allocation approach. The model uses several volatility estimators in parallel and selects the higher value between traditional close-to-close volatility and the Parkinson estimator. This conservative choice ensures the model does not underestimate true volatility, which could lead to excessive risk exposure.
Traditional volatility calculation uses logarithmic returns, as these have mathematically advantageous properties (additive linkage over multiple periods). The logarithmic return is calculated as ln(P_t / P_{t-1}), where P_t is the price at time t. The standard deviation of these returns over a rolling 20-trading-day window is then multiplied by √252 to obtain annualized volatility. This annualization is based on the assumption of independently identically distributed returns, which is an idealization but widely accepted in practice.
The Parkinson estimator uses additional information from the trading range (High minus Low) of each day. The formula is: σ_P = (1/√(4ln2)) × √(1/n × Σln²(H_i/L_i)) × √252, where H_i and L_i are high and low prices. Under ideal conditions, this estimator is approximately five times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator (Parkinson, 1980), as it uses more information per observation.
4.3 Drawdown-Based Position Size Adjustment
In addition to volatility targeting, the model implements drawdown-based risk control. The logic is that deep market declines often signal further losses and therefore justify exposure reduction. This behavior corresponds with the concept of path-dependent risk tolerance: investors who have already suffered losses are typically less willing to take additional risk (Kahneman and Tversky, 1979).
The model defines a maximum portfolio drawdown as a target parameter (default 15%). Since portfolio volatility and portfolio drawdown are proportional to equity allocation (assuming cash has neither volatility nor drawdown), allocation-based control is possible. For example, if the market exhibits a 25% drawdown and target portfolio drawdown is 15%, equity allocation should be at most 60% (15/25).
4.4 Dynamic Risk Adjustment
An advanced feature of DEAM is dynamic adjustment of risk-based allocation through a feedback mechanism. The model continuously estimates what actual portfolio volatility and portfolio drawdown would result at the current allocation. If risk utilization (ratio of actual to target risk) exceeds 1.0, allocation is reduced by an adjustment factor that grows exponentially with overutilization. This implements a form of dynamic feedback that avoids overexposure.
Mathematically, a risk adjustment factor r_adjust is calculated: if risk utilization u > 1, then r_adjust = exp(-0.5 × (u - 1)). This exponential function ensures that moderate overutilization is gently corrected, while strong overutilization triggers drastic reductions. The factor 0.5 in the exponent was empirically calibrated to achieve a balanced ratio between sensitivity and stability.
5. Component 3: Valuation Analysis
5.1 Theoretical Foundations of Fundamental Valuation
DEAM's valuation component is based on the fundamental premise that the intrinsic value of a security is determined by its future cash flows and that deviations between market price and intrinsic value are eventually corrected. Graham and Dodd (1934) established in "Security Analysis" the basic principles of fundamental analysis that remain relevant today. Translated into modern portfolio context, this means that markets with high valuation metrics (high price-earnings ratios) should have lower expected returns than cheaply valued markets.
Campbell and Shiller (1988) developed the Cyclically Adjusted P/E Ratio (CAPE), which smooths earnings over a full business cycle. Their empirical analysis showed that this ratio has significant predictive power for 10-year returns. Asness, Moskowitz, and Pedersen (2013) demonstrated in "Value and Momentum Everywhere" that value effects exist not only in individual stocks but also in asset classes and markets.
5.2 Equity Risk Premium as Central Valuation Metric
The Equity Risk Premium (ERP) is defined as the expected excess return of stocks over risk-free government bonds. It is the theoretical heart of valuation analysis, as it represents the compensation investors demand for bearing equity risk. Damodaran (2012) discusses in "Equity Risk Premiums: Determinants, Estimation and Implications" various methods for ERP estimation.
DEAM calculates ERP not through a single method but combines four complementary approaches with different weights. This multi-method strategy increases estimation robustness and avoids dependence on single, potentially erroneous inputs.
The first method (35% weight) uses earnings yield, calculated as 1/P/E or directly from operating earnings data, and subtracts the 10-year Treasury yield. This method follows Fed Model logic (Yardeni, 2003), although this model has theoretical weaknesses as it does not consistently treat inflation (Asness, 2003).
The second method (30% weight) extends earnings yield by share buyback yield. Share buybacks are a form of capital return to shareholders and increase value per share. Boudoukh et al. (2007) showed in "The Total Shareholder Yield" that the sum of dividend yield and buyback yield is a better predictor of future returns than dividend yield alone.
The third method (20% weight) implements the Gordon Growth Model (Gordon, 1962), which models stock value as the sum of discounted future dividends. Under constant growth g assumption: Expected Return = Dividend Yield + g. The model estimates sustainable growth as g = ROE × (1 - Payout Ratio), where ROE is return on equity and payout ratio is the ratio of dividends to earnings. This formula follows from equity theory: unretained earnings are reinvested at ROE and generate additional earnings growth.
The fourth method (15% weight) combines total shareholder yield (Dividend + Buybacks) with implied growth derived from revenue growth. This method considers that companies with strong revenue growth should generate higher future earnings, even if current valuations do not yet fully reflect this.
The final ERP is the weighted average of these four methods. A high ERP (above 4%) signals attractive valuations and increases the valuation score to 95 out of 100 possible points. A negative ERP, where stocks have lower expected returns than bonds, results in a minimal score of 10.
5.3 Quality Adjustments to Valuation
Valuation metrics alone can be misleading if not interpreted in the context of company quality. A company with a low P/E may be cheap or fundamentally problematic. The model therefore implements quality adjustments based on growth, profitability, and capital structure.
Revenue growth above 10% annually adds 10 points to the valuation score, moderate growth above 5% adds 5 points. This adjustment reflects that growth has independent value (Modigliani and Miller, 1961, extended by later growth theory). Net margin above 15% signals pricing power and operational efficiency and increases the score by 5 points, while low margins below 8% indicate competitive pressure and subtract 5 points.
Return on equity (ROE) above 20% characterizes outstanding capital efficiency and increases the score by 5 points. Piotroski (2000) showed in "Value Investing: The Use of Historical Financial Statement Information" that fundamental quality signals such as high ROE can improve the performance of value strategies.
Capital structure is evaluated through the debt-to-equity ratio. A conservative ratio below 1.0 multiplies the valuation score by 1.2, while high leverage above 2.0 applies a multiplier of 0.8. This adjustment reflects that high debt constrains financial flexibility and can become problematic in crisis times (Korteweg, 2010).
6. Component 4: Sentiment Analysis
6.1 The Role of Sentiment in Financial Markets
Investor sentiment, defined as the collective psychological attitude of market participants, influences asset prices independently of fundamental data. Baker and Wurgler (2006, 2007) developed a sentiment index and showed that periods of high sentiment are followed by overvaluations that later correct. This insight justifies integrating a sentiment component into allocation decisions.
Sentiment is difficult to measure directly but can be proxied through market indicators. The VIX is the most widely used sentiment indicator, as it aggregates implied volatility from option prices. High VIX values reflect elevated uncertainty and risk aversion, while low values signal market comfort. Whaley (2009) refers to the VIX as the "Investor Fear Gauge" and documents its role as a contrarian indicator: extremely high values typically occur at market bottoms, while low values occur at tops.
6.2 VIX-Based Sentiment Assessment
DEAM uses statistical normalization of the VIX by calculating the Z-score: z = (VIX_current - VIX_average) / VIX_standard_deviation. The Z-score indicates how many standard deviations the current VIX is from the historical average. This approach is more robust than absolute thresholds, as it adapts to the average volatility level, which can vary over longer periods.
A Z-score below -1.5 (VIX is 1.5 standard deviations below average) signals exceptionally low risk perception and adds 40 points to the sentiment score. This may seem counterintuitive—shouldn't low fear be bullish? However, the logic follows the contrarian principle: when no one is afraid, everyone is already invested, and there is limited further upside potential (Zweig, 1973). Conversely, a Z-score above 1.5 (extreme fear) adds -40 points, reflecting market panic but simultaneously suggesting potential buying opportunities.
6.3 VIX Term Structure as Sentiment Signal
The VIX term structure provides additional sentiment information. Normally, the VIX trades in contango, meaning longer-term VIX futures have higher prices than short-term. This reflects that short-term volatility is currently known, while long-term volatility is more uncertain and carries a risk premium. The model compares the VIX with VIX9D (9-day volatility) and identifies backwardation (VIX > 1.05 × VIX9D) and steep backwardation (VIX > 1.15 × VIX9D).
Backwardation occurs when short-term implied volatility is higher than longer-term, which typically happens during market stress. Investors anticipate immediate turbulence but expect calming. Psychologically, this reflects acute fear. The model subtracts 15 points for backwardation and 30 for steep backwardation, as these constellations signal elevated risk. Simon and Wiggins (2001) analyzed the VIX futures curve and showed that backwardation is associated with market declines.
6.4 Safe-Haven Flows
During crisis times, investors flee from risky assets into safe havens: gold, US dollar, and Japanese yen. This "flight to quality" is a sentiment signal. The model calculates the performance of these assets relative to stocks over the last 20 trading days. When gold or the dollar strongly rise while stocks fall, this indicates elevated risk aversion.
The safe-haven component is calculated as the difference between safe-haven performance and stock performance. Positive values (safe havens outperform) subtract up to 20 points from the sentiment score, negative values (stocks outperform) add up to 10 points. The asymmetric treatment (larger deduction for risk-off than bonus for risk-on) reflects that risk-off movements are typically sharper and more informative than risk-on phases.
Baur and Lucey (2010) examined safe-haven properties of gold and showed that gold indeed exhibits negative correlation with stocks during extreme market movements, confirming its role as crisis protection.
7. Component 5: Macroeconomic Analysis
7.1 The Yield Curve as Economic Indicator
The yield curve, represented as yields of government bonds of various maturities, contains aggregated expectations about future interest rates, inflation, and economic growth. The slope of the yield curve has remarkable predictive power for recessions. Estrella and Mishkin (1998) showed that an inverted yield curve (short-term rates higher than long-term) predicts recessions with high reliability. This is because inverted curves reflect restrictive monetary policy: the central bank raises short-term rates to combat inflation, dampening economic activity.
DEAM calculates two spread measures: the 2-year-minus-10-year spread and the 3-month-minus-10-year spread. A steep, positive curve (spreads above 1.5% and 2% respectively) signals healthy growth expectations and generates the maximum yield curve score of 40 points. A flat curve (spreads near zero) reduces the score to 20 points. An inverted curve (negative spreads) is particularly alarming and results in only 10 points.
The choice of two different spreads increases analysis robustness. The 2-10 spread is most established in academic literature, while the 3M-10Y spread is often considered more sensitive, as the 3-month rate directly reflects current monetary policy (Ang, Piazzesi, and Wei, 2006).
7.2 Credit Conditions and Spreads
Credit spreads—the yield difference between risky corporate bonds and safe government bonds—reflect risk perception in the credit market. Gilchrist and Zakrajšek (2012) constructed an "Excess Bond Premium" that measures the component of credit spreads not explained by fundamentals and showed this is a predictor of future economic activity and stock returns.
The model approximates credit spread by comparing the yield of high-yield bond ETFs (HYG) with investment-grade bond ETFs (LQD). A narrow spread below 200 basis points signals healthy credit conditions and risk appetite, contributing 30 points to the macro score. Very wide spreads above 1000 basis points (as during the 2008 financial crisis) signal credit crunch and generate zero points.
Additionally, the model evaluates whether "flight to quality" is occurring, identified through strong performance of Treasury bonds (TLT) with simultaneous weakness in high-yield bonds. This constellation indicates elevated risk aversion and reduces the credit conditions score.
7.3 Financial Stability at Corporate Level
While the yield curve and credit spreads reflect macroeconomic conditions, financial stability evaluates the health of companies themselves. The model uses the aggregated debt-to-equity ratio and return on equity of the S&P 500 as proxies for corporate health.
A low leverage level below 0.5 combined with high ROE above 15% signals robust corporate balance sheets and generates 20 points. This combination is particularly valuable as it represents both defensive strength (low debt means crisis resistance) and offensive strength (high ROE means earnings power). High leverage above 1.5 generates only 5 points, as it implies vulnerability to interest rate increases and recessions.
Korteweg (2010) showed in "The Net Benefits to Leverage" that optimal debt maximizes firm value, but excessive debt increases distress costs. At the aggregated market level, high debt indicates fragilities that can become problematic during stress phases.
8. Component 6: Crisis Detection
8.1 The Need for Systematic Crisis Detection
Financial crises are rare but extremely impactful events that suspend normal statistical relationships. During normal market volatility, diversified portfolios and traditional risk management approaches function, but during systemic crises, seemingly independent assets suddenly correlate strongly, and losses exceed historical expectations (Longin and Solnik, 2001). This justifies a separate crisis detection mechanism that operates independently of regular allocation components.
Reinhart and Rogoff (2009) documented in "This Time Is Different: Eight Centuries of Financial Folly" recurring patterns in financial crises: extreme volatility, massive drawdowns, credit market dysfunction, and asset price collapse. DEAM operationalizes these patterns into quantifiable crisis indicators.
8.2 Multi-Signal Crisis Identification
The model uses a counter-based approach where various stress signals are identified and aggregated. This methodology is more robust than relying on a single indicator, as true crises typically occur simultaneously across multiple dimensions. A single signal may be a false alarm, but the simultaneous presence of multiple signals increases confidence.
The first indicator is a VIX above the crisis threshold (default 40), adding one point. A VIX above 60 (as in 2008 and March 2020) adds two additional points, as such extreme values are historically very rare. This tiered approach captures the intensity of volatility.
The second indicator is market drawdown. A drawdown above 15% adds one point, as corrections of this magnitude can be potential harbingers of larger crises. A drawdown above 25% adds another point, as historical bear markets typically encompass 25-40% drawdowns.
The third indicator is credit market spreads above 500 basis points, adding one point. Such wide spreads occur only during significant credit market disruptions, as in 2008 during the Lehman crisis.
The fourth indicator identifies simultaneous losses in stocks and bonds. Normally, Treasury bonds act as a hedge against equity risk (negative correlation), but when both fall simultaneously, this indicates systemic liquidity problems or inflation/stagflation fears. The model checks whether both SPY and TLT have fallen more than 10% and 5% respectively over 5 trading days, adding two points.
The fifth indicator is a volume spike combined with negative returns. Extreme trading volumes (above twice the 20-day average) with falling prices signal panic selling. This adds one point.
A crisis situation is diagnosed when at least 3 indicators trigger, a severe crisis at 5 or more indicators. These thresholds were calibrated through historical backtesting to identify true crises (2008, 2020) without generating excessive false alarms.
8.3 Crisis-Based Allocation Override
When a crisis is detected, the system overrides the normal allocation recommendation and caps equity allocation at maximum 25%. In a severe crisis, the cap is set at 10%. This drastic defensive posture follows the empirical observation that crises typically require time to develop and that early reduction can avoid substantial losses (Faber, 2007).
This override logic implements a "safety first" principle: in situations of existential danger to the portfolio, capital preservation becomes the top priority. Roy (1952) formalized this approach in "Safety First and the Holding of Assets," arguing that investors should primarily minimize ruin probability.
9. Integration and Final Allocation Calculation
9.1 Component Weighting
The final allocation recommendation emerges through weighted aggregation of the five components. The standard weighting is: Market Regime 35%, Risk Management 25%, Valuation 20%, Sentiment 15%, Macro 5%. These weights reflect both theoretical considerations and empirical backtesting results.
The highest weighting of market regime is based on evidence that trend-following and momentum strategies have delivered robust results across various asset classes and time periods (Moskowitz, Ooi, and Pedersen, 2012). Current market momentum is highly informative for the near future, although it provides no information about long-term expectations.
The substantial weighting of risk management (25%) follows from the central importance of risk control. Wealth preservation is the foundation of long-term wealth creation, and systematic risk management is demonstrably value-creating (Moreira and Muir, 2017).
The valuation component receives 20% weight, based on the long-term mean reversion of valuation metrics. While valuation has limited short-term predictive power (bull and bear markets can begin at any valuation), the long-term relationship between valuation and returns is robustly documented (Campbell and Shiller, 1988).
Sentiment (15%) and Macro (5%) receive lower weights, as these factors are subtler and harder to measure. Sentiment is valuable as a contrarian indicator at extremes but less informative in normal ranges. Macro variables such as the yield curve have strong predictive power for recessions, but the transmission from recessions to stock market performance is complex and temporally variable.
9.2 Model Type Adjustments
DEAM allows users to choose between four model types: Conservative, Balanced, Aggressive, and Adaptive. This choice modifies the final allocation through additive adjustments.
Conservative mode subtracts 10 percentage points from allocation, resulting in consistently more cautious positioning. This is suitable for risk-averse investors or those with limited investment horizons. Aggressive mode adds 10 percentage points, suitable for risk-tolerant investors with long horizons.
Adaptive mode implements procyclical adjustment based on short-term momentum: if the market has risen more than 5% in the last 20 days, 5 percentage points are added; if it has declined more than 5%, 5 points are subtracted. This logic follows the observation that short-term momentum persists (Jegadeesh and Titman, 1993), but the moderate size of adjustment avoids excessive timing bets.
Balanced mode makes no adjustment and uses raw model output. This neutral setting is suitable for investors who wish to trust model recommendations unchanged.
9.3 Smoothing and Stability
The allocation resulting from aggregation undergoes final smoothing through a simple moving average over 3 periods. This smoothing is crucial for model practicality, as it reduces frequent trading and thus transaction costs. Without smoothing, the model could fluctuate between adjacent allocations with every small input change.
The choice of 3 periods as smoothing window is a compromise between responsiveness and stability. Longer smoothing would excessively delay signals and impede response to true regime changes. Shorter or no smoothing would allow too much noise. Empirical tests showed that 3-period smoothing offers an optimal ratio between these goals.
10. Visualization and Interpretation
10.1 Main Output: Equity Allocation
DEAM's primary output is a time series from 0 to 100 representing the recommended percentage allocation to equities. This representation is intuitive: 100% means full investment in stocks (specifically: an S&P 500 ETF), 0% means complete cash position, and intermediate values correspond to mixed portfolios. A value of 60% means, for example: invest 60% of wealth in SPY, hold 40% in money market instruments or cash.
The time series is color-coded to enable quick visual interpretation. Green shades represent high allocations (above 80%, bullish), red shades low allocations (below 20%, bearish), and neutral colors middle allocations. The chart background is dynamically colored based on the signal, enhancing readability in different market phases.
10.2 Dashboard Metrics
A tabular dashboard presents key metrics compactly. This includes current allocation, cash allocation (complement), an aggregated signal (BULLISH/NEUTRAL/BEARISH), current market regime, VIX level, market drawdown, and crisis status.
Additionally, fundamental metrics are displayed: P/E Ratio, Equity Risk Premium, Return on Equity, Debt-to-Equity Ratio, and Total Shareholder Yield. This transparency allows users to understand model decisions and form their own assessments.
Component scores (Regime, Risk, Valuation, Sentiment, Macro) are also displayed, each normalized on a 0-100 scale. This shows which factors primarily drive the current recommendation. If, for example, the Risk score is very low (20) while other scores are moderate (50-60), this indicates that risk management considerations are pulling allocation down.
10.3 Component Breakdown (Optional)
Advanced users can display individual components as separate lines in the chart. This enables analysis of component dynamics: do all components move synchronously, or are there divergences? Divergences can be particularly informative. If, for example, the market regime is bullish (high score) but the valuation component is very negative, this signals an overbought market not fundamentally supported—a classic "bubble warning."
This feature is disabled by default to keep the chart clean but can be activated for deeper analysis.
10.4 Confidence Bands
The model optionally displays uncertainty bands around the main allocation line. These are calculated as ±1 standard deviation of allocation over a rolling 20-period window. Wide bands indicate high volatility of model recommendations, suggesting uncertain market conditions. Narrow bands indicate stable recommendations.
This visualization implements a concept of epistemic uncertainty—uncertainty about the model estimate itself, not just market volatility. In phases where various indicators send conflicting signals, the allocation recommendation becomes more volatile, manifesting in wider bands. Users can understand this as a warning to act more cautiously or consult alternative information sources.
11. Alert System
11.1 Allocation Alerts
DEAM implements an alert system that notifies users of significant events. Allocation alerts trigger when smoothed allocation crosses certain thresholds. An alert is generated when allocation reaches 80% (from below), signaling strong bullish conditions. Another alert triggers when allocation falls to 20%, indicating defensive positioning.
These thresholds are not arbitrary but correspond with boundaries between model regimes. An allocation of 80% roughly corresponds to a clear bull market regime, while 20% corresponds to a bear market regime. Alerts at these points are therefore informative about fundamental regime shifts.
11.2 Crisis Alerts
Separate alerts trigger upon detection of crisis and severe crisis. These alerts have highest priority as they signal large risks. A crisis alert should prompt investors to review their portfolio and potentially take defensive measures beyond the automatic model recommendation (e.g., hedging through put options, rebalancing to more defensive sectors).
11.3 Regime Change Alerts
An alert triggers upon change of market regime (e.g., from Neutral to Correction, or from Bull Market to Strong Bull). Regime changes are highly informative events that typically entail substantial allocation changes. These alerts enable investors to proactively respond to changes in market dynamics.
11.4 Risk Breach Alerts
A specialized alert triggers when actual portfolio risk utilization exceeds target parameters by 20%. This is a warning signal that the risk management system is reaching its limits, possibly because market volatility is rising faster than allocation can be reduced. In such situations, investors should consider manual interventions.
12. Practical Application and Limitations
12.1 Portfolio Implementation
DEAM generates a recommendation for allocation between equities (S&P 500) and cash. Implementation by an investor can take various forms. The most direct method is using an S&P 500 ETF (e.g., SPY, VOO) for equity allocation and a money market fund or savings account for cash allocation.
A rebalancing strategy is required to synchronize actual allocation with model recommendation. Two approaches are possible: (1) rule-based rebalancing at every 10% deviation between actual and target, or (2) time-based monthly rebalancing. Both have trade-offs between responsiveness and transaction costs. Empirical evidence (Jaconetti, Kinniry, and Zilbering, 2010) suggests rebalancing frequency has moderate impact on performance, and investors should optimize based on their transaction costs.
12.2 Adaptation to Individual Preferences
The model offers numerous adjustment parameters. Component weights can be modified if investors place more or less belief in certain factors. A fundamentally-oriented investor might increase valuation weight, while a technical trader might increase regime weight.
Risk target parameters (target volatility, max drawdown) should be adapted to individual risk tolerance. Younger investors with long investment horizons can choose higher target volatility (15-18%), while retirees may prefer lower volatility (8-10%). This adjustment systematically shifts average equity allocation.
Crisis thresholds can be adjusted based on preference for sensitivity versus specificity of crisis detection. Lower thresholds (e.g., VIX > 35 instead of 40) increase sensitivity (more crises are detected) but reduce specificity (more false alarms). Higher thresholds have the reverse effect.
12.3 Limitations and Disclaimers
DEAM is based on historical relationships between indicators and market performance. There is no guarantee these relationships will persist in the future. Structural changes in markets (e.g., through regulation, technology, or central bank policy) can break established patterns. This is the fundamental problem of induction in financial science (Taleb, 2007).
The model is optimized for US equities (S&P 500). Application to other markets (international stocks, bonds, commodities) would require recalibration. The indicators and thresholds are specific to the statistical properties of the US equity market.
The model cannot eliminate losses. Even with perfect crisis prediction, an investor following the model would lose money in bear markets—just less than a buy-and-hold investor. The goal is risk-adjusted performance improvement, not risk elimination.
Transaction costs are not modeled. In practice, spreads, commissions, and taxes reduce net returns. Frequent trading can cause substantial costs. Model smoothing helps minimize this, but users should consider their specific cost situation.
The model reacts to information; it does not anticipate it. During sudden shocks (e.g., 9/11, COVID-19 lockdowns), the model can only react after price movements, not before. This limitation is inherent to all reactive systems.
12.4 Relationship to Other Strategies
DEAM is a tactical asset allocation approach and should be viewed as a complement, not replacement, for strategic asset allocation. Brinson, Hood, and Beebower (1986) showed in their influential study "Determinants of Portfolio Performance" that strategic asset allocation (long-term policy allocation) explains the majority of portfolio performance, but this leaves room for tactical adjustments based on market timing.
The model can be combined with value and momentum strategies at the individual stock level. While DEAM controls overall market exposure, within-equity decisions can be optimized through stock-picking models. This separation between strategic (market exposure) and tactical (stock selection) levels follows classical portfolio theory.
The model does not replace diversification across asset classes. A complete portfolio should also include bonds, international stocks, real estate, and alternative investments. DEAM addresses only the US equity allocation decision within a broader portfolio.
13. Scientific Foundation and Evaluation
13.1 Theoretical Consistency
DEAM's components are based on established financial theory and empirical evidence. The market regime component follows from regime-switching models (Hamilton, 1989) and trend-following literature. The risk management component implements volatility targeting (Moreira and Muir, 2017) and modern portfolio theory (Markowitz, 1952). The valuation component is based on discounted cash flow theory and empirical value research (Campbell and Shiller, 1988; Fama and French, 1992). The sentiment component integrates behavioral finance (Baker and Wurgler, 2006). The macro component uses established business cycle indicators (Estrella and Mishkin, 1998).
This theoretical grounding distinguishes DEAM from purely data-mining-based approaches that identify patterns without causal theory. Theory-guided models have greater probability of functioning out-of-sample, as they are based on fundamental mechanisms, not random correlations (Lo and MacKinlay, 1990).
13.2 Empirical Validation
While this document does not present detailed backtest analysis, it should be noted that rigorous validation of a tactical asset allocation model should include several elements:
In-sample testing establishes whether the model functions at all in the data on which it was calibrated. Out-of-sample testing is crucial: the model should be tested in time periods not used for development. Walk-forward analysis, where the model is successively trained on rolling windows and tested in the next window, approximates real implementation.
Performance metrics should be risk-adjusted. Pure return consideration is misleading, as higher returns often only compensate for higher risk. Sharpe Ratio, Sortino Ratio, Calmar Ratio, and Maximum Drawdown are relevant metrics. Comparison with benchmarks (Buy-and-Hold S&P 500, 60/40 Stock/Bond portfolio) contextualizes performance.
Robustness checks test sensitivity to parameter variation. If the model only functions at specific parameter settings, this indicates overfitting. Robust models show consistent performance over a range of plausible parameters.
13.3 Comparison with Existing Literature
DEAM fits into the broader literature on tactical asset allocation. Faber (2007) presented a simple momentum-based timing system that goes long when the market is above its 10-month average, otherwise cash. This simple system avoided large drawdowns in bear markets. DEAM can be understood as a sophistication of this approach that integrates multiple information sources.
Ilmanen (2011) discusses various timing factors in "Expected Returns" and argues for multi-factor approaches. DEAM operationalizes this philosophy. Asness, Moskowitz, and Pedersen (2013) showed that value and momentum effects work across asset classes, justifying cross-asset application of regime and valuation signals.
Ang (2014) emphasizes in "Asset Management: A Systematic Approach to Factor Investing" the importance of systematic, rule-based approaches over discretionary decisions. DEAM is fully systematic and eliminates emotional biases that plague individual investors (overconfidence, hindsight bias, loss aversion).
References
Ang, A. (2014) *Asset Management: A Systematic Approach to Factor Investing*. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Ang, A., Piazzesi, M. and Wei, M. (2006) 'What does the yield curve tell us about GDP growth?', *Journal of Econometrics*, 131(1-2), pp. 359-403.
Asness, C.S. (2003) 'Fight the Fed Model', *The Journal of Portfolio Management*, 30(1), pp. 11-24.
Asness, C.S., Moskowitz, T.J. and Pedersen, L.H. (2013) 'Value and Momentum Everywhere', *The Journal of Finance*, 68(3), pp. 929-985.
Baker, M. and Wurgler, J. (2006) 'Investor Sentiment and the Cross-Section of Stock Returns', *The Journal of Finance*, 61(4), pp. 1645-1680.
Baker, M. and Wurgler, J. (2007) 'Investor Sentiment in the Stock Market', *Journal of Economic Perspectives*, 21(2), pp. 129-152.
Baur, D.G. and Lucey, B.M. (2010) 'Is Gold a Hedge or a Safe Haven? An Analysis of Stocks, Bonds and Gold', *Financial Review*, 45(2), pp. 217-229.
Bollerslev, T. (1986) 'Generalized Autoregressive Conditional Heteroskedasticity', *Journal of Econometrics*, 31(3), pp. 307-327.
Boudoukh, J., Michaely, R., Richardson, M. and Roberts, M.R. (2007) 'On the Importance of Measuring Payout Yield: Implications for Empirical Asset Pricing', *The Journal of Finance*, 62(2), pp. 877-915.
Brinson, G.P., Hood, L.R. and Beebower, G.L. (1986) 'Determinants of Portfolio Performance', *Financial Analysts Journal*, 42(4), pp. 39-44.
Brock, W., Lakonishok, J. and LeBaron, B. (1992) 'Simple Technical Trading Rules and the Stochastic Properties of Stock Returns', *The Journal of Finance*, 47(5), pp. 1731-1764.
Calmar, T.W. (1991) 'The Calmar Ratio', *Futures*, October issue.
Campbell, J.Y. and Shiller, R.J. (1988) 'The Dividend-Price Ratio and Expectations of Future Dividends and Discount Factors', *Review of Financial Studies*, 1(3), pp. 195-228.
Cochrane, J.H. (2011) 'Presidential Address: Discount Rates', *The Journal of Finance*, 66(4), pp. 1047-1108.
Damodaran, A. (2012) *Equity Risk Premiums: Determinants, Estimation and Implications*. Working Paper, Stern School of Business.
Engle, R.F. (1982) 'Autoregressive Conditional Heteroskedasticity with Estimates of the Variance of United Kingdom Inflation', *Econometrica*, 50(4), pp. 987-1007.
Estrella, A. and Hardouvelis, G.A. (1991) 'The Term Structure as a Predictor of Real Economic Activity', *The Journal of Finance*, 46(2), pp. 555-576.
Estrella, A. and Mishkin, F.S. (1998) 'Predicting U.S. Recessions: Financial Variables as Leading Indicators', *Review of Economics and Statistics*, 80(1), pp. 45-61.
Faber, M.T. (2007) 'A Quantitative Approach to Tactical Asset Allocation', *The Journal of Wealth Management*, 9(4), pp. 69-79.
Fama, E.F. and French, K.R. (1989) 'Business Conditions and Expected Returns on Stocks and Bonds', *Journal of Financial Economics*, 25(1), pp. 23-49.
Fama, E.F. and French, K.R. (1992) 'The Cross-Section of Expected Stock Returns', *The Journal of Finance*, 47(2), pp. 427-465.
Garman, M.B. and Klass, M.J. (1980) 'On the Estimation of Security Price Volatilities from Historical Data', *Journal of Business*, 53(1), pp. 67-78.
Gilchrist, S. and Zakrajšek, E. (2012) 'Credit Spreads and Business Cycle Fluctuations', *American Economic Review*, 102(4), pp. 1692-1720.
Gordon, M.J. (1962) *The Investment, Financing, and Valuation of the Corporation*. Homewood: Irwin.
Graham, B. and Dodd, D.L. (1934) *Security Analysis*. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Hamilton, J.D. (1989) 'A New Approach to the Economic Analysis of Nonstationary Time Series and the Business Cycle', *Econometrica*, 57(2), pp. 357-384.
Ilmanen, A. (2011) *Expected Returns: An Investor's Guide to Harvesting Market Rewards*. Chichester: Wiley.
Jaconetti, C.M., Kinniry, F.M. and Zilbering, Y. (2010) 'Best Practices for Portfolio Rebalancing', *Vanguard Research Paper*.
Jegadeesh, N. and Titman, S. (1993) 'Returns to Buying Winners and Selling Losers: Implications for Stock Market Efficiency', *The Journal of Finance*, 48(1), pp. 65-91.
Kahneman, D. and Tversky, A. (1979) 'Prospect Theory: An Analysis of Decision under Risk', *Econometrica*, 47(2), pp. 263-292.
Korteweg, A. (2010) 'The Net Benefits to Leverage', *The Journal of Finance*, 65(6), pp. 2137-2170.
Lo, A.W. and MacKinlay, A.C. (1990) 'Data-Snooping Biases in Tests of Financial Asset Pricing Models', *Review of Financial Studies*, 3(3), pp. 431-467.
Longin, F. and Solnik, B. (2001) 'Extreme Correlation of International Equity Markets', *The Journal of Finance*, 56(2), pp. 649-676.
Mandelbrot, B. (1963) 'The Variation of Certain Speculative Prices', *The Journal of Business*, 36(4), pp. 394-419.
Markowitz, H. (1952) 'Portfolio Selection', *The Journal of Finance*, 7(1), pp. 77-91.
Modigliani, F. and Miller, M.H. (1961) 'Dividend Policy, Growth, and the Valuation of Shares', *The Journal of Business*, 34(4), pp. 411-433.
Moreira, A. and Muir, T. (2017) 'Volatility-Managed Portfolios', *The Journal of Finance*, 72(4), pp. 1611-1644.
Moskowitz, T.J., Ooi, Y.H. and Pedersen, L.H. (2012) 'Time Series Momentum', *Journal of Financial Economics*, 104(2), pp. 228-250.
Parkinson, M. (1980) 'The Extreme Value Method for Estimating the Variance of the Rate of Return', *Journal of Business*, 53(1), pp. 61-65.
Piotroski, J.D. (2000) 'Value Investing: The Use of Historical Financial Statement Information to Separate Winners from Losers', *Journal of Accounting Research*, 38, pp. 1-41.
Reinhart, C.M. and Rogoff, K.S. (2009) *This Time Is Different: Eight Centuries of Financial Folly*. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Ross, S.A. (1976) 'The Arbitrage Theory of Capital Asset Pricing', *Journal of Economic Theory*, 13(3), pp. 341-360.
Roy, A.D. (1952) 'Safety First and the Holding of Assets', *Econometrica*, 20(3), pp. 431-449.
Schwert, G.W. (1989) 'Why Does Stock Market Volatility Change Over Time?', *The Journal of Finance*, 44(5), pp. 1115-1153.
Sharpe, W.F. (1966) 'Mutual Fund Performance', *The Journal of Business*, 39(1), pp. 119-138.
Sharpe, W.F. (1994) 'The Sharpe Ratio', *The Journal of Portfolio Management*, 21(1), pp. 49-58.
Simon, D.P. and Wiggins, R.A. (2001) 'S&P Futures Returns and Contrary Sentiment Indicators', *Journal of Futures Markets*, 21(5), pp. 447-462.
Taleb, N.N. (2007) *The Black Swan: The Impact of the Highly Improbable*. New York: Random House.
Whaley, R.E. (2000) 'The Investor Fear Gauge', *The Journal of Portfolio Management*, 26(3), pp. 12-17.
Whaley, R.E. (2009) 'Understanding the VIX', *The Journal of Portfolio Management*, 35(3), pp. 98-105.
Yardeni, E. (2003) 'Stock Valuation Models', *Topical Study*, 51, Yardeni Research.
Zweig, M.E. (1973) 'An Investor Expectations Stock Price Predictive Model Using Closed-End Fund Premiums', *The Journal of Finance*, 28(1), pp. 67-78.
Contrarian Period High & LowContrarian Period High & Low
This indicator pairs nicely with the Contrarian 100 MA and can be located here:
Overview
The "Contrarian Period High & Low" indicator is a powerful technical analysis tool designed for traders seeking to identify key support and resistance levels and capitalize on contrarian trading opportunities. By tracking the highest highs and lowest lows over user-defined periods (Daily, Weekly, or Monthly), this indicator plots historical levels and generates buy and sell signals when price breaks these levels in a contrarian manner. A unique blue dot counter and action table enhance decision-making, making it ideal for swing traders, trend followers, and those trading forex, stocks, or cryptocurrencies. Optimized for daily charts, it can be adapted to other timeframes with proper testing.
How It Works
The indicator identifies the highest high and lowest low within a specified period (e.g., daily, weekly, or monthly) and draws horizontal lines for the previous period’s extremes on the chart. These levels act as dynamic support and resistance zones. Contrarian signals are generated when the price crosses below the previous period’s low (buy signal) or above the previous period’s high (sell signal), indicating potential reversals. A blue dot counter tracks consecutive buy signals, and a table displays the count and recommended action, helping traders decide whether to hold or flip positions.
Key Components
Period High/Low Levels: Tracks the highest high and lowest low for each period, plotting red lines for highs and green lines for lows from the bar where they occurred, extending for a user-defined length (default: 200 bars).
Contrarian Signals: Generates buy signals (blue circles) when price crosses below the previous period’s low and sell signals (white circles) when price crosses above the previous period’s high, designed to capture potential reversals.
Blue Dot Tracker: Counts consecutive buy signals (“blue dots”). If three or more occur, it suggests a stronger trend, with the table recommending whether to “Hold Investment” or “Flip Investment.”
Action Table: A 2x2 table in the bottom-right corner displays the blue dot count and action (“Hold Investment” if count ≥ 4, else “Flip Investment”) for quick reference.
Mathematical Concepts
Period Detection: Uses an approximate bar count to define periods (1 bar for Daily, 5 bars for Weekly, 20 bars for Monthly on a daily chart). When a new period starts, the previous period’s high/low is finalized and plotted.
High/Low Tracking:
Highest high (periodHigh) and lowest low (periodLow) are updated within the period.
Lines are drawn at these levels when the period ends, starting from the bar where the extreme occurred (periodHighBar, periodLowBar).
Signal Logic:
Buy signal: ta.crossunder(close , prevPeriodLow) and not lowBroken and barstate.isconfirmed
Sell signal: ta.crossover(close , prevPeriodHigh) and not highBroken and barstate.isconfirmed
Flags (highBroken, lowBroken) prevent multiple signals for the same level within a period.
Blue Dot Counter: Increments on each buy signal, resets on a sell signal or if price exceeds the entry price after three or more buy signals.
Entry and Exit Rules
Buy Signal (Blue Circle): Triggered when the price crosses below the previous period’s low, suggesting a potential oversold condition and buying opportunity. The signal appears as a blue circle below the price bar.
Sell Signal (White Circle): Triggered when the price crosses above the previous period’s high, indicating a potential overbought condition and selling opportunity. The signal appears as a white circle above the price bar.
Blue Dot Tracker:
Increments blueDotCount on each buy signal and sets an entryPrice on the first buy.
Resets on a sell signal or if price exceeds entryPrice after three or more buy signals.
If blueDotCount >= 3, the table suggests holding; if >= 4, it reinforces “Hold Investment.”
Exit Rules: Exit a buy position on a sell signal or when price exceeds the entry price after three or more buy signals. Combine with other tools (e.g., trendlines, support/resistance) for additional confirmation. Always apply proper risk management.
Recommended Usage
The "Contrarian Period High & Low" indicator is optimized for daily charts but can be adapted to other timeframes (e.g., 1H, 4H) with adjustments to the period bar count. It excels in markets with clear support/resistance levels and potential reversal zones. Traders should:
Backtest the indicator on their chosen asset and timeframe to validate signal reliability.
Combine with other technical tools (e.g., moving averages, Fibonacci levels) for stronger trade confirmation.
Adjust barsPerPeriod (e.g., ~120 bars for Weekly on hourly charts) based on the chart timeframe and market volatility.
Monitor the action table to guide position management based on blue dot counts.
Customization Options
Period Type: Choose between Daily, Weekly, or Monthly periods (default: Monthly).
Line Length: Set the length of high/low lines in bars (default: 200).
Show Highs/Lows: Toggle visibility of period high (red) and low (green) lines.
Max Lines to Keep: Limit the number of historical lines displayed (default: 10).
Hide Signals: Toggle buy/sell signal visibility for a cleaner chart.
Table Display: A fixed table in the bottom-right corner shows the blue dot count and action, with yellow (Hold) or green (Flip) backgrounds based on the count.
Why Use This Indicator?
The "Contrarian Period High & Low" indicator offers a unique blend of support/resistance visualization and contrarian signal generation, making it a versatile tool for identifying potential reversals. Its clear visual cues (lines and signals), blue dot tracker, and actionable table provide traders with an intuitive way to monitor market structure and manage trades. Whether you’re a beginner or an experienced trader, this indicator enhances your ability to spot key levels and time entries/exits effectively.
Tips for Users
Test the indicator thoroughly on your chosen market and timeframe to optimize settings (e.g., adjust barsPerPeriod for non-daily charts).
Use in conjunction with price action or other indicators for stronger trade setups.
Monitor the action table to decide whether to hold or flip positions based on blue dot counts.
Ensure your chart timeframe aligns with the selected period type (e.g., daily chart for Monthly periods).
Apply strict risk management to protect against false breakouts.
Happy trading with the Contrarian Period High & Low indicator! Share your feedback and strategies in the TradingView community!
SuperTrend - Dynamic Lines and ChannelsSuperTrend Indicator: Comprehensive Description
Overview
The SuperTrend indicator is Pine Script V6 designed for TradingView to plot dynamic trend lines & channels across multiple timeframes (Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, and Yearly/All-Time) to assist traders in identifying potential support, resistance, and trend continuation levels. The script calculates trendlines based on high and low prices over specified periods, projects these trendlines forward, and includes optional reflection channels and heartlines to provide additional context for price action analysis. The indicator is highly customizable, allowing users to toggle the visibility of trendlines, projections, and heartlines for each timeframe, with a focus on the DayTrade channel, which includes unique reflection channel features.
This description provides a detailed explanation of the indicator’s features, functionality, and display, with a specific focus on the DayTrade channel’s anchoring, the role of static and dynamic channels in projecting future price action, the heartline’s potential as a volume indicator, and how traders can use the indicator for line-to-line trading strategies.
Features and Functionality
1. Dynamic Trend Channels
The SuperTrend indicator calculates trend channels for five timeframes:
DayTrade Channel: Tracks daily highs and lows, updating before 12 PM each trading day.
Weekly Channel: Tracks highs and lows over a user-selected period (1, 2, or 3 weeks).
Monthly Channel: Tracks monthly highs and lows.
Quarterly Channel: Tracks highs and lows over a user-selected period (1 or 2 quarters).
Yearly/All-Time Channel: Tracks highs and lows over a user-selected period (1 to 10 years or All Time).
Each channel consists of:
Upper Trendline: Connects the high prices of the previous and current periods.
Lower Trendline: Connects the low prices of the previous and current periods.
Projections: Extends the trendlines forward based on the trend’s slope.
Heartline: A dashed line drawn at the midpoint between the upper and lower trendlines or their projections.
DayTrade Channel Anchoring
The DayTrade channel anchors its trendlines to the high and low prices of the previous and current trading days, with updates restricted to before 12 PM to capture significant price movements during the morning session, which is often more volatile due to market openings or news events. The "Show DayTrade Trend Lines" toggle enables this channel, and after 12 PM, the trendlines and projections remain static for the rest of the trading day. This static anchoring provides a consistent reference for potential support and resistance levels, allowing traders to anticipate price reactions based on historical highs and lows from the previous day and the morning session of the current day.
The static nature of the DayTrade channel after 12 PM ensures that the trendlines and projections do not shift mid-session, providing a stable framework for traders to assess whether price action respects or breaks these levels, potentially indicating trend continuation or reversal.
Static vs. Dynamic Channels
Static Channels: Once set (e.g., after 12 PM for the DayTrade channel or at the start of a new period for other timeframes), the trendlines remain fixed until the next period begins. This static behavior allows traders to use the channels as reference levels for potential price targets or reversal points, as they are based on historical price extremes.
Dynamic Projections: The projections extend the trendlines forward, providing a visual guide for potential future price action, assuming the trend’s momentum continues. When a trendline is broken (e.g., price closes above the upper projection or below the lower projection), it may suggest a breakout or reversal, prompting traders to reassess their positions.
2. Reflection Channels (DayTrade Only)
The DayTrade channel includes optional lower and upper reflection channels, which are additional trendlines positioned symmetrically around the main channel to provide extended support and resistance zones. These are controlled by the "Show Reflection Channel" dropdown.
Lower Reflection Channel:
Position: Drawn below the lower trendline at a distance equal to the range between the upper and lower trendlines.
Projection: Extends forward as a dashed line.
Heartline: A dashed line drawn at the midpoint between the lower trendline and the lower reflection trendline, controlled by the "Show Lower Reflection Heartline" toggle.
Upper Reflection Channel:
Position: Drawn above the upper trendline at the same distance as the main channel’s range.
Projection: Extends forward as a dashed line.
Heartline: A dashed line drawn at the midpoint between the upper trendline and the upper reflection trendline, controlled by the "Show Upper Reflection Heartline" toggle.
Display Control: The "Show Reflection Channel" dropdown allows users to select:
"None": No reflection channels are shown.
"Lower": Only the lower reflection channel is shown.
"Upper": Only the upper reflection channel is shown.
"Both": Both reflection channels are shown.
Purpose: Reflection channels extend the price range analysis by providing additional levels where price may react, acting as potential targets or reversal zones after breaking the main trendlines.
3. Heartlines
Each timeframe, including the DayTrade channel and its reflection channels, can display a heartline, which is a dashed line plotted at the midpoint between the upper and lower trendlines or their projections. For the DayTrade channel:
Main DayTrade Heartline: Midpoint between the upper and lower trendlines, controlled by the "Show DayTrade Heartline" toggle.
Lower Reflection Heartline: Midpoint between the lower trendline and the lower reflection trendline, controlled by the "Show Lower Reflection Heartline" toggle.
Upper Reflection Heartline: Midpoint between the upper trendline and the upper reflection trendline, controlled by the "Show Upper Reflection Heartline" toggle.
Independent Toggles: Visibility is controlled by:
"Show DayTrade Heartline": For the main DayTrade heartline.
"Show Lower Reflection Heartline": For the lower reflection heartline.
"Show Upper Reflection Heartline": For the upper reflection heartline.
Potential Volume Indicator: The heartline represents the average price level between the high and low of a period, which may correlate with areas of high trading activity or volume concentration, as these midpoints often align with price levels where buyers and sellers have historically converged. A break above or below the heartline, especially with strong momentum, may indicate a shift in market sentiment, potentially leading to accelerated price movement in the direction of the break. However, this is an observation based on the heartline’s position, not a direct measure of volume, as the script does not incorporate volume data.
4. Alerts
The script includes alert conditions for all timeframes, triggered when a candle closes fully above the upper projection or below the lower projection. For the DayTrade channel:
Upper Trend Break: Triggers when a candle closes fully above the upper projection.
Lower Trend Break: Triggers when a candle closes fully below the lower projection.
Alerts are combined across all timeframes, so a break in any timeframe triggers a general "Upper Trend Break" or "Lower Trend Break" alert with the message: "Candle closed fully above/below one or more projection lines." Alerts fire once per bar close.
5. Customization Options
The script provides extensive customization through input settings, grouped by timeframe:
DayTrade Channel:
"Show DayTrade Trend Lines": Toggle main trendlines and projections.
"Show DayTrade Heartline": Toggle main heartline.
"Show Lower Reflection Heartline": Toggle lower reflection heartline.
"Show Upper Reflection Heartline": Toggle upper reflection heartline.
"DayTrade Channel Color": Set color for trendlines.
"DayTrade Projection Channel Color": Set color for projections.
"Heartline Color": Set color for all heartlines.
"Show Reflection Channel": Dropdown to show "None," "Lower," "Upper," or "Both" reflection channels.
Other Timeframes (Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, Yearly/All-Time):
Toggles for trendlines (e.g., "Show Weekly Trend Lines," "Show Monthly Trend Lines") and heartlines (e.g., "Show Weekly Heartline," "Show Monthly Heartline").
Period selection (e.g., "Weekly Period" for 1, 2, or 3 weeks; "Yearly Period" for 1 to 10 years or All Time).
Separate colors for trendlines (e.g., "Weekly Channel Color"), projections (e.g., "Weekly Projection Channel Color"), and heartlines (e.g., "Weekly Heartline Color").
Max Bar Difference: Limits the distance between anchor points to ensure relevance to recent price action.
Display
The indicator overlays the following elements on the chart:
Trendlines: Solid lines connecting the high and low anchor points for each timeframe, using user-specified colors (e.g., set via "DayTrade Channel Color").
Projections: Dashed lines extending from the current anchor points, indicating potential future price levels, using colors set via "DayTrade Projection Channel Color" or equivalent.
Heartlines: Dashed lines at the midpoint of each channel, using the color set via "Heartline Color" or equivalent.
Reflection Channels (DayTrade Only):
Lower reflection trendline and projection: Below the lower trendline, using the same colors as the main channel.
Upper reflection trendline and projection: Above the upper trendline, using the same colors.
Reflection heartlines: Midpoints between the main trendlines and their respective reflection trendlines, using the "Heartline Color."
Visual Clarity: Lines are only drawn if the relevant toggles (e.g., "Show DayTrade Trend Lines") are enabled and data is available. Lines are deleted when their conditions are not met to avoid clutter.
Trading Applications: Line-to-Line Trading
The SuperTrend indicator can be used to inform trading decisions by providing a framework for line-to-line trading, where traders use the trendlines, projections, and heartlines as reference points for entries, exits, and risk management. Below is a detailed explanation of how to use the DayTrade channel and its reflection channels for trading, focusing on their anchoring, static/dynamic behavior, and the heartline’s role.
1. Why DayTrade Channel Anchoring
The DayTrade channel’s anchoring to the previous day’s high/low and the current day’s high/low before 12 PM, controlled by the "Show DayTrade Trend Lines" toggle, captures significant price levels during high-volatility periods:
Previous Day High/Low: These represent key levels where price found resistance (high) or support (low) in the prior session, often acting as psychological or technical barriers in the current session.
Current Day High/Low Before 12 PM: The morning session (before 12 PM) often sees increased volatility due to market openings, news releases, or institutional activity. Anchoring to these early highs/lows ensures the channel reflects the most relevant price extremes, which are likely to influence intraday price action.
Static After 12 PM: By fixing the anchor points after 12 PM, the trendlines and projections become stable references for the afternoon session, allowing traders to anticipate price reactions at these levels without the lines shifting unexpectedly.
This anchoring makes the DayTrade channel particularly useful for intraday traders, as it provides a consistent framework based on recent price history, which can guide decisions on trend continuation or reversal.
2. Using Static Channels and Projections
The static nature of the DayTrade channel after 12 PM, enabled by "Show DayTrade Trend Lines," and the dynamic projections, set via "DayTrade Projection Channel Color," provide a structured approach to trading:
Support and Resistance:
The upper trendline and lower trendline act as dynamic support/resistance levels based on the previous and current day’s price extremes.
Traders may observe price reactions (e.g., bounces or breaks) at these levels. For example, if price approaches the lower trendline and bounces, it may indicate support, suggesting a potential long entry.
Projections as Price Targets:
The projections extend the trendlines forward, offering potential price targets if the trend continues. For instance, if price breaks above the upper trendline and continues toward the upper projection, traders might consider it a bullish continuation signal.
A candle closing fully above the upper projection or below the lower projection (triggering an alert) may indicate a breakout, prompting traders to enter in the direction of the break or reassess if the break fails.
Static Channels for Breakouts:
Because the trendlines are static after 12 PM, they serve as fixed reference points. A break above the upper trendline or its projection may suggest bullish momentum, while a break below the lower trendline or projection may indicate bearish momentum.
Traders can use these breaks to set entry points (e.g., entering a long position after a confirmed break above the upper projection) and place stop-losses below the broken level to manage risk.
3. Line-to-Line Trading Strategy
Line-to-line trading involves using the trendlines, projections, and reflection channels as sequential price targets or reversal zones:
Trading Within the Main Channel:
Long Setup: If price bounces off the lower trendline and moves toward the heartline (enabled by "Show DayTrade Heartline") or upper trendline, traders might enter a long position near the lower trendline, targeting the heartline or upper trendline for profit-taking. A stop-loss could be placed below the lower trendline to protect against a breakdown.
Short Setup: If price rejects from the upper trendline and moves toward the heartline or lower trendline, traders might enter a short position near the upper trendline, targeting the heartline or lower trendline, with a stop-loss above the upper trendline.
Trading to Reflection Channels:
If price breaks above the upper trendline and continues toward the upper reflection trendline or its projection (enabled by "Show Reflection Channel" set to "Upper" or "Both"), traders might treat this as a breakout trade, entering long with a target at the upper reflection level and a stop-loss below the upper trendline.
Similarly, a break below the lower trendline toward the lower reflection trendline or its projection (enabled by "Show Reflection Channel" set to "Lower" or "Both") could signal a short opportunity, with a target at the lower reflection level and a stop-loss above the lower trendline.
Reversal Trades:
If price reaches the upper reflection trendline and shows signs of rejection (e.g., a bearish candlestick pattern), traders might consider a short position, anticipating a move back toward the main channel’s upper trendline or heartline.
Conversely, a rejection at the lower reflection trendline could prompt a long position targeting the lower trendline or heartline.
Risk Management:
Use the heartline as a midpoint to gauge whether price is likely to continue toward the opposite trendline or reverse. For example, a failure to break above the heartline after bouncing from the lower trendline might suggest weakening bullish momentum, prompting a tighter stop-loss.
The static nature of the channels after 12 PM allows traders to set precise stop-loss and take-profit levels based on historical price levels, reducing the risk of chasing moving targets.
4. Heartline as a Volume Indicator
The heartline, controlled by toggles like "Show DayTrade Heartline," "Show Lower Reflection Heartline," and "Show Upper Reflection Heartline," may serve as an indirect proxy for areas of high trading activity:
Rationale: The heartline represents the average price between the high and low of a period, which often aligns with price levels where significant buying and selling have occurred, as these midpoints can correspond to areas of consolidation or high volume in the order book. While the script does not directly use volume data, the heartline’s position may reflect price levels where market participants have historically balanced supply and demand.
Breakout Potential: A break above or below the heartline, particularly with a strong candle (e.g., wide range or high momentum), may indicate a shift in market sentiment, potentially leading to accelerated price movement in the direction of the break. For example:
A close above the main DayTrade heartline could suggest buyers are overpowering sellers, potentially leading to a move toward the upper trendline or upper reflection channel.
A close below the heartline could indicate seller dominance, targeting the lower trendline or lower reflection channel.
Trading Application:
Traders might use heartline breaks as confirmation signals for trend continuation. For instance, after a bounce from the lower trendline, a close above the heartline could confirm bullish momentum, prompting a long entry.
The heartline can also act as a dynamic stop-loss or trailing stop level. For example, in a long trade, a trader might exit if price falls below the heartline, indicating a potential reversal.
For reflection heartlines, a break above the upper reflection heartline or below the lower reflection heartline could signal strong momentum, as these levels are further from the main channel and may require significant buying or selling pressure to breach.
5. Practical Trading Considerations
Timeframe Context: The DayTrade channel, enabled by "Show DayTrade Trend Lines," is best suited for intraday trading due to its daily anchoring and morning update behavior. Traders should consider higher timeframe channels (e.g., enabled by "Show Weekly Trend Lines" or "Show Monthly Trend Lines") for broader context, as breaks of the DayTrade channel may align with or be influenced by larger trends.
Confirmation Tools: Use additional indicators (e.g., RSI, MACD, or volume-based indicators) or candlestick patterns to confirm signals at trendlines, projections, or heartlines. The script’s alerts can help identify breakouts, but traders should verify with other technical or fundamental factors.
Risk Management: Always define risk-reward ratios before entering trades. For example, a 1:2 risk-reward ratio might involve risking a stop-loss below the lower trendline to target the heartline or upper trendline.
Market Conditions: The effectiveness of the channels and heartlines depends on market conditions (e.g., trending vs. ranging markets). In choppy markets, price may oscillate within the main channel, favoring range-bound strategies. In trending markets, breaks of projections or reflection channels may signal continuation trades.
Limitations: The indicator relies on historical price data and does not incorporate volume, news, or other external factors. Traders should use it as part of a broader strategy and avoid relying solely on its signals.
How to Use in TradingView
Add the Indicator: Copy the script into TradingView’s Pine Editor, compile it, and add it to your chart.
Configure Settings:
Enable "Show DayTrade Trend Lines" to display the main DayTrade trendlines and projections.
Use the "Show Reflection Channel" dropdown to select "Lower," "Upper," or "Both" to display reflection channels.
Toggle "Show DayTrade Heartline," "Show Lower Reflection Heartline," and "Show Upper Reflection Heartline" to control heartline visibility.
Adjust colors using "DayTrade Channel Color," "DayTrade Projection Channel Color," and "Heartline Color."
Enable other timeframes (e.g., "Show Weekly Trend Lines," "Show Monthly Trend Lines") for additional context, if desired.
Set Alerts: Configure alerts in TradingView for "Upper Trend Break" or "Lower Trend Break" to receive notifications when a candle closes fully above or below any timeframe’s projections.
Analyze the Chart:
Monitor price interactions with the trendlines, projections, and heartlines.
Look for bounces, breaks, or rejections at these levels to plan entries and exits.
Use the heartline breaks as potential confirmation of momentum shifts.
Test Strategies: Backtest line-to-line trading strategies in TradingView’s strategy tester or demo account to evaluate performance before trading with real capital.
Conclusion
The SuperTrend indicator provides a robust framework for technical analysis by plotting dynamic trend channels, projections, and heartlines across multiple timeframes, with advanced features for the DayTrade channel, including lower and upper reflection channels. The DayTrade channel’s anchoring to previous and current day highs/lows before 12 PM, enabled by "Show DayTrade Trend Lines," creates a stable reference for intraday trading, while static trendlines and dynamic projections guide traders in anticipating price movements. The heartlines, controlled by toggles like "Show DayTrade Heartline," offer potential insights into high-activity price levels, with breaks possibly indicating momentum shifts. Traders can use the indicator for line-to-line trading by targeting moves between trendlines, projections, and reflection channels, while managing risk with stop-losses and confirmations from other tools. The indicator should be used as part of a comprehensive trading plan.
Fibonacci Retracement levels Automatically D/W/MIndicator Description: Fibonacci Retracement levels Automatically
Fibonacci retracement levels based on the day, week, month High Low range and Fibonacci retracement levels draws automatically .This Pine Script indicator is designed to plot Fibonacci retracement levels based on the high and low prices of a user-selected timeframe (Daily, Weekly, or Monthly). It identifies bullish or bearish candles in the chosen timeframe, draws key price levels, and overlays Fibonacci retracement lines and semi-transparent colored boxes to highlight potential support and resistance zones. The indicator dynamically updates with each new period and extends lines, labels, and boxes to the current bar for real-time visualization. Key Features
1. Timeframe Selection: Users can choose the timeframe for analysis: Daily, Weekly, or Monthly via an input dropdown. The indicator retrieves the open, high, low, and close prices for the selected timeframe using `request.security`.
2. High and Low Tracking : Tracks the highest high and lowest low within the selected timeframe. Stores these values and their corresponding bar indices in arrays (`whigh`, `wlow`, `whighIdx`,`wlowIdx`). Limits the array size to the most recent period to optimize performance.
3. Bullish and Bearish Candle Detection : Identifies whether the previous period’s candle is bullish (`close > open`) or bearish (`close < open`). Uses this to determine the direction for Fibonacci retracement calculations. Bullish candle: Fibonacci levels are drawn from low to high
Bearish candle: Fibonacci levels are drawn from high to low
4. Fibonacci Retracement Levels : Plots Fibonacci levels at 0.236, 0.382, 0.5, 0.618, and 0.786 between the high and low of the period. For bullish candles, levels are calculated from the low (support) to the high (resistance). For bearish candles, levels are calculated from the high (resistance) to the low (support). Each Fibonacci level is drawn as a horizontal line with a unique color:
- 0.236: Blue
- 0.382: Purple
- 0.5: Yellow
- 0.618: Teal
- 0.786: Fuchsia
5. Visual Elements: - High/Low Lines and Labels: Draws a red line and label for the previous period’s high. Draws a green line and label for the previous period’s low. Fibonacci Lines and Labels: Each Fibonacci level has a horizontal line and a label displaying the ratio.
Colored Boxes: Semi-transparent boxes are drawn between consecutive Fibonacci levels (including high and low) to highlight zones.
6. Dynamic Updates:
- At the start of a new period (e.g., new week for Weekly timeframe), the indicator:
- Clears previous Fibonacci lines, labels, and boxes.
- Recalculates the high and low for the new period.
- Redraws lines, labels, and boxes based on the new data.
- Extends all lines, labels, and boxes to the current bar index for real-time tracking.
7. Performance Optimization:
- Deletes old lines, labels, and boxes to prevent clutter.
- Limits the storage of highs and lows to the most recent period.
How It Works
1. Initialization: Defines variables for tracking bullish/bearish candles, lines, labels, and arrays for Fibonacci levels and boxes. Sets up color arrays for Fibonacci lines and boxes with distinct, semi-transparent colors.
2. Data Collection: Fetches the previous period’s OHLC (open, high, low, close) using `request.security`. Detects new periods (e.g., new week or month) using `ta.change(time(tf))`.
3. Fibonacci Calculation: On a new period, stores the high and low prices and their bar indices.
- Identifies the maximum high and minimum low from the stored data. - Calculates Fibonacci levels based on the range (`maxHigh - minLow`) and the direction (bullish or bearish).
4. Drawing:
- Draws high/low lines and labels at the identified price levels. Plots Fibonacci retracement lines and labels for each ratio. Creates semi-transparent boxes between Fibonacci levels to visually distinguish zones.
5. Updates:
- Extends all lines, labels, and boxes to the current bar index when a new period is detected. Clears old Fibonacci elements to avoid overlap and ensure clarity.
Usage
- Purpose: This indicator is useful for traders who use Fibonacci retracement levels to identify potential support and resistance zones in financial markets.
- Application:
- Select the desired timeframe (Daily, Weekly, Monthly) via the input settings.
- The indicator automatically plots the previous period’s high/low and Fibonacci levels on the chart.
- Use the labeled Fibonacci levels and colored boxes to identify key price zones for trading decisions.
- Customization:
- Modify the `timeframe` input to switch between Daily, Weekly, or Monthly analysis.
- Adjust the `fibLineColors` and `fibFillColors` arrays to change the visual appearance of lines and boxes.
- The indicator is designed for use on TradingView with Pine Script.
- The maximum array size for highs/lows is limited to 1 period in this version (can be adjusted by modifying the `array.shift` logic).
- The indicator dynamically updates with each new period, ensuring real-time relevance.
This indicator make educational purpose use only
LiquidEdge Original1️⃣ Why Most Traders Miss Key Market Turning Points
Most traders (you) struggle to identify true market pivots THE REAL TOP and BOTTOMS where reversals begin.
❌ You enter too early or too late because price alone doesn’t give enough confirmation
❌ You follow price blindly, unaware of the volume pressure building underneath
❌ You get caught in sideways markets, not realizing they’re often accumulation or distribution zones
❌ You can’t tell if momentum is building or fading, which leads to low confidence and inconsistent results
👉 LiquidEdge helps solve this by tracking volume momentum through a modified MFI slope and scoring system. It highlights potential pivots with real context, so you can see where smart money might be entering or exiting before price makes it obvious.
2️⃣ What LiquidEdge Actually Does and How
LiquidEdge helps solve common trading problems by adding structure and clarity to volume analysis.
✅ It builds on the classic Money Flow Index (MFI), but instead of just showing overbought/oversold levels, it calculates the slope of MFI to track real-time changes in volume momentum
✅ Each setup is scored based on a combination of factors: divergence strength, trend alignment using EMA, and whether the signal occurs inside a liquidity zone
✅ Hidden accumulation or distribution is revealed when volume pressure increases or fades while price remains flat or moves slightly, a sign of smart money positioning
✅ Divergences are only flagged when they occur near pivot zones and align with overall trend conditions, helping reduce false signals
✅ Potential pivots are identified when multiple factors overlap such as a liquidity zone breach, volume slope shift, and valid divergence which often signals entry or exit points for institutional players
👉 The result is a structured interpretation of price and volume flow, helping traders read momentum shifts and potential reversals more clearly in both trending and ranging markets.
3️⃣ What Makes LiquidEdge Different
LiquidEdge is built on top of the classic Money Flow Index (MFI), but adds structure that transforms it from a basic momentum tool into a decision-support system.
Instead of simply showing highs and lows, it scores each potential setup based on:
✅ The steepness and direction of the MFI slope (used to measure volume pressure)
✅ Whether the setup aligns with the broader trend using an EMA filter (default: 200 EMA)
✅ Whether the signal appears inside predefined liquidity zones (MFI above 80 or below 20)
👉 This scoring system reduces noise and helps you focus only on high-probability setups.
👉 It also checks volume pressure across multiple timeframes using MFI slope on 5M, 15M, 1H, 4H, and Daily charts. This reveals whether short-term moves are backed by longer-term volume momentum.
Color changes in the line and histogram are not decorative they reflect real shifts in volume pressure. Every visual cue is linked to live market logic.
What Makes It Stand Out
👉 Setup Scoring That Makes Sense
Each setup is scored by combining:
Signal strength (MFI slope intensity and stability)
Trend direction (via customizable EMA)
Liquidity zone relevance (MFI range filtering)
This structured scoring means you spend less time second-guessing and more time reading clean signals.
👉 Flow That Follows Real Momentum
The slope of the MFI tracks whether volume pressure is rising or falling:
🟢 Green = increasing inflow (buying pressure)
🔴 Red = increasing outflow (selling pressure)
👉 Multi-Timeframe Volume Context
LiquidEdge calculates flow direction independently on each major timeframe. You’ll know if short-term setups are confirmed by higher timeframe volume or going against it.
👉 Smart Divergence Filtering
Unlike simple divergence tools that compare price highs/lows directly, LiquidEdge filters divergences based on:
Local pivot zones (defined by lookback periods)
Trend confirmation (to eliminate countertrend noise)
4️⃣ How LiquidEdge Works (Under the Hood)
LiquidEdge tracks directional momentum using the slope of the Money Flow Index (MFI) giving you a real-time read on buying and selling pressure.
When the slope rises, it means buyers are stepping in and volume is supporting the move.
When it falls, sellers are taking control and volume outflow is increasing.
This slope acts like a pressure gauge for the market, helping you spot when a trend has strength or when it's starting to fade.
💡 Quick Comparison
RSI = momentum from price
MFI = momentum from price + volume
LiquidEdge takes it one step further by calculating the rate of change (slope) in MFI. That’s where the pressure signal comes from not just value, but directional flow.
Core Calculations (Simplified)
Typical Price = (High + Low + Close) ÷ 3
Raw Money Flow = Typical Price × Volume
MFI = 100 −
MFI ranges from 0 to 100.
High = strong buying volume
Low = growing selling pressure
LiquidEdge then calculates the slope of this MFI over time to track volume momentum dynamically.
Divergence Engine
LiquidEdge detects divergence by comparing price pivots with the direction of MFI slope.
❌ If price makes a higher high but MFI slope turns down, it’s a bearish divergence
✅ If price makes a lower low but MFI slope rises, it’s a bullish divergence
Divergences are only confirmed when they occur:
Near local pivot zones (defined by configurable lookback windows)
And, optionally, in alignment with the broader trend using an EMA filter
This filtering helps reduce false positives and keeps you focused on clean setups.
Structured Confidence Scoring
Each signal is visually scored based on:
➡️ Whether a valid divergence is detected
➡️ Whether the signal occurs inside a liquidity zone (MFI > 80 or < 20)
➡️ Whether the setup aligns with the overall trend direction (EMA filter)
More confluence = higher confidence
The scoring system helps prioritize setups that meet multiple criteria, not just one.
Liquidity Zones
Above 80: Signals possible buying exhaustion 👉 risk of reversal
Below 20: Indicates potential selling exhaustion 👉 watch for a bounce
Zones are shaded directly on the chart to highlight pressure extremes in real time.
Price + Volume Fusion
LiquidEdge blends price action with volume pressure using MFI slope and histogram behavior. It doesn’t just show you where price is moving. it shows whether the move is backed by real volume.
This lets you see:
Whether volume is confirming or fading behind a move
If a reversal is building even before price confirms it
Visual Feedback That Speaks Clearly
🟢 Green slope = increasing buying pressure
🔴 Red slope = increasing selling pressure
5️⃣ When Price Is Flat but LiquidEdge Moves: Volume Tells the Truth
One of the most useful things LiquidEdge can do is reveal pressure shifts when price looks neutral.
If price is moving sideways but the MFI slope or histogram rises, it may suggest that buying pressure is quietly increasing possibly pointing to early accumulation.
If price stays flat while the volume slope or histogram drops, this could indicate distribution, where sellers are exiting without moving the market noticeably.
These changes don’t guarantee a breakout or breakdown, but they often precede key moves especially when combined with other confluences like trend alignment or liquidity zones.
👉 LiquidEdge helps spot these setups by measuring volume momentum shifts beneath price action.
It doesn’t predict the future, but it gives you additional context to evaluate what may be developing before it’s visible on price alone.
6️⃣ Multi-Timeframe Flow Table
LiquidEdge includes a real-time table that tracks volume pressure across multiple timeframes including 5-minute, 15-minute, 1-hour, 4-hour, and daily charts.
Each row reflects the direction of the MFI slope on that timeframe, indicating whether volume pressure is increasing (inflow) or decreasing (outflow).
🟢 A rising slope suggests that buying momentum is building
🔴 A falling slope suggests selling pressure may be increasing
👉 This lets traders quickly assess whether short-term setups are aligned with higher timeframe volume trends a useful layer of confirmation for both intraday and swing strategies.
Rather than flipping between charts, the table gives you a snapshot of flow strength across the board, helping you stay focused on opportunities that align with broader market pressure.
7️⃣ Timeframes & Assets
Where LiquidEdge Works Best:
✅ Crypto: Supports major coins and high-volume altcoins (BTC, ETH, Top 100)
✅ Stocks: Effective on large-cap and mid-cap equities with consistent volume
✅ Futures: Tested on instruments like NQ, MNQ, ES, and MES
✅ Any liquid market where volume data is reliable and stable
For best results, use LiquidEdge on assets with consistent trading volume. It’s not recommended for ultra-low volume crypto pairs or micro-cap stocks, where irregular volume can distort signals.
Recommended Timeframes:
👉 Intraday trading: Works well on 3-minute, 5-minute, 15-minute, and 1-hour charts
👉 Swing trading: Performs reliably on 4-hour, daily, and weekly charts
👉 Ultra short-term (1-minute or less): Not recommended due to high noise and low reliability
LiquidEdge adapts to various trading styles from scalping short-term momentum shifts to analyzing broader volume trends across swing and positional setups. The key is choosing assets and timeframes with reliable volume flow for the tool to work effectively.
8️⃣ Common Mistakes to Avoid When Using LiquidEdge
❌ Using It in Isolation
LiquidEdge offers valuable context, but it’s not designed to function as a standalone trading system. Always combine it with key tools such as trendlines, support/resistance zones, chart structure, or fundamental data. The more supporting evidence you have, the stronger your analysis becomes.
❌ Relying on a Single Indicator
No indicator, including LiquidEdge, can account for every market condition. It’s important to use it alongside other forms of confirmation to avoid making decisions based on limited data.
❌ Misinterpreting Divergences as Reversals
A divergence between price and volume pressure doesn't always signal the end of a trend. If the broader direction remains strong (based on EMAs or higher timeframe volume flow), a divergence could reflect temporary consolidation rather than reversal.
❌ Ignoring Trend Alignment and Confidence Scoring
LiquidEdge includes confidence scoring to help validate signals. Disregarding this structure can lead to reacting to weak or out-of-context divergences, especially in choppy or low-volume environments.
❌ Using It on Second-Based or Tick Charts
Very low timeframes introduce too much noise, which can distort volume slope and divergence signals. For intraday analysis, start with 3-minute charts or higher. For swing trading, use 4H and up for clearer, more reliable structure.
9️⃣ LiquidEdge Settings Overview
A quick breakdown of what you can customize in the indicator and how each option affects what you see:
➡️ LiquidEdge Length
Controls how sensitive the indicator is to changes in volume pressure (via MFI slope).
Shorter values = faster response, more frequent signals
Longer values = smoother output, less noise
👉 Default: 14
➡️ EMA Trend Filter
Determines overall trend direction based on EMA slope. Used to filter out signals that go against the broader move.
Helps reduce countertrend entries
Adjustable to suit your strategy
👉 Recommended: 200 EMA
➡️ Pivot Lookback (Left & Right)
Defines how many bars the system looks back and forward to identify swing highs/lows for divergence detection.
Narrow: more responsive but can be noisy
Wide: slower but more stable pivot zones
👉 Default: 5 left / 5 right
➡️ Histogram Toggle
Enables a visual histogram showing how volume pressure deviates from its recent average.
Useful for spotting shifts in flow intensity
👉 Optional for added visual detail
➡️ Liquidity Zones
Highlights potential exhaustion zones based on MFI value:
Above 80 = potential distribution (buying pressure peaking)
Below 20 = possible accumulation (selling pressure fading)
👉 Zones are fully customizable (color, opacity, background)
➡️ Custom Threshold Zones
Set your own upper/lower boundaries for liquidity extremes helpful when adapting to different markets or asset classes.
👉 Especially useful outside of crypto/forex
➡️ Show LiquidEdge Line
Toggle the main MFI slope line. When turned off, liquidity zones and levels also disappear.
👉 Use if you prefer to focus only on histogram/divergences
➡️ Style Settings
Customize line colors, histogram appearance, and background shading
👉 Helps tailor visuals to your chart layout
➡️ Simplified Mode
Removes all colors and replaces visuals with a clean, grayscale output.
👉 Ideal for minimalist or distraction-free charting
➡️ Signal Score Label
Displays the confidence score of the current setup, based on:
Divergence presence
Liquidity zone positioning
Trend alignment (EMA)
👉 Tooltip explains how the score is calculated
➡️ Divergence Labels
Shows “Bullish” or “Bearish” labels at divergence points.
Optional Filters based on trend if EMA filter is active
➡️ Multi-Timeframe Flow Table
Shows directional flow (based on MFI slope) across: 5M, 15M, 1H, 4H, 1D
Color-coded (faded green/red) for clarity
👉 Table position is customizable on your chart
➡️ Alerts
Get notified when any of these conditions are met:
✅ Bullish or bearish divergence detected
✅ Price enters high/low liquidity zones
✅ Signal score reaches a defined value
➡️ Visibility Settings
Control which timeframes display the LiquidEdge indicator
👉 Best used on 3-minute and above
⚠️ Not recommended on ultra-low or second-based charts due to noise
🔟 Q&A – What Traders Usually Ask
➡️ Can this help reduce bad trades?
To a degree, yes. LiquidEdge is built to highlight areas where price may react, based on volume pressure, liquidity zones, and divergence patterns. It can offer clarity in sideways or messy markets, helping traders avoid impulsive or poorly timed entries.
That said, it’s not predictive or guaranteed. It works best when used with broader context including structure, support/resistance, trend, and volume-based confluence.
👉 Reminder: LiquidEdge is not a signal tool. It’s a decision-support framework designed to help you assess potential shifts, not replace judgment or trading rules.
➡️ Is this just another flashy signal tool?
No. LiquidEdge doesn’t give buy/sell alerts. Instead, it visualizes volume shifts using MFI slope, divergence filtering, and trend-based scoring. It’s built to help you understand why price action may be changing not just react to a one-dimensional signal.
You’re seeing how volume pressure evolves across timeframes, which gives added context to what’s unfolding in the market.
➡️ How do I know this isn’t just another overhyped tool?
LiquidEdge is based on real trading logic: volume pressure (via MFI slope), price behavior, and divergence within trend and liquidity zones. It was developed and tested by traders, not packaged by marketers.
No performance is guaranteed. It’s designed to support your decisions not promise results.
➡️ Will this work with my trading style?
If you trade any market with volume crypto, stocks, or futures LiquidEdge can add value.
✔️ Scalpers: Best from 3-minute and up
✔️ Swing traders: Works well on 4H, Daily, Weekly
✔️ Investors: Weekly charts show pressure buildup over time
⚠️ Avoid ultra-low timeframes (under 1M) or illiquid markets, as noise and irregular data can reduce reliability.
➡️ Can I trust the signals?
These are not buy/sell signals. LiquidEdge offers confidence-weighted insights based on:
✔️ Valid divergence
✔️ Zone positioning (above 80 / below 20)
✔️ Optional trend alignment (via EMA)
Each setup is scored visually to reflect how much confluence exists. You can combine that information with structure, price action, or your existing tools to evaluate opportunities.
👉 Think of LiquidEdge as a decision filter not a trigger.
It’s meant to slow down impulsive trades and help you make more context-aware decisions.
1️⃣1️⃣ Limitations – Know When It’s Less Effective
LiquidEdge performs best in stable, high-volume markets where volume data is consistent and structure is visible.
It’s not recommended for:
❌ Low-volume tokens
❌ Micro-cap or penny stocks
❌ Newly listed assets with limited trading history
These types of markets often show inconsistent or erratic volume behavior, making it difficult for LiquidEdge to accurately assess pressure or identify reliable divergences.
⚠️ During major news events or sudden volatility spikes, volume and price behavior can become disconnected or extreme. This may distort MFI slope calculations and reduce the accuracy of divergence or confidence scoring.
LiquidEdge is built to read structured volume flow. When market conditions become highly erratic or unpredictable, it's best to:
Wait for structure to return
Use it alongside other filters for additional confirmation
This isn't a flaw it's simply the nature of tools that rely on consistency in price and volume data.
1️⃣2️⃣ Real Chart Examples – See It in Action
Now that you’ve seen how LiquidEdge works, here are real-world chart examples from various asset classes
including:
✅ Crypto
✅ Stocks
✅ Futures
✅ Commodities
These examples demonstrate how LiquidEdge behaves under different conditions, and how both the line (MFI slope) and histogram (volume deviation) can be used to interpret market flow.
In each walkthrough, you’ll see:
How the histogram can highlight potential momentum shifts
When the slope line provides stronger directional clarity
Examples of possible hidden accumulation or distribution (before price responds)
What to watch out for such as weak volume, false divergences, or conflicting flow signals
👉 These are real examples based on live market data not theoretical setups. They’re meant to help you recognize how LiquidEdge reacts across multiple styles and timeframes.
Let’s walk through each one and break down the logic step by step, so you can understand how to evaluate setups using structure, volume behavior, and context-driven confluence.
Example: Microsoft (MSFT) – Possible Hidden Accumulation
In this setup, price was moving lower within a short-term downtrend. However, LiquidEdge began showing signs of increasing inflow pressure a common characteristic of accumulation, where volume rises even as price declines.
This divergence suggested that buying interest may have been increasing behind the scenes, despite weak price action on the surface.
Step-by-step breakdown:
👉 Trend context – Price was clearly trending down at the time
👉 Volume divergence – Price made lower lows, but LiquidEdge slope was rising = possible bullish divergence
👉 Accumulation clue – The rising slope, despite falling price, pointed to volume inflow often seen during quiet accumulation
👉 Histogram support – Volume pressure (via the histogram) also increased, confirming the flow shift
👉 Anticipating reaction – When liquidity pressure rises ahead of price, it can signal potential reversal interest
In this case, price later moved sharply higher. While not guaranteed, setups like this illustrate how divergence + volume flow may help highlight early accumulation zones before price confirms the shift.
Same Setup – Focusing on the Histogram Alone
Here, we’re revisiting the Microsoft setup but this time focusing only on the histogram, without the MFI slope line.
Even without the directional slope, the histogram showed rising volume pressure while price continued to drift lower. This visual pattern may indicate that buying interest was quietly increasing, despite weak price movement.
This is where the histogram adds value: it helps visualize the intensity of volume flow over time. When volume pressure builds during a flat or declining price phase, it can be consistent with accumulation where larger participants begin positioning before the market responds.
This example highlights how the histogram alone can provide early insight into underlying volume dynamics even before price shifts noticeably.
Filtering with EMA and why It Matters
Here, we revisit the Microsoft example this time applying the 200 EMA filter, which helps define the broader trend.
Once enabled, LiquidEdge automatically removed any bullish or bearish divergence signals that were against the prevailing trend. This helped reduce noise and focus only on setups aligned with market structure.
✅ The EMA acts as a contextual filter.
For example, if a bullish divergence occurs during a confirmed downtrend, LiquidEdge suppresses that signal helping you avoid setups that may carry more risk.
This filtering mechanism is especially useful in fast or choppy markets, where not all divergences are meaningful.
Want More Flexibility? Adjust the Filter
If you're a more aggressive trader or prefer shorter-term signals, you can reduce the EMA length (e.g., to 150, 50, or even 25). This increases the number of setups shown but also raises the importance of additional context and confirmation.
⚠️ Keep in mind:
❌ More signals doesn’t always mean better outcomes
✅ Focused, context-aware signals tend to be more consistent with broader market pressure
If you’re using this in combination with strategies like options trading, this filter can help refine your entry zones especially when paired with other structure or volatility tools.
Distribution Example and Bitcoin Setup Before a Major Drop
In this example, Bitcoin was trading in a relatively tight range while price continued to push upward. However, LiquidEdge began to show signs of volume outflow, which can suggest potential distribution.
Here’s what was observed:
🔴 Price was moving up inside a horizontal range
🔴 LiquidEdge’s slope indicated declining volume pressure
🔴 Several bearish divergence signals appeared during this consolidation phase
🔴 The histogram also showed weakening flow, even before price broke down
These overlapping signals pointed to a possible distribution phase, where buying momentum was fading despite price still holding up.
🧭 Signs to Watch for in Potential Distribution:
1️⃣ Price holding flat or rising slightly within a tight range
2️⃣ Volume pressure (line or histogram) sloping downward
3️⃣ Repeated bearish divergences forming at the highs
4️⃣ Lack of follow-through on bullish setups signaling hesitation in demand
While LiquidEdge can’t predict market outcomes, this scenario demonstrates how a combination of divergence, outflow, and failure to break out may serve as early warnings that momentum is shifting beneath the surface.
Failed Auction Example – Volume Shift Before a Breakdown
In this example, price attempted to break out above a recent high, creating the appearance of a bullish continuation. However, LiquidEdge began to signal volume outflow, despite the upward price move a potential sign of a failed auction.
Here’s what was observed:
👉 Price made a new high, appearing to break resistance
👉 LiquidEdge slope and histogram both showed declining liquidity
👉 The indicator formed lower lows, even as price pushed higher
👉 This divergence suggested that volume wasn’t supporting the breakout
Shortly after, price reversed and returned back inside the range which is a common characteristic of failed auction behavior.
🧭 Spotting a Potential Failed Auction with LiquidEdge:
1️⃣ Price breaks above a recent high
2️⃣ Volume flow (line + histogram) shows outflow, not inflow
3️⃣ Indicator forms lower lows while price makes higher highs (bearish divergence)
4️⃣ Market reverts back into the previous range without follow-through
While no tool can predict outcomes, this setup demonstrated how volume pressure and divergence can help identify moments where a breakout may lack real support offering context before price action confirms the shift.
Reading the Histogram - Spotting Pressure Fades
In this example, price was still rising but the LiquidEdge histogram showed falling volume pressure. This type of divergence between price and volume can serve as a potential early signal that momentum may be fading.
🔻 Histogram levels declined while price continued higher
🔻 This suggested that buying pressure was weakening, even though price hadn’t turned
🔻 Volume flow behavior didn’t support the continuation possibly indicating buyer exhaustion
Just before the peak, the histogram nearly reached its lower threshold, despite price still being near its highs.
💡 How to Read It:
When volume pressure (shown by the histogram) starts to fade while price is still rising, it can indicate that momentum is weakening. This may precede a pullback or reversal particularly if other factors like divergence or zone exhaustion are also present.
Conversely, rising histogram values during a price drop may suggest potential accumulation.
👉 Use the histogram as a volume intensity gauge, not a signal on its own especially when evaluating whether a move is supported by actual flow, or just price momentum.
The Table – Fast, Visual Multi-Timeframe Flow Insight
The multi-timeframe flow table in LiquidEdge provides a consolidated view of volume momentum across several key timeframes so you don’t need to switch between charts to compare flow strength.
👉 Instead of flipping from 5-minute to 15M, 1H, 4H, and Daily, the table displays flow direction on all of them at a glance.
Example layout:
🔼 Daily: Up
🔽 1H: Down
🔼 15M: Up
🔽 5M: Down
This setup gives you a quick read on whether volume momentum is aligned across multiple timeframes or diverging which can help frame your trade approach.
🧠 Why It’s Useful:
✅ Supports timeframe alignment
If higher timeframes show strong inflow while lower ones are mixed, you may interpret it as a swing-based opportunity. If short timeframes show pressure but higher frames are flat, it might suggest short-term setups with caution.
✅ Improves context awareness
Instead of interpreting a move in isolation, the table helps you assess whether short-term signals are part of a broader shift or going against higher timeframe flow.
💡 Pro Tip: Use the table as a starting point in your analysis. It’s a simple but effective snapshot of current liquidity pressure across the board helping you plan trades with broader context, rather than reacting chart-by-chart.
🔚 Final Thoughts
If you're focused on trading with better clarity and structure, LiquidEdge is designed to help you interpret what’s happening beneath the surface not just follow price movement.
While many tools highlight price alone, LiquidEdge combines volume pressure, divergence filtering, and trend-based context to help identify potential areas of accumulation, distribution, or momentum shifts even before they become obvious on a chart.
👉 This isn’t just another signal tool. It’s a framework to support smarter decision-making:
✔️ One that helps you filter out noise
✔️ One that scores setups using multiple layers of confirmation
✔️ One that brings volume context into every trade idea
Whether you're scalping on a 5-minute chart or managing a longer-term swing trade, LiquidEdge is built to help you stay aligned with volume-driven behavior not just react to price alone.
If you've struggled with late entries, unreliable setups, or second-guessing trades, this tool was designed to bring more structure to your process. It won’t remove all uncertainty but it can help you stay more selective, confident, and intentional.
✅ Trade with clarity
✅ Stay process-driven
✅ Focus on structure, not noise
LiquidEdge is not meant to replace your strategy. It’s here to enhance it.
In this chart, the 200 EMA filter was applied. As a result, only signals that aligned with the dominant trend direction were displayed helping to reduce distractions and focus on setups with stronger context.
💡 Using a higher EMA setting like 200 can reduce the number of signals shown, but may help you focus on higher-conviction opportunities.
That said, every trader is different:
Longer EMAs = fewer signals, but more trend-filtered setups
Shorter EMAs = more signals, faster entries but with potentially more noise
👉 Adjust the filter based on your trading style. Use a 200 EMA for swing trading, or reduce it to 50, 25, or even 5 if you're trading more aggressively or intraday.
LiquidEdge adapts to you not the other way around.
🔁 Adjusting EMA for Your Trading Style
Personal Tip: When trading more aggressively, I often use a 5 EMA filter especially when combining histogram strength with other tools. This increases signal responsiveness and may help highlight short-term flow shifts more quickly.
Below are visual examples that show how different EMA lengths impact the behavior of LiquidEdge:
50 EMA ON
25 EMA ON
5 EMA ON
Lower EMA Example – Gold with the 5 EMA
In this example, the 5 EMA filter was applied to Gold. As expected, more signals were plotted compared to higher EMA settings. The tool became more responsive to rapid shifts in volume momentum, making it more suitable for fast-paced trading environments.
This setting can help traders who prefer early entries but it also introduces more sensitivity, so context and additional confirmation become even more important.
Each setting affects signal frequency and filtering:
Higher EMA → fewer signals, more trend-confirmed setups
Lower EMA → more signals, quicker responses, but with more potential for noise
Choose what fits your approach:
Long-term swing → Stick with 200 EMA
Intraday or scalping → Consider shorter EMAs (50, 25, or 5)
💡 Reminder: EMA filtering is fully adjustable. LiquidEdge doesn’t lock you into one trading style it’s meant to adapt to your process, whether you’re swing trading or scalping short-term moves.
But There’s a Catch…
Using a lower EMA setting (like 5) opens up faster, more frequent signals but it also increases the need for precision and stronger trade management.
❗ More signals = More responsiveness
❗ Faster setups mean quicker decisions
❗ Risk control becomes even more important
💡 Lower Timeframes = More Detail, Less Margin for Error
A short EMA (like 5) can help you:
✅ Identify early momentum shifts
✅ Respond before traditional trend-followers
✅ Highlight short-term divergence and volume changes
But it also comes with tradeoffs:
❌ Greater signal noise
❌ Higher potential for misreads or fakeouts
❌ Requires clear structure and disciplined entries
🚩 Watch Out for Liquidity Grabs
In lower timeframes, a common trap is the liquidity grab where price pushes beyond recent highs or lows, triggers stops, then quickly reverses.
📌 These moves can look like breakouts, but often reverse quickly possibly reflecting institutional order placement or low-liquidity manipulation.
🧭 How to Approach It Smartly
✅ Use structure: Mark support and resistance to frame moves
✅ Confirm volume behavior: Is histogram strength rising or fading?
✅ Avoid chasing: Look for confluence, not just a single signal
✅ Be intentional with stops: Place them with structure in mind to avoid being swept out
NASDAQ Futures Example – Low Timeframe Setups with LiquidEdge
In this example, we look at how LiquidEdge was used to identify both short and long setups on the NASDAQ Futures (NQ) particularly on a low timeframe (5M), where quick decision-making and volume precision matter most.
⚠️ A Note on Futures and Volume
When trading futures, especially on intraday charts, it’s important to separate overnight volume from regular session activity.
🕒 Overnight Volume ≠ Real Volume Context
Overnight price action is informative, but the volume data itself may not reflect true market participation. In LiquidEdge, histogram and pressure calculations emphasize regular session flow helping avoid skewed signals that could come from low-volume overnight moves.
Using the Histogram to Spot Potential Shifts
One of the key cues I use is color transition in the histogram:
🔴 A flip from strong green to red can signal fading buying pressure, sometimes marking the beginning of a potential short setup.
🟢 A shift from red to green may indicate that buyers are returning, suggesting possible accumulation.
These shifts serve as early visual cues of changing pressure especially when confirmed by other tools or context.
🔁 Adding Context with the Line + Structure
After spotting a histogram shift, I look at:
1️⃣ Slope Line – Is it confirming the same directional pressure?
2️⃣ Support/Resistance – Are we near a meaningful zone?
3️⃣ Additional Tools – This includes trendlines, VWAP, EMAs, and overall price structure.
On lower timeframes like 5M, these pieces become even more important. LiquidEdge gives directional insight, but your full setup provides confirmation and execution logic.
⚠️ Disclaimer
LiquidEdge is not a signal tool. It’s a visual representation of market pressure and flow designed to help you make more informed trading and investing decisions. It shows you what’s happening beneath the price action but you are still responsible for your decisions.
Always combine LiquidEdge with your own strategy, research, and supporting tools. That includes trend analysis, support/resistance levels, chart patterns, and fundamentals (like P/E ratios, price-to-sales, debt ratios, etc.).
This tool should never be used alone or treated as financial advice.
Some content may include AI-powered enhancements for clarity or formatting.
Always do your own research. For personal financial guidance, speak with a licensed financial advisor.
GEEKSDOBYTE IFVG w/ Buy/Sell Signals1. Inputs & Configuration
Swing Lookback (swingLen)
Controls how many bars on each side are checked to mark a swing high or swing low (default = 5).
Booleans to Toggle Plotting
showSwings – Show small triangle markers at swing highs/lows
showFVG – Show Fair Value Gap zones
showSignals – Show “BUY”/“SELL” labels when price inverts an FVG
showDDLine – Show a yellow “DD” line at the close of the inversion bar
showCE – Show an orange dashed “CE” line at the midpoint of the gap area
2. Swing High / Low Detection
isSwingHigh = ta.pivothigh(high, swingLen, swingLen)
Marks a bar as a swing high if its high is higher than the highs of the previous swingLen bars and the next swingLen bars.
isSwingLow = ta.pivotlow(low, swingLen, swingLen)
Marks a bar as a swing low if its low is lower than the lows of the previous and next swingLen bars.
Plotting
If showSwings is true, small red downward triangles appear above swing highs, and green upward triangles below swing lows.
3. Fair Value Gap (3‐Bar) Identification
A Fair Value Gap (FVG) is defined here using a simple three‐bar logic (sometimes called an “inefficiency” in price):
Bullish FVG (bullFVG)
Checks if, two bars ago, the low of that bar (low ) is strictly greater than the current bar’s high (high).
In other words:
bullFVG = low > high
Bearish FVG (bearFVG)
Checks if, two bars ago, the high of that bar (high ) is strictly less than the current bar’s low (low).
In other words:
bearFVG = high < low
When either condition is true, it identifies a three‐bar “gap” or unfilled imbalance in the market.
4. Drawing FVG Zones
If showFVG is enabled, each time a bullish or bearish FVG is detected:
Bullish FVG Zone
Draws a semi‐transparent green box from the bar two bars ago (where the gap began) at low up to the current bar’s high.
Bearish FVG Zone
Draws a semi‐transparent red box from the bar two bars ago at high down to the current bar’s low.
These colored boxes visually highlight the “fair value imbalance” area on the chart.
5. Inversion (Fill) Detection & Entry Signals
An inversion is defined as the price “closing through” that previously drawn FVG:
Bullish Inversion (bullInversion)
Occurs when a bullish FVG was identified on bar-2 (bullFVG), and on the current bar the close is greater than that old bar-2 low:
bullInversion = bullFVG and close > low
Bearish Inversion (bearInversion)
Occurs when a bearish FVG was identified on bar-2 (bearFVG), and on the current bar the close is lower than that old bar-2 high:
bearInversion = bearFVG and close < high
When an inversion is true, the indicator optionally draws two lines and a label (depending on input toggles):
Draw “DD” Line (yellow, solid)
Plots a horizontal yellow line from the current bar’s close price extending five bars forward (bar_index + 5). This is often referred to as a “Demand/Daily Demand” line, marking where price inverted the gap.
Draw “CE” Line (orange, dashed)
Calculates the midpoint (ce) of the original FVG zone.
For a bullish inversion:
ce = (low + high) / 2
For a bearish inversion:
ce = (high + low) / 2
Plots a horizontal dashed orange line at that midpoint for five bars forward.
Plot Label (“BUY” / “SELL”)
If showSignals is true, a green “BUY” label is placed at the low of the current bar when a bullish inversion occurs.
Likewise, a red “SELL” label at the high of the current bar when a bearish inversion happens.
6. Putting It All Together
Swing Markers (Optional):
Visually confirm recent swing highs and swing lows with small triangles.
FVG Zones (Optional):
Highlight areas where price left a 3-bar gap (bullish in green, bearish in red).
Inversion Confirmation:
Wait for price to close beyond the old FVG boundary.
Once that happens, draw the yellow “DD” line at the close, the orange dashed “CE” line at the zone’s midpoint, and place a “BUY” or “SELL” label exactly on that bar.
User Controls:
All of the above elements can be individually toggled on/off (showSwings, showFVG, showSignals, showDDLine, showCE).
In Practice
A bullish FVG forms whenever a strong drop leaves a gap in liquidity (three bars ago low > current high).
When price later “fills” that gap by closing above the old low, the script signals a potential long entry (BUY), draws a demand line at the closing price, and marks the midpoint of that gap.
Conversely, a bearish FVG marks a potential short zone (three bars ago high < current low). When price closes below that gap’s high, it signals a SELL, with similar lines drawn.
By combining these elements, the indicator helps users visually identify inefficiencies (FVGs), confirm when price inverts/fills them, and place straightforward buy/sell labels alongside reference lines for trade management.
MMM @MaxMaserati 2.0MMM @MaxMaserati 2.0 - TradingView Indicator
The Backbone of the Max Maserati Method
The MMM @MaxMaserati 2.0 indicator is the core of the proprietary Max Maserati Method (MMM), a trading system designed to decode institutional price action. It integrates candle bias analysis, market structure identification, volume-based signals, and precise entry zones to align traders with smart money.
Core Components of the MMM System
1. Six Core Candle Classifications
Master these patterns to reveal institutional behavior:
Bullish Body Close: Closes above previous high, signaling strong buying.
Bearish Body Close: Closes below previous low, indicating intense selling.
Bullish Affinity: High tests previous low, closes within range, showing hidden bullish strength.
Bearish Affinity: Low tests previous high, closes within range, reflecting bearish pressure.
Seek & Destroy: Breaks both previous high/low, closes inside, direction depends on close.
Close Inside: High/low within previous range, bias based on close.
2. Plus/Minus Strength System
Quantifies candle conviction:
Bullish Strength: Low to close distance.
Bearish Strength: High to close distance.
Plus (+): Dominant strength signals strong follow-through.
Minus (-): Balanced strengths suggest caution.
3. PO4 Candles (Power of OHLC (4))
Analyzes OHLC for body-closed candles after swing high/low fractals:
C2: Body close above high/below low post fractal with strength conditions.
C3: Stronger body close with pronounced low/high breakouts.
C4: Body close which show strength and might trigger a BeB/BuB
Visualization: Green (bullish), purple (bearish) bars; triangle markers for fractals.
4. MC2 (High Volume Reversal Candles)
High buy/sell volume candles reversed by opposing volume:
Bullish MC2: Buy volume flipped by sell volume, signaling exhaustion.
Bearish MC2: Sell volume flipped by buy volume, indicating reversal.
Visualization: Dark green (bullish), dark red (bearish) bars.
5. MMM Blocks (eBlocks and iBlocks)
Marks institutional order blocks:
External Blocks (eBlocks): At market structure changes (MSC), labeled BuB/BeB.
Internal Blocks (iBlocks): Within trends, labeled L/S.
Volume: Normalized with indicators (🔥 high, ↑ above average, ↓ low).
Filters: Discount (0-50), premium (50-100), extreme (0-20, 80-100), mid-range (20-50, 50-80).
6. Entry Blocks - Specific Entry Areas
Entry Blocks are precise zones for framing trades based on the MMM system, triggered post-MSC to capitalize on institutional momentum:
Purpose: Pinpoint high-probability entry areas following a Market Structure Change (MSC), aligning with smart money direction.
Formation:
MMM Entry Block Long: Forms after a bullish MSC (BuB), typically at the swing low (e.g., lowerValueMSC) of the fractal pattern, marking a long entry zone.
MMM Entry Block Short: Forms after a bearish MSC (BeB), typically at the swing high (e.g., upperValueMSC), marking a short entry zone.
Styles :
Close-to-Swing High/Low: Box drawn from the candle’s close to the swing high/low level, emphasizing the fractal pivot.
High/Low-to-Close: Box drawn from the candle’s high/low to its close, capturing the full price action range.
Visualization:
Labeled “MMM Entry Block Long” (cyan background/border) or “Short” (pink background/border).
Includes a dashed midline for reference.
Volume displayed if enabled, normalized with markers (🔥 >150%, ⚡ >120%, ❄️ <70%).
Behavior:
Deletes when price touches the level (On Level Touch) or closes beyond it (On Candle Close)
Limited to a configurable number ( default 5) to avoid clutter.
Trade Framing:
Entry: Enter within the eBreak box, ideally on a pullback or confirmation candle aligning with MMM bias (e.g., Bullish Body Close or Affinity).
Stop-Loss: Placed below the eBreak low (bullish) or above the high (bearish), leveraging the swing level as support/resistance.
Take-Profit: Targets higher timeframe high (bullish) or low (bearish), with ratio (default 2.0) for risk-reward.
MMM Integration: Use candle bias (Plus/Minus), PO4 signals, and MMPD consensus to confirm entry direction and strength.
Significance: eBreaks frame trades by isolating institutional entry points post-MSC, reducing noise and enhancing precision.
7. Market Structure Change (MSC)
Tracks structure shifts:
Detection: Fractal highs/lows with adjustable candle count.
Visualization: Green (BuB), red (BeB) lines/labels; numbered breaks (Bub1/Beb1).
Counter: Tracks consecutive MSCs for trend strength.
8. MMPD (Market Momentum Price Delivery)
Analyzes momentum/trend:
Conditions: Red (bearish), Green (bullish), Pink (modifying bearish), Pale Green (modifying bullish).
Traps: Flags bullish/bearish traps when MMPD conflicts with body close.
Metrics: SuperMaxTrend, momentum (K/D), MMPD level.
Consensus: Rated signals (e.g., “Very Strong Buy ★★★★★”).
9. Trade and Risk Management
Disciplined trading:
Entry Visualization: Entry, stop-loss, take-profit lines/labels with customizable risk (riskAmount, default $50) and reward (ratio).
Behavior: Shows last/all entries, removes on MSC shift or breach.
Text Size: Tiny, Small, Normal.
NB: The Trade and risk management is to use with caution, it is not fully implemented yet.
10. Stats Table
Real-time dashboard:
Elements: Timeframe, symbol, candle bias, strength, MMPD, momentum, SuperMaxTrend, MMPD level, volume, consensus, divergence, delta MA, price delivery, note (“Analyze | Wait | Repeat”).
Customization: Position, size, element visibility.
Colors: Green (bullish), red (bearish), orange (warnings), gray (neutral).
11. Delta MA and Divergence
Monitors volume delta:
Delta MA: Smoothed delta with direction arrows (↗↘→).
Divergence: Flags MMPD-momentum divergences (⚠️).
Key Features
Automated Analysis: Detects PO4, MSC, blocks, MC2, Entry Block via OHLC.
Color-Coded Visualization: Bars, lines, table cells reflect bias/strength.
Dynamic Bias Lines: Higher timeframe high/low lines with labels.
Volume Analysis: Normalized volume across blocks, entries, MC2.
Flexible Filters: Tailors block/entry Block display to strategies.
Real-Time Metrics: Tracks strength, delta, trend points.
Trading Advantages
Institutional Insight: Decodes manipulation via OHLC and volume.
Early Reversals: Spots shifts via PO4, MC2, MSC, Entry Blocks.
Precise Entries: entry block frame high-probability trades.
Robust Risk Management: Stop-loss, take-profit, risk-reward.
Simplified Complexity: Actionable signals from complex action.
Profit Target Framework
Bullish: Higher timeframe high.
Bearish: Higher timeframe low.
Plus Strength: Direct move.
Minus Strength: Pullbacks expected.
Entry Blocks/MSC-Driven: Entry anchor entries to MSC targets.
Trader’s Mantra
“Analyze | Wait | Repeat” - Discipline drives profits.
The MMM @MaxMaserati 2.0 indicator, with Entry Blocks as specific trade-framing zones, offers a professional-grade framework for precise, institutional-aligned trading.
Note: Based on the proprietary Max Maserati Method for educational and analytical use.
CandelaCharts - ICT Weekly Profiles📝 Overview
The indicator provides a pattern-based approach to the ICT Weekly Profiles, emphasizing a line that marks the Open, High, Low, and Close of the week. This line allows you to instantly visualize and identify the Weekly Profile.
The profile detection relies on the week’s high and low, delivering a clear and concise representation of the weekly profile.
ICT Weekly Profiles are structured conceptual frameworks designed to outline typical patterns of price behavior over the course of a trading week. These profiles serve as analytical tools, offering traders insights into recurring market tendencies and helping them identify potential opportunities and risks.
The ICT Weekly Profiles indicator offers two distinct types of profiles to provide a clearer understanding of weekly price action:
ICT Weekly Profiles
ICT Missing Weekly Profiles
The toolkit automatically detects and marks these ICT Weekly Profiles and ICT Missing Weekly Profiles on the chart, enabling traders to quickly pinpoint critical zones for analysis and decision-making.
📦 Features
The ICT Weekly Profiles toolkit offers a comprehensive set of features designed to enhance trading precision and decision-making. Key features include:
Weekly Profiles
Missing Weekly Profiles
Advanced Styling
Scanner
The indicator supports the following profiles:
ICT Weekly Profiles
Classic Tuesday Low Of The Week Bullish
Classic Tuesday High Of The Week Bearish
Wednesday Low Of The Week Bullish
Wednesday High Of The Week Bearish
Consolidation Thursday Reversal Bullish
Consolidation Thursday Reversal Bearish
Consolidation Midweek Rally Bullish
Consolidation Midweek Rally Bearish
Wednesday Weekly Reversal Bullish
Wednesday Weekly Reversal Bearish
Seek And Destroy Bullish Friday
Seek And Destroy Bearish Friday
ICT Missing Weekly Profiles
Monday Low Tuesday High Bullish
Monday High Tuesday Low Bearish
Monday Low Wednesday High Bullish
Monday High Wednesday Low Bearish
Monday Low Thursday High Bullish
Monday High Thursday Low Bearish
Tuesday Low Wednesday High Bullish
Tuesday High Wednesday Low Bearish
Tuesday Low Friday High Bullish
Tuesday High Friday Low Bearish
Wednesday Low Thursday High Bullish
Wednesday High Thursday Low Bearish
Monday Low Friday High Bullish
Monday Friday Bearish Rally
Monday High/Low Range
Tuesday High/Low Range
Wednesday High/Low Range
Thursday High/Low Range
Friday High/Low Range
⚙️ Settings
History: Controls how many profiles are displayed on the chart.
Timeframe Limit: Sets the timeframe up to which profiles will be drawn.
Show OHLC Lines: Display the lines for OHLC.
Show Profile Line: Display the Weekly Profile line.
Use NY Midnight Open: Controls from where a profile will start detection.
Open: Style for Open line.
High: Style for High line.
Low: Style for Low line.
Midline: Style for Profile Midline.
Label: Controls the position of the Weekly Profile name.
Scanner: Display the Scanner
⚡️ Showcase
ICT (Inner Circle Trader) weekly profile templates are analytical frameworks that categorize and describe typical patterns of price action observed during a trading week.
ICT Weekly Profiles
ICT Missing Weekly Profiles
Scanner
📒 Usage
The primary objective of the ICT Weekly Profiles indicator is to provide traders with a comprehensive and actionable overview of the Weekly Previous, Current, and Future Profile. This allows traders to interpret market structure, anticipate price behavior, and align their trading decisions with higher time-frame trends.
Load the indicator on the chart
Enable Scanner
See the Predicted Profiles list
Predicted Profiles represent all potential scenarios for the current week, generated by a profile detection algorithm.
By visualizing potential outcomes through Predicted Profiles, the ICT Weekly Profiles indicator provides traders with a strategic edge, allowing them to remain flexible, prepared, and aligned with the most probable market movements.
🚨 Alerts
The indicator does not provide any alerts!
🔹 Notes
ICT Weekly Profiles
pbs.twimg.com
ICT Missing Weekly Profiles
pbs.twimg.com
⚠️ Disclaimer
These tools are exclusively available on the TradingView platform.
Our charting tools are intended solely for informational and educational purposes and should not be regarded as financial, investment, or trading advice. They are not designed to predict market movements or offer specific recommendations. Users should be aware that past performance is not indicative of future results and should not rely on these tools for financial decisions. By using these charting tools, the purchaser agrees that the seller and creator hold no responsibility for any decisions made based on information provided by the tools. The purchaser assumes full responsibility and liability for any actions taken and their consequences, including potential financial losses or investment outcomes that may result from the use of these products.
By purchasing, the customer acknowledges and accepts that neither the seller nor the creator is liable for any undesired outcomes stemming from the development, sale, or use of these products. Additionally, the purchaser agrees to indemnify the seller from any liability. If invited through the Friends and Family Program, the purchaser understands that any provided discount code applies only to the initial purchase of Candela's subscription. The purchaser is responsible for canceling or requesting cancellation of their subscription if they choose not to continue at the full retail price. In the event the purchaser no longer wishes to use the products, they must unsubscribe from the membership service, if applicable.
We do not offer reimbursements, refunds, or chargebacks. Once these Terms are accepted at the time of purchase, no reimbursements, refunds, or chargebacks will be issued under any circumstances.
By continuing to use these charting tools, the user confirms their understanding and acceptance of these Terms as outlined in this disclaimer.
FU Candle Indicator V3.2What the FU Candle Indicator does:
First we need to understand what FU candles are. There's bullish and bearish FU candles.
Bullish FU candles are candles that have a long wick that takes out the previous candles low, then turns around and closes above the high of the previous candle.
Bearish FU candles are candles that have a long wick that takes out the previous candles high, then turns around and closes below the low of the previous candle.
Then there's so called attempted FU candles (ATT FU)
The difference between normal FU candles and ATT FU candles is, that the ATT FU candle doesn't close above/below the high/low of the previous candle but only above the previous candle's body close.
Bullish ATT FU Candle:
Bearish ATT FU Candle:
Detection of Bullish FU Candles:
Bullish FU Candles are detected by measuring the distance between the low of the previous candle and the low of the current candle.
Then the distance between the previous candles high and the current candles close price are measured.
If current candle low < previous candle low and current candle close > previous candle high = Bullish FU Candle.
Detection of Bullish ATT FU Candles:
Bullish ATT FU Candles are detected by measuring the distance between the low of the previous candle and the low of the current candle.
Then the distance between the previous candles close or open price and the current candles close price are measured. If the previous candle closed bearish, the open price is used for comparison, if the previous candle closed bullish, the close price is used for comparison.
If current candle low < previous candle low and current candle close > previous candle open or close = Bullish ATT FU Candle.
Detection of Bearish FU Candles:
Bearish FU Candles are detected by measuring the distance between the high of the previous candle and the high of the current candle.
Then the distance between the previous candles low, AND the current candles close price are measured.
If current candle high > previous candle high, AND current candle close < previous candle low = Bearish FU Candle.
Detection of Bearish ATT FU Candles:
Bearish ATT FU Candles are detected by measuring the distance between the high of the previous candle and the high of the current candle.
Then the distance between the previous candles close or open price and the current candles close price are measured. If the previous candle closed bearish, the open price is used for comparison, if the previous candle closed bullish, the close price is used for comparison.
If current candle high > previous candle high and current candle close < previous candle open or close = Bearish ATT FU Candle.
What makes this script unique?
It shows and liquidity grab and a break of structure on a lower timeframe in one candle.
It allows to adjust the settings for the asset and timeframe you're using
The built in filters (Fractal Filter and EMA Filter) are both optional but allow to filter out certain candles and most importantly it leaves room for experimentation and optimisation to your trading style.
Input Settings and how to use them:
Bullish FU Candle Color --> This setting is to set the color for bullish FU candles.
Bearish FU Candle Color --> This setting is to set the color for bearish FU candles.
Chart --> This setting enables you to display FU's on different timeframes instead of only the current time. It's set to current timeframe by default.
Liq. Grab in Points --> This is the strength of the liquidity grab. By how many points has the current candle taken out the low/ high of the previous candle. It's set to 20 by default but it has to be adjusted to the timeframe and asset you're using.
Engulfing in Points --> This the strength of the engulfing of the previous candle. It measures the distance of the current close price to the open, close, high or low of the previous candle. It depends if the current candle is bullish or bearish and if the previous candle was bullish or bearish and if ATT FUs are enabled but this setting applies to all methods. It's set to 20 by default but you have to adjust it to the asset and timeframe you're using.
Min. Size in Points --> This setting is to filter out tiny candles. It measures the overall size of the FU candle from low to high. It's set to 20 by default but you have to adjust it to the asset and timeframe you are using.
Min. Body Size in Points --> This setting is to filter out FU candles that have a tiny body. It measures the size of the body from open to close. It's set to 20 by default but you have to adjust it to the asset and timeframe you are using.
Max. Body Size in Points --> This setting is to filter out FU candles that have a huge body. It measures the size of the body from open to close. It's set to 10000 by default but you have to adjust it to the asset and timeframe you are using.
Show ATT FU Candles --> ATT FU Candles are FU's where the body only engulfs the previous candles body but not the wick. This type of FU candles is just as valid as the strong FU's where the Body and the wick of the previous Candle is engulfed. The setting is enabled by default.
Rejection Filter --> This setting is used filter out FU candles where the opposite side rejection is stronger than the body direction of the FU. This filters out a lot of traps. It's disabled by default.
Fractal Filter --> FU's are only valid if they broke a fractal of the past x candles. This filters out some of the FU candles that are inside a range and therefore invalid. This is an optional filter and disabled by default.
EMA Filter --> FU's are only if they are above/ below the EMA. This is to filter out most of the FU candles that are inside ranges. The EMA period can be set too. This is an optional filter and enabled and EMA length set to 7 by default. You can enable it and/ or change the length of the EMA to fit your trading style.
Show Entry Lines --> The entry line setting has been changed in terms of styling. The upper and lower line has been removed. Now only the 50% retracement line of the candle body is displayed and the line type, color, strength and length can be set to keep charts as clean as possible.
Alert Timeframes --> You can select the timeframes for which you want to receive an alert if you set and alert for the FU Candle indicator. If you set an alert for the FU Candle Indicator it will send an alert for every FU candle on every selected timeframe.
TF1-TF8 --> This setting is to enable or disable alerts for timeframe 1 - timeframe 8. By default all alerts are disabled, I recommend only enabling the ones that you actually use.
Recommended use:
A bullish FU candle doesn't necessarily mean it's a long and vice versa a bearish FU candle doesn't necessarily mean it's a short. In fact, most FU candles are traps. Often times you'll see a bullish FU candle starting a bearish reversal.
Whenever you see an FU Candle check the following:
Did the FU candle take relevant liquidity?
Is the FU Candle in line with the overall bias or does it go against the bias?
Where did the FU react? Example: A bearish FU candle that reacts in a bullish FVG is a perfect long entry and vice versa.
A bullish FU candle that takes out a relevant swing high can often be a fake-out and price can immediately reverse as the next candle opens.
Timing is also very important. Usually the valid FU candles happen after a strong move to one direction during high volume times and right before or right after a new candle opens on a higher timeframe.
Examples of valid setups:
Nr. 1) Mitigation Setup
Overall bullish on the higher time frame, liquidity grab to the downside, shift in momentum, strong move to the upside left a FVG. later price comes back into the FVG and forms a FU candle --> perfect long trade targeting the opposite side of the range.
Entry either at close of the FU or at the 50% retracement.
Nr. 2) Trap Setup
Clear bullish trend respecting the trend line, bearish FU candle forms but it didn't take any relevant liquidity to the upside. Only internal range liquidity. Perfect long entry using a buy limit below the lower wick of the FU candle with the SL below the nearest low.
Nr. 3) Liquidity Grab Setup
Bearish trend, price comes up aggressively and takes out a high and forms an FU Candle. Market entry short at close of the FU candle or at the 50% retracement of the FU candle or by putting a limit order right above the wick of the candle that follows the FU candle, targeting the opposite side of the range.
Nr. 4) Fake Breakout Setup
Price takes out a significant HTF low, then makes at least 2 BOS on the LTF and forms an Order Block or leaves an FVG. Price forms a bearish U that fails to close below the FVG or Orderblock.
Market entry long at the close of the bearish FU targeting the opposite side of the range. Vice versa for shorts. In simple terms: Bullish FUs at the top of the range and bearish FUs at the bottom of the range are usually always traps.
Sometimes price takes out the high/low of a trap FU before reversing aggressively so you can also have a limit order below the low of the bearish FU or above the high of a bullish FU in this case. But you risk missing the trade.
Entry Methods:
Entry Type 1) Market Entry at the close of the FU candle. --> Never miss a trade, not the best RRR.
Entry Type 2 Limit Entry at the 50% retracement of the body of the FU candle. --> Miss some of the trades but better RRR.
Entry Type 3 Limit order below the wick of the candle that follows the FU candle. --> Miss quite a lot of trades but by far best RRR.
Why this is a closed source script:
The source code of this script is not open because I have spent several years of my life developing it and I use it in all my trading bots.
Also I'm open for feedback and will modify/ update the script for free if I get input that can make it better.
For questions, please reach out via DM or check out my youtube channel. I have several videos explaining in detail how I use these candles, which are valid and which aren't.
PERFECT PIVOT RANGE DR ABIRAM SIVPRASAD (PPR)PERFECT PIVOT RANGE (PPR) by Dr. Abhiram Sivprasad
The Perfect Pivot Range (PPR) indicator is designed to provide traders with a comprehensive view of key support and resistance levels based on pivot points across different timeframes. This versatile tool allows users to visualize daily, weekly, and monthly pivots along with high and low levels from previous periods, helping traders identify potential areas of price reversals or breakouts.
Features:
Multi-Timeframe Pivots:
Daily, weekly, and monthly pivot levels (Pivot Point, Support 1 & 2, Resistance 1 & 2).
Helps traders understand price levels across various timeframes, from short-term (daily) to long-term (monthly).
Previous High-Low Levels:
Displays the previous week, month, and day high-low levels to highlight key zones of historical support and resistance.
Traders can easily see areas of price action from prior periods, giving context for future price movements.
Customizable Options:
Users can choose which pivot levels and high-lows to display, allowing for flexibility based on trading preferences.
Visual settings can be toggled on and off to suit different trading strategies and timeframes.
Real-Time Data:
All pivot points and levels are dynamically calculated based on real-time price data, ensuring accurate and up-to-date information for decision-making.
How to Use:
Pivot Points: Use daily, weekly, or monthly pivot points to find potential support or resistance levels. Prices above the pivot suggest bullish sentiment, while prices below indicate bearishness.
Previous High-Low: The high-low levels from previous days, weeks, or months can serve as critical zones where price may reverse or break through, indicating potential trade entries or exits.
Confluence: When pivot points or high-low levels overlap across multiple timeframes, they become even stronger levels of support or resistance.
This indicator is suitable for all types of traders (scalpers, swing traders, and long-term investors) looking to enhance their technical analysis and make more informed trading decisions.
Here are three detailed trading strategies for using the Perfect Pivot Range (PPR) indicator for options, stocks, and commodities:
1. Options Buying Strategy with PPR Indicator
Strategy: Buying Call and Put Options Based on Pivot Breakouts
Objective: To capitalize on sharp price movements when key pivot levels are breached, leading to high returns with limited risk in options trading.
Timeframe: 15-minute to 1-hour chart for intraday option trading.
Steps:
Identify the Key Levels:
Use weekly pivots for intraday trading, as they provide more significant levels for options.
Enable the "Previous Week High-Low" to gauge support and resistance from the previous week.
Call Option Setup (Bullish Breakout):
Condition: If the price breaks above the weekly pivot point (PP) with high momentum (indicated by a strong bullish candle), it signifies potential bullishness.
Action: Buy Call Options at the breakout of the weekly pivot.
Confirmation: Check if the price is sustaining above the pivot with a minimum of 1-2 candles (depending on timeframe) and the first resistance (R1) isn’t too far away.
Target: The first resistance (R1) or previous week’s high can be your target for exiting the trade.
Stop-Loss: Set a stop-loss just below the pivot point (PP) to limit risk.
Put Option Setup (Bearish Breakdown):
Condition: If the price breaks below the weekly pivot (PP) with strong bearish momentum, it’s a signal to expect a downward move.
Action: Buy Put Options on a breakdown below the weekly pivot.
Confirmation: Ensure that the price is closing below the pivot, and check for declining volumes or bearish candles.
Target: The first support (S1) or the previous week’s low.
Stop-Loss: Place the stop-loss just above the pivot point (PP).
Example:
Let’s say the weekly pivot point (PP) is at 1500, the price breaks above and sustains at 1510. You buy a Call Option with a strike price near 1500, and the target will be the first resistance (R1) at 1530.
2. Stock Trading Strategy with PPR Indicator
Strategy: Swing Trading Using Pivot Points and Previous High-Low Levels
Objective: To capture mid-term stock price movements using pivot points and historical high-low levels for better trade entries and exits.
Timeframe: 1-day or 4-hour chart for swing trading.
Steps:
Identify the Trend:
Start by determining the overall trend of the stock using the weekly pivots. If the price is consistently above the pivot point (PP), the trend is bullish; if below, the trend is bearish.
Buy Setup (Bullish Trend Reversal):
Condition: When the stock bounces off the weekly pivot point (PP) or previous week’s low, it signals a bullish reversal.
Action: Enter a long position near the pivot or previous week’s low.
Confirmation: Look for a bullish candle pattern or increasing volumes.
Target: Set your first target at the first resistance (R1) or the previous week’s high.
Stop-Loss: Place your stop-loss just below the previous week’s low or support (S1).
Sell Setup (Bearish Trend Reversal):
Condition: When the price hits the weekly resistance (R1) or previous week’s high and starts to reverse downwards, it’s an opportunity to short-sell the stock.
Action: Enter a short position near the resistance.
Confirmation: Watch for bearish candle patterns or decreasing volume at the resistance.
Target: Your first target would be the weekly pivot point (PP), with the second target as the previous week’s low.
Stop-Loss: Set a stop-loss just above the resistance (R1).
Use Previous High-Low Levels:
The previous week’s high and low are key levels where price reversals often occur, so use them as reference points for potential entry and exit.
Example:
Stock XYZ is trading at 200. The previous week’s low is 195, and it bounces off that level. You enter a long position with a target of 210 (previous week’s high) and place a stop-loss at 193.
3. Commodity Trading Strategy with PPR Indicator
Strategy: Trend Continuation and Reversal in Commodities
Objective: To capitalize on the strong trends in commodities by using pivot points as key support and resistance levels for trend continuation and reversal.
Timeframe: 1-hour to 4-hour charts for commodities like Gold, Crude Oil, Silver, etc.
Steps:
Identify the Trend:
Use monthly pivots for long-term commodities trading since commodities often follow macroeconomic trends.
The monthly pivot point (PP) will give an idea of the long-term trend direction.
Trend Continuation Setup (Bullish Commodity):
Condition: If the price is consistently trading above the monthly pivot and pulling back towards the pivot without breaking below it, it indicates a bullish continuation.
Action: Enter a long position when the price tests the monthly pivot (PP) and starts moving up again.
Confirmation: Look for a strong bullish candle or an increase in volume to confirm the continuation.
Target: The first resistance (R1) or previous month’s high.
Stop-Loss: Place the stop-loss below the monthly pivot (PP).
Trend Reversal Setup (Bearish Commodity):
Condition: When the price reverses from the monthly resistance (R1) or previous month’s high, it’s a signal for a bearish reversal.
Action: Enter a short position at the resistance level.
Confirmation: Watch for bearish candle patterns or decreasing volumes at the resistance.
Target: Set your first target as the monthly pivot (PP) or the first support (S1).
Stop-Loss: Stop-loss should be placed just above the resistance level.
Using Previous High-Low for Swing Trades:
The previous month’s high and low are important in commodities. They often act as barriers to price movement, so traders should look for breakouts or reversals near these levels.
Example:
Gold is trading at $1800, with a monthly pivot at $1780 and the previous month’s high at $1830. If the price pulls back to $1780 and starts moving up again, you enter a long trade with a target of $1830, placing your stop-loss below $1770.
Key Points Across All Strategies:
Multiple Timeframes: Always use a combination of timeframes for confirmation. For example, a daily chart may show a bullish setup, but the weekly pivot levels can provide a larger trend context.
Volume: Volume is key in confirming the strength of price movement. Always confirm breakouts or reversals with rising or declining volume.
Risk Management: Set tight stop-loss levels just below support or above resistance to minimize risk and lock in profits at pivot points.
Each of these strategies leverages the powerful pivot and high-low levels provided by the PPR indicator to give traders clear entry, exit, and risk management points across different markets
Alligator + Fractals + Divergent & Squat Bars + Signal AlertsThe indicator includes Williams Alligator, Williams Fractals, Divergent Bars, Market Facilitation Index, Highest and Lowest Bars, maximum and minimum peak of Awesome Oscillator, and signal alerts based on Bill Williams' Profitunity strategy.
MFI and Awesome Oscillator
According to the Market Facilitation Index Oscillator, the Squat bar is colored blue, all other bars are colored according to the Awesome Oscillator color, except for the Fake bars, colored with a lighter AO color. In the indicator settings, you can enable the display of "Green" bars (in the "Green Bars > Show" field). In the indicator style settings, you can disable changing the color of bars in accordance with the AO color (in the "AO bars" field), including changing the color for Fake bars (in the "Fake AO bars" field).
MFI is calculated using the formula: (high - low) / volume.
A Squat bar means that, compared to the previous bar, its MFI has decreased and at the same time its volume has increased, i.e. MFI < previous bar and volume > previous bar. A sign of a possible price reversal, so this is a particularly important signal.
A Fake bar is the opposite of a Squat bar and means that, compared to the previous bar, its MFI has increased and at the same time its volume has decreased, i.e. MFI > previous bar and volume < previous bar.
A "Green" bar means that, compared to the previous bar, its MFI has increased and at the same time its volume has increased, i.e. MFI > previous bar and volume > previous bar. A sign of trend continuation. But a more significant trend confirmation or warning of a possible reversal is the Awesome Oscillator, which measures market momentum by calculating the difference between the 5 Period and 34 Period Simple Moving Averages (SMA 5 - SMA 34) based on the midpoints of the bars (hl2). Therefore, by default, the "Green" bars and their opposite "Fade" bars are colored according to the color of the Awesome Oscillator.
According to Bill Williams' Profitunity strategy, using the Awesome Oscillator, the third Elliott wave is determined by the maximum peak of AO in the range from 100 to 140 bars. The presence of divergence between the maximum AO peak and the subsequent lower AO peak in this interval also warns of a possible correction, especially if the AO crosses the zero line between these AO peaks. Therefore, the chart additionally displays the prices of the highest and lowest bars, as well as the maximum or minimum peak of AO in the interval of 140 bars from the last bar. In the indicator settings, you can hide labels, lines, change the number of bars and any parameters for the AO indicator - method (SMA, Smoothed SMA, EMA and others), length, source (open, high, low, close, hl2 and others).
Bullish Divergent bar
🟢 A buy signal (Long) is a Bullish Divergent bar with a green circle displayed above it if such a bar simultaneously meets all of the following conditions:
The high of the bar is below all lines of the Alligator indicator.
The closing price of the bar is above its middle, i.e. close > (high + low) / 2.
The low of the bar is below the low of 2 previous bars or below the low of one previous bar, and the low of the second previous bar is a lower fractal (▼). By default, Divergent bars are not displayed, the low of which is lower than the low of only one previous bar and the low of the 2nd previous bar is not a lower fractal (▼), but you can enable the display of any Divergent bars in the indicator settings (by setting the value "no" in the " field Divergent Bars > Filtration").
The following conditions strengthen the Bullish Divergent bar signal:
The opening price of the bar, as well as the closing price, is higher than its middle, i.e. Open > (high + low) / 2.
The high of the bar is below all lines of the open Alligator indicator, i.e. the green line (Lips) is below the red line (Teeth) and the red line is below the blue line (Jaw). In this case, the color of the circle above the Bullish Divergent bar is dark green.
Squat Divergent bar.
The bar following the Bullish Divergent bar corresponds to the green color of the Awesome Oscillator.
Divergence on Awesome Oscillator.
Formation of the lower fractal (▼), in which the low of the Divergent bar is the peak of the fractal.
Bearish Divergent bar
🔴 A signal to sell (Short) is a Bearish Divergent bar under which a red circle is displayed if such a bar simultaneously meets all the following conditions:
The low of the bar is above all lines of the Alligator indicator.
The closing price of the bar is below its middle, i.e. close < (high + low) / 2.
The high of the bar is higher than the high of 2 previous bars or higher than the high of one previous bar, and the high of the second previous bar is an upper fractal (▲). By default, Divergent bars are not displayed, the high of which is higher than the high of only one previous bar and the high of the 2nd previous bar is not an upper fractal (▲), but you can enable the display of any Divergent bars in the indicator settings (by setting the value "no" in the " field Divergent Bars > Filtration").
The following conditions strengthen the Bearish Divergent bar signal:
The opening price of the bar, as well as the closing price, is below its middle, i.e. open < (high + low) / 2.
The low of the bar is above all lines of the open Alligator indicator, i.e. the green line (Lips) is above the red line (Teeth) and the red line is above the blue line (Jaw). In this case, the color of the circle under the Bearish Divergent bar is dark red.
Squat Divergent bar.
The bar following the Bearish Divergent bar corresponds to the red color of the Awesome Oscillator.
Divergence on Awesome Oscillator.
Formation of the upper fractal (▲), in which the high of the Divergent bar is the peak of the fractal.
Alligator lines crossing
Bars crossing the green line (Lips) of the open Alligator indicator is the first warning of a possible correction (price rollback) if one of the following conditions is met:
If the bar closed below the Lips line, which is above the Teeth line, and the Teeth line is above the Jaw line, while the closing price of the previous bar is above the Lips line.
If the bar closed above the Lips line, which is below the Teeth line, and the Teeth line is below the Jaw line, while the closing price of the previous bar is below the Lips line.
The intersection of all open Alligator lines by bars is a sign of a deep correction and a warning of a possible trend change.
Frequent intersection of Alligator lines with each other is a sign of a sideways trend (flat).
Signal Alerts
To receive notifications about signals when creating an alert, you must select the condition "Any alert() function is call", in which case notifications will arrive in the following format:
D — timeframe, for example: D, 4H, 15m.
🟢 BDB⎾ - a signal for a Bullish Divergent bar to buy (Long), triggers once after the bar closes and includes additional signals:
/// — if Alligator is open.
⏉ — if the opening price of the bar, as well as the closing price, is above its middle.
+ Squat 🔷 - Squat bar or + Green ↑ - "Green" bar or + Fake ↓ - Fake bar.
+ AO 🟩 - if after the Divergent bar closes, the oscillator color change for the next bar corresponds the green color of the Awesome Oscillator. ┴/┬ — AO above/below the zero line. ∇ — if there is divergence on AO in the interval of 140 bars from the last bar.
🔴 BDB⎿ - a signal for a Bearish Divergent bar to sell (Short), triggers once after the bar closes and includes additional signals:
/// — if Alligator is open.
⏊ — if the opening price of the bar, as well as the closing price, is below its middle.
+ Squat 🔷 - Squat bar or + Green ↑ - "Green" bar or + Fake ↓ - Fake bar.
+ AO 🟥 - if after the Divergent bar closes, the oscillator color change for the next bar corresponds to the red color of the Awesome Oscillator. ┴/┬ — AO above/below the zero line. ∇ — if there is divergence on AO in the interval of 140 bars from the last bar.
Alert for bars crossing the green line (Lips) of the open Alligator indicator (can be disabled in the indicator settings in the "Alligator > Enable crossing lips alerts" field):
🔴 Crossing Lips ↓ - if the bar closed below the Lips line, which is above than the other lines, while the closing price of the previous bar is above the Lips line.
🟢 Crossing Lips ↑ - if the bar closed above the Lips line, which is below the other lines, while the closing price of the previous bar is below the Lips line.
The fractal signal is triggered after the second bar closes, completing the formation of the fractal, if alerts about fractals are enabled in the indicator settings (the "Fractals > Enable alerts" field):
🟢 Fractal ▲ - upper (Bearish) fractal.
🔴 Fractal ▼ — lower (Bullish) fractal.
⚪️ Fractal ▲/▼ - both upper and lower fractal.
↳ (H=high - L=low) = difference.
If you redirect notifications to a webhook URL, for example, to a Telegram bot, then you need to set the notification template for the webhook in the indicator settings in the "Webhook > Message" field (contains a tooltip with an example), in which you just need to specify the text {{message}}, which will be automatically replaced with the alert text with a ticker and a link to TradingView.
‼️ A signal is not a call to action, but only a reason to analyze the chart to make a decision based on the rules of your strategy.
***
Индикатор включает в себя Williams Alligator, Williams Fractals, Дивергентные бары, Market Facilitation Index, самый высокий и самый низкий бары, максимальный и минимальный пик Awesome Oscillator, а также оповещения о сигналах на основе стратегии Profitunity Билла Вильямса.
MFI и Awesome Oscillator
В соответствии с осциллятором Market Facilitation Index Приседающий бар окрашен в синий цвет, все остальные бары окрашены в соответствии с цветом Awesome Oscillator, кроме Фальшивых баров, которые окрашены более светлым цветом AO. В настройках индикатора вы можете включить отображение "Зеленых" баров (в поле "Green Bars > Show"). В настройках стиля индикатора вы можете выключить изменение цвета баров в соответствии с цветом AO (в поле "AO bars"), в том числе изменить цвет для Фальшивых баров (в поле "Fake AO bars").
MFI рассчитывается по формуле: (high - low) / volume.
Приседающий бар означает, что по сравнению с предыдущим баром его MFI снизился и в тоже время вырос его объем, т.е. MFI < предыдущего бара и объем > предыдущего бара. Признак возможного разворота цены, поэтому это особенно важный сигнал.
Фальшивый бар является противоположностью Приседающему бару и означает, что по сравнению с предыдущим баром его MFI увеличился и в тоже время снизился его объем, т.е. MFI > предыдущего бара и объем < предыдущего бара.
"Зеленый" бар означает, что по сравнению с предыдущим баром его MFI увеличился и в тоже время вырос его объем, т.е. MFI > предыдущего бара и объем > предыдущего бара. Признак продолжения тренда. Но более значимым подтверждением тренда или предупреждением о возможном развороте является Awesome Oscillator, который измеряет движущую силу рынка путем вычисления разницы между 5 Периодной и 34 Периодной Простыми Скользящими Средними (SMA 5 - SMA 34) по средним точкам баров (hl2). Поэтому по умолчанию "Зеленые" бары и противоположные им "Увядающие" бары окрашены в соответствии с цветом Awesome Oscillator.
По стратегии Profitunity Билла Вильямса с помощью осциллятора Awesome Oscillator определяется третья волна Эллиота по максимальному пику AO в интервале от 100 до 140 баров. Наличие дивергенции между максимальным пиком AO и следующим за ним более низким пиком AO в этом интервале также предупреждает о возможной коррекции, особенно если AO переходит через нулевую линию между этими пиками AO. Поэтому на графике дополнительно отображаются цены самого высокого и самого низкого баров, а также максимальный или минимальный пик АО в интервале 140 баров от последнего бара. В настройках индикатора вы можете скрыть метки, линии, изменить количество баров и любые параметры для индикатора AO – метод (SMA, Smoothed SMA, EMA и другие), длину, источник (open, high, low, close, hl2 и другие).
Бычий Дивергентный бар
🟢 Сигналом на покупку (Long) является Бычий Дивергентный бар над которым отображается зеленый круг, если такой бар соответствует одновременно всем следующим условиям:
Максимум бара ниже всех линий индикатора Alligator.
Цена закрытия бара выше его середины, т.е. close > (high + low) / 2.
Минимум бара ниже минимума 2-х предыдущих баров или ниже минимума одного предыдущего бара, а минимум второго предыдущего бара является нижним фракталом (▼). По умолчанию не отображаются Дивергентные бары, минимум которых ниже минимума только одного предыдущего бара и минимум 2-го предыдущего бара не является нижним фракталом (▼), но вы можете включить отображение любых Дивергентных баров в настройках индикатора (установив значение "no" в поле "Divergent Bars > Filtration").
Усилением сигнала Бычьего Дивергентного бара являются следующие условия:
Цена открытия бара, как и цена закрытия, выше его середины, т.е. Open > (high + low) / 2.
Максимум бара ниже всех линий открытого индикатора Alligator, т.е. зеленая линия (Lips) ниже красной линии (Teeth) и красная линия ниже синей линии (Jaw). В этом случае цвет круга над Бычьим Дивергентным баром окрашен в темно-зеленый цвет.
Приседающий Дивергентный бар.
Бар, следующий за Бычьим Дивергентным баром, соответствует зеленому цвету Awesome Oscillator.
Дивергенция на Awesome Oscillator.
Образование нижнего фрактала (▼), у которого минимум Дивергентного бара является пиком фрактала.
Медвежий Дивергентный бар
🔴 Сигналом на продажу (Short) является Медвежий Дивергентный бар под которым отображается красный круг, если такой бар соответствует одновременно всем следующим условиям:
Минимум бара выше всех линий индикатора Alligator.
Цена закрытия бара ниже его середины, т.е. close < (high + low) / 2.
Максимум бара выше маскимума 2-х предыдущих баров или выше максимума одного предыдущего бара, а максимум второго предыдущего бара является верхним фракталом (▲). По умолчанию не отображаются Дивергентные бары, максимум которых выше максимума только одного предыдущего бара и максимум 2-го предыдущего бара не является верхним фракталом (▲), но вы можете включить отображение любых Дивергентных баров в настройках индикатора (установив значение "no" в поле "Divergent Bars > Filtration").
Усилением сигнала Медвежьего Дивергентного бара являются следующие условия:
Цена открытия бара, как и цена закрытия, ниже его середины, т.е. open < (high + low) / 2.
Минимум бара выше всех линий открытого индикатора Alligator, т.е. зеленая линия (Lips) выше красной линии (Teeth) и красная линия выше синей линии (Jaw). В этом случае цвет круга под Медвежьим Дивергентным Баром окрашен в темно-красный цвет.
Приседающий Дивергентный бар.
Бар, следующий за Медвежьим Дивергентным баром, соответствует красному цвету Awesome Oscillator.
Дивергенция на Awesome Oscillator.
Образование верхнего фрактала (▲), у которого максимум Дивергентного бара является пиком фрактала.
Пересечение линий Alligator
Пересечение барами зеленой линии (Lips) открытого индикатора Alligator является первым предупреждением о возможной коррекции (откате цены) при выполнении одного из следующих условий:
Если бар закрылся ниже линии Lips, которая выше линии Teeth, а линия Teeth выше линии Jaw, при этом цена закрытия предыдущего бара находится выше линии Lips.
Если бар закрылся выше линии Lips, которая ниже линии Teeth, а линия Teeth ниже линии Jaw, при этом цена закрытия предыдущего бара находится ниже линии Lips.
Пересечение барами всех линий открытого Alligator является признаком глубокой коррекции и предупреждением о возможной смене тренда.
Частое пересечение линий Alligator между собой является признаком бокового тренда (флэт).
Оповещения о сигналах
Для получения уведомлений о сигналах при создании оповещения необходимо выбрать условие "При любом вызове функции alert()", в таком случае уведомления будут приходить в следующем формате:
D — таймфрейм, например: D, 4H, 15m.
🟢 BDB⎾ — сигнал Бычьего Дивергентного бара на покупку (Long), срабатывает один раз после закрытия бара и включает дополнительные сигналы:
/// — если Alligator открыт.
⏉ — если цена открытия бара, как и цена закрытия, выше его середины.
+ Squat 🔷 — Приседающий бар или + Green ↑ — "Зеленый" бар или + Fake ↓ — Фальшивый бар.
+ AO 🟩 — если после закрытия Дивергентного бара, изменение цвета осциллятора для следующего бара соответствует зеленому цвету Awesome Oscillator. ┴/┬ — AO выше/ниже нулевой линии. ∇ — если есть дивергенция на AO в интервале 140 баров от последнего бара.
🔴 BDB⎿ — сигнал Медвежьего Дивергентного бара на продажу (Short), срабатывает один раз после закрытия бара и включает дополнительные сигналы:
/// — если Alligator открыт.
⏊ — если цена открытия бара, как и цена закрытия, ниже его середины.
+ Squat 🔷 — Приседающий бар или + Green ↑ — "Зеленый" бар или + Fake ↓ — Фальшивый бар.
+ AO 🟥 — если после закрытия Дивергентного бара, изменение цвета осциллятора для следующего бара соответствует красному цвету Awesome Oscillator. ┴/┬ — AO выше/ниже нулевой линии. ∇ — если есть дивергенция на AO в интервале 140 баров от последнего бара.
Сигнал пересечения барами зеленой линии (Lips) открытого индикатора Alligator (можно отключить в настройках индикатора в поле "Alligator > Enable crossing lips alerts"):
🔴 Crossing Lips ↓ — если бар закрылся ниже линии Lips, которая выше остальных линий, при этом цена закрытия предыдущего бара находится выше линии Lips.
🟢 Crossing Lips ↑ — если бар закрылся выше линии Lips, которая ниже остальных линий, при этом цена закрытия предыдущего бара находится ниже линии Lips.
Сигнал фрактала срабатывает после закрытия второго бара, завершающего формирование фрактала, если оповещения о фракталах включены в настройках индикатора (поле "Fractals > Enable alerts"):
🟢 Fractal ▲ — верхний (Медвежий) фрактал.
🔴 Fractal ▼ — нижний (Бычий) фрактал.
⚪️ Fractal ▲/▼ — одновременно верхний и нижний фрактал.
↳ (H=high - L=low) = разница.
Если вы перенаправляете оповещения на URL вебхука, например, в бота Telegram, то вам необходимо установить шаблон оповещения для вебхука в настройках индикатора в поле "Webhook > Message" (содержит подсказку с примером), в котором в качестве текста сообщения достаточно указать текст {{message}}, который будет автоматически заменен на текст оповещения с тикером и ссылкой на TradingView.
‼️ Сигнал — это не призыв к действию, а лишь повод проанализировать график для принятия решения на основе правил вашей стратегии.
Price Action Toolkit | Flux Charts💎 GENERAL OVERVIEW
Introducing our new Price Action Toolkit indicator! Price Action Toolkit integrates key level strategy , traditional supply-demand analysis , and market structures to help traders in their decisions. Now with features that are available to use in multiple timeframes!
Features of the new Price Action Toolkit indicator :
Volumized Fair Value Gaps (FVGs)
Volumized Order & Breaker Blocks
Identification of Market Structures
Equal Highs & Lows
Buyside & Sellside Liquidity
Premium & Discount Zones
MTF Highs & Lows (Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Pre-Market)
Customizable Settings
📌 HOW DOES IT WORK ?
We believe that the analytical elements that are within this indicator work best when they co-exist with each other on the chart. Trading often requires taking multiple elements into consideration for better accuracy on market analysis. Thus, we combined some of the useful strategies in one indicator for ease of use.
1. Volumized Fair Value Gaps
Fair value gaps often occur when there is an imbalance in the market, and can be spotted with a specific formation on the chart.
The volume when the FVG occurs plays an important role when determining the strength of it, so we've placed two bars on the FVG zone, indicating the high & low volumes of the FVG. The high volume is the total volume of the last two bars on a bullish FVG, while the low volume is - of the FVG. For a bearish FVG, the total volume of the last two bars is the low volume. The indicator can also detect FVGs that exist in other timeframes than the current chart.
2. Volumized Order Blocks
Order blocks occur when there is a high amount of market orders exist on a price range. It is possible to find order blocks using specific formations on the chart.
The high & low volume of order blocks should be taken into consideration while determining their strengths. The determination of the high & low volume of order blocks are similar to FVGs, in a bullish order block, the high volume is the last 2 bars' total volume, while the low volume is the oldest bar's volume. In a bearish order block scenerio, the low volume becomes the last 2 bars' total volume.
3. Volumized Breaker Blocks
Breaker blocks form when an order block fails, or "breaks". It is often associated with market going in the opposite direction of the broken order block, and they can be spotted by following order blocks and finding the point they get broken, ie. price goes below a bullish order block.
The volume of a breaker block is simply the total volume of the bar that the original order block is broken. Often the higher the breaking bar's volume, the stronger the breaker block is.
4. Market Structures
Sometimes specific market structures form and break as the market fills buy & sell orders. Formed Change of Character (CHoCH) and Break of Structure (BOS) often mean that market will change direction, and they can be spotted by inspecting low & high pivot points of the chart.
5. Equal Highs & Lows
Equal Highs & Lows occur when there is a significant amount of difference between a candle's close price and it's high / low value, and it happens again in a specific range. EQH and EQL usually mean there is a resistance that blocks the price from going further up / down.
6. Buyside & Sellside Liquidity
Buyside & Sellside Liquidity zones are where most traders place their take-profits and stop-losses in their long / short positions. They are spotted by using high & low pivot points on the chart.
7. Premium & Discount Zones
The premium zone is a zone that is over the fair value of the asset's price, and the discount zone is the opposite. They are formed by the latest high & low pivot points.
8. MTF Highs / Lows
MTF Highs / Lows are actually pretty self-explanatory, you can enable / disable Daily, Weekly, Monthly & Pre-Market Highs and Lows.
🚩UNIQUENESS
Our new indicator offers a comprehensive toolkit for traders, combining multiple analytical elements with customizable settings to aid in decision-making across different market conditions and timeframes. The volumetric information of both FVGs and Order & Breaker Blocks will be present in your chart to serve you greater detail about them. The indicator also efficiently identifies market structures, liquidity zones and premium & discount zones to give you an insight about the current state of the market. And finally with the use of multiple timeframes , you can easily take a look at the bigger picture. We recommend reading the "How Does It Work" section of the descripton to get a better understanding about how this indicator is unique to others.
⚙️SETTINGS
1. General Configuration
Show Historic Zones -> This will show historic Fair Value Gaps, Order & Breaker Blocks and Sellside & Buyside liquidities which are expired.
2. Fair Value Gaps
Enabled -> Enables / Disables Fair Value Gaps
Volumetric Info -> The volumetric information of the FVG Zones will be rendered if activated.
Zone Invalidation -> Select between Wick & Close price for FVG Zone Invalidation.
Zone Filtering -> With "Average Range" selected, algorithm will find FVG zones in comparison with average range of last bars in the chart. With the "Volume Threshold" option, you may select a Volume Threshold % to spot FVGs with a larger total volume than average.
FVG Detection -> With the "Same Type" option, all 3 bars that formed the FVG should be the same type. (Bullish / Bearish). If the "All" option is selected, bar types may vary between Bullish / Bearish.
Detection Sensitivity -> You may select between Low, Normal or High FVG detection sensitivity. This will essentially determine the size of the spotted FVGs, with lower sensitivies resulting in spotting bigger FVGs, and higher sensitivies resulting in spotting all sizes of FVGs.
3. Order Blocks
Enabled -> Enables / Disables Order Blocks
Volumetric Info -> The volumetric information of the Order Blocks will be rendered if activated.
Zone Invalidation -> Select between Wick & Close price for Order Block Invalidation.
Swing Length -> Swing length is used when finding order block formations. Smaller values will result in finding smaller order blocks.
4. Breaker Blocks
Enabled -> Enables / Disables Breaker Blocks
Volumetric Info -> The volumetric information of the Breaker Blocks will be rendered if activated.
Zone Invalidation -> Select between Wick & Close price for Breaker Block Invalidation.
5. Timeframes
You can set and enable / disable up to 3 timeframes. Note that only higher timeframes than the current chart will work.
6. Market Structures
Break Of Structure ( BOS ) -> If the current structure of the market is broken in a bullish or bearish direction, it will be displayed.
Change Of Character ( CHoCH ) -> If the market shifts into another direction, it will be displayed.
Change Of Character+ ( CHoCH+ ) -> This will display stronger Change Of Characters if enabled.
7. Equal Highs & Lows
EQH -> Enables / Disables Equal Highs.
EQL -> Enables / Disables Equal Lows.
ATR Multiplier (0.1 - 1.0) -> Determines the maximum difference between highs / lows to be considered as equal. Lower values will result in more accurate results.
8. Buyside & Sellside Liquidity
Zone Width -> Determines the width of the liquidity zones, 1 = 0.025%, 2 = 0.05%, 3 = 0.1%.
9. Premium & Discount Zones
Enabled -> Enables / Disables Premium & Discount Zones.
10. MTF Highs / Lows
You can enable / disable Daily, Weekly, Monthly & Pre-Market Highs and Lows using this setting. You can also switch their line shapes between solid, dashed and dotted.
YD_Divergence_RSI+CMFThe ‘YD_Divergence_RSI+CMF’ indicator can find divergence using RSI (Relative Strength Index) and CMF (Chaikin Money Flow) indicators.
📌 Key functions
1. Search pivot high and pivot low points in a certain length of price.
2. Connect pivot high to pivot high , pivot low to pivot low , forming two standards for divergence in result.
The marker then plots only the higher high, lower low lines.
(higher low and lower high in prices are referred to hidden divergence, which are not considered in this indicator)
3. Compare the two standards with RSI and CMF indicators, send an alert if there is a divergence. As a result, the indicator will find four combination of divergence.
A. Higher high price / Lower RSI (Bearish RSI Divergence)
B. Lower low price / Higher RSI (Bullish RSI Divergence)
C. Higher high price / Lower CMF (Bearish CMF Divergence)
D. Lower low price / Higher CMF (Bullish CMF Divergence)
📌 Details
Developing the indicators, we put a lot of effort in making a customizable and user-friendly interface.
#1. Pivot Setting
Users can set the length to find the pivot high / pivot low in ‘Pivot Settings – Pivot Length.’
Increased pivot Length takes more candles to interpret the chart but reduce false signals since the it uses only the most certain pivot high / pivot low values. Obviously, decreased pivot length will act the opposite.
Users can choose whether to use ‘High/Low’ or ‘Close’ in ‘Pivot Reference’ to set the swing point of prices.
Users can also choose whether to display the pivot high / pivot low marker on the chart.
#2 RSI & CMF Settings
Users can adjust the length of RSI & CMF separately. (The default values are set to 14 and 20 each.)
#3 Label Setting
Users can adjust the text displayed on the chart label. (The default values is set to ‘Bullish / Bearish’, ‘RSI/CMF’, ‘Divergence’.)
Users can reduce the length of text label or simply turn the label off. Just click the ‘Bull/Bear’ or ‘None’ button. ‘Divergence’ works the same.
Users can decide whether to display the ‘Divergence Line and Label’, set custom settings for the label and line. (color, thickness, style, etc)
📌 Alert
Alert are provided as a combination of the chart's symbol and the set label text. For example,
‘BINANCE:BTCUSDT.P, Bullish RSI Divergence’
====================================================
"YD_Divergence_RSI+CMF" 지표 는 RSI와 CMF 지표를 이용해서 Divergence 를 찾아낼 수 있습니다.
📌 주요 기능
1. 정해진 가격 움직임 안에서 pivot high와 pivot low 포인트 를 찾아냅니다.
2. Pivot high로만 이어진 라인과, Pivot low로만 이어진 두 라인을 작도한 뒤 divergence의 기준으로 삼습니다.
이 지표에서는 normal divergence만 사용하기 때문에 차트에 higher high와 lower low만 표기 합니다.
(higher low와 lower high는 hidden divergence로 정의되며, 이 지표에서는 다루지 않습니다.
3. 두 기준선과 RSI, CMF 지표를 각각 비교하고, 결과적으로 4개의 조합을 구할 수 있습니다.
A. Higher high price / Lower RSI (Bearish RSI Divergence)
B. Lower low price / Higher RSI (Bullish RSI Divergence)
C. Higher high price / Lower CMF (Bearish CMF Divergence)
D. Lower low price / Higher CMF (Bullish CMF Divergence)
📌 세부 사항
지표를 개발하며 사용자들이 원하는 방향으로 지표를 설정할 수 있게 작업에 많은 공을 들였습니다. 굉장히 다양한 옵션을 선택할 수 있으며, 원하는 방식으로 지표를 사용할 수 있습니다.
#1 Pivot Setting
Pivot setting에서는 Pivot Length를 변경할 수 있습니다.
Pivot Length를 늘릴 경우, 보다 확실한 Swing High와 Swing Low만을 사용하게 되므로, False signal이 줄어들 수 있습니다. 하지만 Swing High/ Low를 판정하는 데에 더 긴 시간이 걸리게 되므로, Signal이 다소 늦게 발생하는 단점이 생기게 됩니다.
Pivot Length를 줄일 경우, 반대로 Swing High/Low의 판정이 더 빨리 일어나기 때문에, Signal을 거래에 이용하기는 좋을 수 있습니다. 다만, Swing High와 Low가 훨씬 더 잦은 빈도로 발생하기 때문에 False Signal을 줄 가능성이 높아집니다.
Pivot Reference에서는 가격의 Swing Point를 설정함에 있어, High/Low(고가/저가)를 이용할 지 Close (종가)를 이용할 지 선택할 수 있습니다.
Pivot High/Low Marker를 선택할 경우 Pivot High/ Low에 Marker가 찍히게 됩니다.
#2 RSI와 CMF Setting
RSI와 CMF Setting에서는 RSI와 CMF의 길이를 각각 설정할 수 있습니다. 기본값은 14와 20으로 설정되어 있습니다.
#3 Label Setting
Label Setting에서는 Label에 표시되는 글자를 선택할 수 있습니다.
기본값은 "Bullish / Bearish", "RSI/CMF", "Divergence"로 선택되어 있으며, 너무 길다고 느껴질 경우 "Bull/Bear" 혹은 "None"을 클릭하여 길이를 줄일 수 있습니다. 마찬가지로 Divergence의 경우도 생략이 가능합니다.
하단에서는 Divergence Line과 Label을 켜고 끌 수 있으며, 선의 색깔, 굵기, 종류, 그리고 Label의 색깔, 크기, 종류를 선택할 수 있습니다. Label의 Text 색 역시 변경이 가능합니다.
📌 얼러트
얼러트는 자신이 설정한 차트의 심볼과 Label의 문구의 조합으로 제공되며 예를 들면 다음과 같습니다.
"BINANCE:BTCUSDT.P, Bullish RSI Divergence"
HL ATRUnlocking Market Volatility: The Adaptive Highest High Lowest Low Indicator
As seasoned traders know, accurately identifying and leveraging market highs and lows can significantly impact your trading performance. One innovative tool for harnessing these inflection points is the Adaptive Highest High Lowest Low Indicator. Built for intuitive trading, this indicator offers a distinctive edge in identifying key trading signals in volatile markets.
1. Understanding the Indicator
At its core, the Adaptive Highest High Lowest Low Indicator operates by pinpointing the highest highs and lowest lows within a specified lookback period. What sets it apart is its ability to adapt and respond to market volatility, enhancing its utility in various market conditions.
Key parameters include the lookback period, the number of confirmation candles, the number of previous high/low lines to display, and the Average True Range (ATR) period. Each of these inputs offers the trader flexibility to fine-tune the indicator to suit their specific trading style and the prevailing market conditions.
2. Harnessing the Power of Highs and Lows
The indicator begins by charting the highest high and the lowest low within your chosen lookback period. These highs and lows are treated as levels of resistance and support, respectively. Once identified, lines are drawn at these points, offering visual cues for strategic trading.
However, the indicator doesn't stop at identifying these levels. It waits for the price to confirm these levels, using a user-defined number of 'Confirmation Candles'. This ensures that the highs and lows are robust and significant, thereby minimizing the risk of false breakouts or breakdowns.
3. Volatility Filter: The ATR
The incorporation of the ATR into this indicator is a key distinguishing feature. The ATR measures market volatility by calculating the range of price movements over a given period. By incorporating the ATR, this indicator can adapt to changes in volatility. Specifically, the ATR acts as a filter for the buy and sell signals, helping to avoid false signals during low volatility periods and highlight meaningful breaks during high volatility periods.
4. Deciphering Buy and Sell Signals
The Adaptive Highest High Lowest Low Indicator offers clear signals for potential entry points. A 'Buy' label appears when the price breaks and closes above a previously identified high by an amount greater than the ATR. Conversely, a 'Sell' label is generated when the price breaks and closes below a previously identified low by an amount greater than the ATR.
5. Where Does This Indicator Shine?
This indicator thrives in markets characterized by high volatility. The ATR component allows the tool to adjust itself to changing market conditions, enhancing its effectiveness in volatile markets. It suits various financial markets, including stocks, forex, commodities, and cryptocurrencies, among others.
However, it's crucial to remember that this tool should not be used in isolation. It's most effective when used in conjunction with other indicators and within the context of a well-planned trading strategy. Always remember to use good risk management and adjust the settings of the indicator as per changing market conditions.
In conclusion, the Adaptive Highest High Lowest Low Indicator is a versatile and powerful tool for traders seeking to capitalize on market volatility. By combining the power of highs, lows, and the ATR, this indicator offers an innovative approach to navigating the financial markets.
Basic steps of how you could use this indicator for trading.
Identify Highs and Lows: The indicator draws lines at the highest high and lowest low of a given lookback period. Use these lines to identify key levels of support (lows) and resistance (highs).
Confirm the Trend: Wait for the price to confirm these levels. This is done by the number of 'Confirmation Candles'. For example, if 'Confirmation Candles' is set to 7, then a high or low is confirmed if the price has not broken that level in the past 7 candles.
Use the ATR as a Filter: The Average True Range (ATR) is used as a volatility filter. It can help to filter out signals that occur during low volatility periods, which might be false breakouts or breakdowns.
Entry Points: Entry points are determined by the labels "Buy" and "Sell" that appear on the chart.
Buy Signal: When a 'Buy' label appears, this indicates the price has broken above a previously identified high and closed above it by an amount greater than the ATR. This could be considered a bullish signal and a potential point to enter a long position.
Sell Signal: When a 'Sell' label appears, this indicates the price has broken below a previously identified low and closed below it by an amount greater than the ATR. This could be considered a bearish signal and a potential point to enter a short position.
Exit Points: The indicator does not provide specific exit points. These would need to be based on your risk tolerance, trading strategy, and other factors. You might consider exiting a position when the price reaches a new high/low, when a contrary signal appears, or when the price breaks a certain level of support or resistance.
Risk Management: It's important to set stop-loss levels and take-profit levels for each trade. This could be based on a fixed percentage, the ATR, or the highs and lows identified by the indicator.
Periodically Adjust Settings: Depending on market conditions, you might need to adjust the settings of the indicator, like the lookback period, confirmation candles, and ATR period.
Remember, this indicator should not be used in isolation. It's best to use it in combination with other tools and techniques, and always in the context of a well-planned trading strategy. It's also important to backtest any strategy before using it in live trading.
GKD-M Baseline Optimizer [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-M Baseline Optimizer is a Metamorphosis module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
The Baseline Optimizer enables traders to backtest over 60 moving averages using variable period inputs. It then exports the baseline with the highest cumulative win rate per candle to any baseline-enabled GKD backtest. To perform the backtesting, the trader selects an initial period input (default is 60) and a skip value that increments the initial period input up to seven times. For instance, if a skip value of 5 is chosen, the Baseline Optimizer will run the backtest for the selected moving average on periods such as 60, 65, 70, 75, and so on, up to 90. If the user selects an initial period input of 45 and a skip value of 2, the Baseline Optimizer will conduct backtests for the chosen moving average on periods like 45, 47, 49, 51, and so forth, up to 57.
The Baseline Optimizer provides a table displaying the output of the backtests for a specified date range. The table output represents the cumulative win rate for the given date range.
On the Metamorphosis side of the Baseline Optimizer, a cumulative backtest is calculated for each candle within the date range. This means that each candle may exhibit a different distribution of period inputs with the highest win rate for a particular moving average. The Baseline Optimizer identifies the period input combination with the highest win rates for long and short positions and creates a win-rate adaptive long and short moving average chart. The moving average used for shorts differs from the moving average used for longs, and the moving average for each candle may vary from any other candle. This customized baseline can then be exported to all baseline-enabled GKD backtests.
The backtest employed in the Baseline Optimizer is a Solo Confirmation Simple, allowing only one take profit and one stop loss to be set.
Lastly, the Baseline Optimizer incorporates Goldie Locks Zone filtering, which can be utilized for signal generation in advanced GKD backtests.
█ Moving Averages included in the Baseline Optimizer
Adaptive Moving Average - AMA
ADXvma - Average Directional Volatility Moving Average
Ahrens Moving Average
Alexander Moving Average - ALXMA
Deviation Scaled Moving Average - DSMA
Donchian
Double Exponential Moving Average - DEMA
Double Smoothed Exponential Moving Average - DSEMA
Double Smoothed FEMA - DSFEMA
Double Smoothed Range Weighted EMA - DSRWEMA
Double Smoothed Wilders EMA - DSWEMA
Double Weighted Moving Average - DWMA
Exponential Moving Average - EMA
Fast Exponential Moving Average - FEMA
Fractal Adaptive Moving Average - FRAMA
Generalized DEMA - GDEMA
Generalized Double DEMA - GDDEMA
Hull Moving Average (Type 1) - HMA1
Hull Moving Average (Type 2) - HMA2
Hull Moving Average (Type 3) - HMA3
Hull Moving Average (Type 4) - HMA4
IE /2 - Early T3 by Tim Tilson
Integral of Linear Regression Slope - ILRS
Kaufman Adaptive Moving Average - KAMA
Leader Exponential Moving Average
Linear Regression Value - LSMA ( Least Squares Moving Average )
Linear Weighted Moving Average - LWMA
McGinley Dynamic
McNicholl EMA
Non-Lag Moving Average
Ocean NMA Moving Average - ONMAMA
One More Moving Average - OMA
Parabolic Weighted Moving Average
Probability Density Function Moving Average - PDFMA
Quadratic Regression Moving Average - QRMA
Regularized EMA - REMA
Range Weighted EMA - RWEMA
Recursive Moving Trendline
Simple Decycler - SDEC
Simple Jurik Moving Average - SJMA
Simple Moving Average - SMA
Sine Weighted Moving Average
Smoothed LWMA - SLWMA
Smoothed Moving Average - SMMA
Smoother
Super Smoother
T3
Three-pole Ehlers Butterworth
Three-pole Ehlers Smoother
Triangular Moving Average - TMA
Triple Exponential Moving Average - TEMA
Two-pole Ehlers Butterworth
Two-pole Ehlers smoother
Variable Index Dynamic Average - VIDYA
Variable Moving Average - VMA
Volume Weighted EMA - VEMA
Volume Weighted Moving Average - VWMA
Zero-Lag DEMA - Zero Lag Exponential Moving Average
Zero-Lag Moving Average
Zero Lag TEMA - Zero Lag Triple Exponential Moving Average
Adaptive Moving Average - AMA
The Adaptive Moving Average (AMA) is a moving average that changes its sensitivity to price moves depending on the calculated volatility. It becomes more sensitive during periods when the price is moving smoothly in a certain direction and becomes less sensitive when the price is volatile.
ADXvma - Average Directional Volatility Moving Average
Linnsoft's ADXvma formula is a volatility-based moving average, with the volatility being determined by the value of the ADX indicator.
The ADXvma has the SMA in Chande's CMO replaced with an EMA , it then uses a few more layers of EMA smoothing before the "Volatility Index" is calculated.
A side effect is, those additional layers slow down the ADXvma when you compare it to Chande's Variable Index Dynamic Average VIDYA .
The ADXVMA provides support during uptrends and resistance during downtrends and will stay flat for longer, but will create some of the most accurate market signals when it decides to move.
Ahrens Moving Average
Richard D. Ahrens's Moving Average promises "Smoother Data" that isn't influenced by the occasional price spike. It works by using the Open and the Close in his formula so that the only time the Ahrens Moving Average will change is when the candlestick is either making new highs or new lows.
Alexander Moving Average - ALXMA
This Moving Average uses an elaborate smoothing formula and utilizes a 7 period Moving Average. It corresponds to fitting a second-order polynomial to seven consecutive observations. This moving average is rarely used in trading but is interesting as this Moving Average has been applied to diffusion indexes that tend to be very volatile.
Deviation Scaled Moving Average - DSMA
The Deviation-Scaled Moving Average is a data smoothing technique that acts like an exponential moving average with a dynamic smoothing coefficient. The smoothing coefficient is automatically updated based on the magnitude of price changes. In the Deviation-Scaled Moving Average, the standard deviation from the mean is chosen to be the measure of this magnitude. The resulting indicator provides substantial smoothing of the data even when price changes are small while quickly adapting to these changes.
Donchian
Donchian Channels are three lines generated by moving average calculations that comprise an indicator formed by upper and lower bands around a midrange or median band. The upper band marks the highest price of a security over N periods while the lower band marks the lowest price of a security over N periods.
Double Exponential Moving Average - DEMA
The Double Exponential Moving Average ( DEMA ) combines a smoothed EMA and a single EMA to provide a low-lag indicator. It's primary purpose is to reduce the amount of "lagging entry" opportunities, and like all Moving Averages, the DEMA confirms uptrends whenever price crosses on top of it and closes above it, and confirms downtrends when the price crosses under it and closes below it - but with significantly less lag.
Double Smoothed Exponential Moving Average - DSEMA
The Double Smoothed Exponential Moving Average is a lot less laggy compared to a traditional EMA . It's also considered a leading indicator compared to the EMA , and is best utilized whenever smoothness and speed of reaction to market changes are required.
Double Smoothed FEMA - DSFEMA
Same as the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA), but uses a faster version of EMA for its calculation.
Double Smoothed Range Weighted EMA - DSRWEMA
Range weighted exponential moving average (EMA) is, unlike the "regular" range weighted average calculated in a different way. Even though the basis - the range weighting - is the same, the way how it is calculated is completely different. By definition this type of EMA is calculated as a ratio of EMA of price*weight / EMA of weight. And the results are very different and the two should be considered as completely different types of averages. The higher than EMA to price changes responsiveness when the ranges increase remains in this EMA too and in those cases this EMA is clearly leading the "regular" EMA. This version includes double smoothing.
Double Smoothed Wilders EMA - DSWEMA
Welles Wilder was frequently using one "special" case of EMA (Exponential Moving Average) that is due to that fact (that he used it) sometimes called Wilder's EMA. This version is adding double smoothing to Wilder's EMA in order to make it "faster" (it is more responsive to market prices than the original) and is still keeping very smooth values.
Double Weighted Moving Average - DWMA
Double weighted moving average is an LWMA (Linear Weighted Moving Average). Instead of doing one cycle for calculating the LWMA, the indicator is made to cycle the loop 2 times. That produces a smoother values than the original LWMA
Exponential Moving Average - EMA
The EMA places more significance on recent data points and moves closer to price than the SMA ( Simple Moving Average ). It reacts faster to volatility due to its emphasis on recent data and is known for its ability to give greater weight to recent and more relevant data. The EMA is therefore seen as an enhancement over the SMA .
Fast Exponential Moving Average - FEMA
An Exponential Moving Average with a short look-back period.
Fractal Adaptive Moving Average - FRAMA
The Fractal Adaptive Moving Average by John Ehlers is an intelligent adaptive Moving Average which takes the importance of price changes into account and follows price closely enough to display significant moves whilst remaining flat if price ranges. The FRAMA does this by dynamically adjusting the look-back period based on the market's fractal geometry.
Generalized DEMA - GDEMA
The double exponential moving average (DEMA), was developed by Patrick Mulloy in an attempt to reduce the amount of lag time found in traditional moving averages. It was first introduced in the February 1994 issue of the magazine Technical Analysis of Stocks & Commodities in Mulloy's article "Smoothing Data with Faster Moving Averages.". Instead of using fixed multiplication factor in the final DEMA formula, the generalized version allows you to change it. By varying the "volume factor" form 0 to 1 you apply different multiplications and thus producing DEMA with different "speed" - the higher the volume factor is the "faster" the DEMA will be (but also the slope of it will be less smooth). The volume factor is limited in the calculation to 1 since any volume factor that is larger than 1 is increasing the overshooting to the extent that some volume factors usage makes the indicator unusable.
Generalized Double DEMA - GDDEMA
The double exponential moving average (DEMA), was developed by Patrick Mulloy in an attempt to reduce the amount of lag time found in traditional moving averages. It was first introduced in the February 1994 issue of the magazine Technical Analysis of Stocks & Commodities in Mulloy's article "Smoothing Data with Faster Moving Averages''. This is an extension of the Generalized DEMA using Tim Tillsons (the inventor of T3) idea, and is using GDEMA of GDEMA for calculation (which is the "middle step" of T3 calculation). Since there are no versions showing that middle step, this version covers that too. The result is smoother than Generalized DEMA, but is less smooth than T3 - one has to do some experimenting in order to find the optimal way to use it, but in any case, since it is "faster" than the T3 (Tim Tillson T3) and still smooth, it looks like a good compromise between speed and smoothness.
Hull Moving Average (Type 1) - HMA1
Alan Hull's HMA makes use of weighted moving averages to prioritize recent values and greatly reduce lag whilst maintaining the smoothness of a traditional Moving Average. For this reason, it's seen as a well-suited Moving Average for identifying entry points. This version uses SMA for smoothing.
Hull Moving Average (Type 2) - HMA2
Alan Hull's HMA makes use of weighted moving averages to prioritize recent values and greatly reduce lag whilst maintaining the smoothness of a traditional Moving Average. For this reason, it's seen as a well-suited Moving Average for identifying entry points. This version uses EMA for smoothing.
Hull Moving Average (Type 3) - HMA3
Alan Hull's HMA makes use of weighted moving averages to prioritize recent values and greatly reduce lag whilst maintaining the smoothness of a traditional Moving Average. For this reason, it's seen as a well-suited Moving Average for identifying entry points. This version uses LWMA for smoothing.
Hull Moving Average (Type 4) - HMA4
Alan Hull's HMA makes use of weighted moving averages to prioritize recent values and greatly reduce lag whilst maintaining the smoothness of a traditional Moving Average. For this reason, it's seen as a well-suited Moving Average for identifying entry points. This version uses SMMA for smoothing.
IE /2 - Early T3 by Tim Tilson and T3 new
The T3 moving average is a type of technical indicator used in financial analysis to identify trends in price movements. It is similar to the Exponential Moving Average (EMA) and the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA), but uses a different smoothing algorithm.
The T3 moving average is calculated using a series of exponential moving averages that are designed to filter out noise and smooth the data. The resulting smoothed data is then weighted with a non-linear function to produce a final output that is more responsive to changes in trend direction.
The T3 moving average can be customized by adjusting the length of the moving average, as well as the weighting function used to smooth the data. It is commonly used in conjunction with other technical indicators as part of a larger trading strategy.
Integral of Linear Regression Slope - ILRS
A Moving Average where the slope of a linear regression line is simply integrated as it is fitted in a moving window of length N (natural numbers in maths) across the data. The derivative of ILRS is the linear regression slope. ILRS is not the same as a SMA ( Simple Moving Average ) of length N, which is actually the midpoint of the linear regression line as it moves across the data.
Kaufman Adaptive Moving Average - KAMA
Developed by Perry Kaufman, Kaufman's Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) is a moving average designed to account for market noise or volatility. KAMA will closely follow prices when the price swings are relatively small and the noise is low.
Leader Exponential Moving Average
The Leader EMA was created by Giorgos E. Siligardos who created a Moving Average which was able to eliminate lag altogether whilst maintaining some smoothness. It was first described during his research paper "MACD Leader" where he applied this to the MACD to improve its signals and remove its lagging issue. This filter uses his leading MACD's "modified EMA" and can be used as a zero lag filter.
Linear Regression Value - LSMA ( Least Squares Moving Average )
LSMA as a Moving Average is based on plotting the end point of the linear regression line. It compares the current value to the prior value and a determination is made of a possible trend, eg. the linear regression line is pointing up or down.
Linear Weighted Moving Average - LWMA
LWMA reacts to price quicker than the SMA and EMA . Although it's similar to the Simple Moving Average , the difference is that a weight coefficient is multiplied to the price which means the most recent price has the highest weighting, and each prior price has progressively less weight. The weights drop in a linear fashion.
McGinley Dynamic
John McGinley created this Moving Average to track prices better than traditional Moving Averages. It does this by incorporating an automatic adjustment factor into its formula, which speeds (or slows) the indicator in trending, or ranging, markets.
McNicholl EMA
Dennis McNicholl developed this Moving Average to use as his center line for his "Better Bollinger Bands" indicator and was successful because it responded better to volatility changes over the standard SMA and managed to avoid common whipsaws.
Non-lag moving average
The Non Lag Moving average follows price closely and gives very quick signals as well as early signals of price change. As a standalone Moving Average, it should not be used on its own, but as an additional confluence tool for early signals.
Ocean NMA Moving Average - ONMAMA
Created by Jim Sloman, the NMA is a moving average that automatically adjusts to volatility without being programmed to do so. For more info, read his guide "Ocean Theory, an Introduction"
One More Moving Average (OMA)
The One More Moving Average (OMA) is a technical indicator that calculates a series of Jurik-style moving averages in order to reduce noise and provide smoother price data. It uses six exponential moving averages to generate the final value, with the length of the moving averages determined by an adaptive algorithm that adjusts to the current market conditions. The algorithm calculates the average period by comparing the signal to noise ratio and using this value to determine the length of the moving averages. The resulting values are used to generate the final value of the OMA, which can be used to identify trends and potential changes in trend direction.
Parabolic Weighted Moving Average
The Parabolic Weighted Moving Average is a variation of the Linear Weighted Moving Average . The Linear Weighted Moving Average calculates the average by assigning different weights to each element in its calculation. The Parabolic Weighted Moving Average is a variation that allows weights to be changed to form a parabolic curve. It is done simply by using the Power parameter of this indicator.
Probability Density Function Moving Average - PDFMA
Probability density function based MA is a sort of weighted moving average that uses probability density function to calculate the weights. By its nature it is similar to a lot of digital filters.
Quadratic Regression Moving Average - QRMA
A quadratic regression is the process of finding the equation of the parabola that best fits a set of data. This moving average is an obscure concept that was posted to Forex forums in around 2008.
Regularized EMA - REMA
The regularized exponential moving average (REMA) by Chris Satchwell is a variation on the EMA (see Exponential Moving Average) designed to be smoother but not introduce too much extra lag.
Range Weighted EMA - RWEMA
This indicator is a variation of the range weighted EMA. The variation comes from a possible need to make that indicator a bit less "noisy" when it comes to slope changes. The method used for calculating this variation is the method described by Lee Leibfarth in his article "Trading With An Adaptive Price Zone".
Recursive Moving Trendline
Dennis Meyers's Recursive Moving Trendline uses a recursive (repeated application of a rule) polynomial fit, a technique that uses a small number of past values estimations of price and today's price to predict tomorrow's price.
Simple Decycler - SDEC
The Ehlers Simple Decycler study is a virtually zero-lag technical indicator proposed by John F. Ehlers. The original idea behind this study (and several others created by John F. Ehlers) is that market data can be considered a continuum of cycle periods with different cycle amplitudes. Thus, trending periods can be considered segments of longer cycles, or, in other words, low-frequency segments. Applying the right filter might help identify these segments.
Simple Loxx Moving Average - SLMA
A three stage moving average combining an adaptive EMA, a Kalman Filter, and a Kauffman adaptive filter.
Simple Moving Average - SMA
The SMA calculates the average of a range of prices by adding recent prices and then dividing that figure by the number of time periods in the calculation average. It is the most basic Moving Average which is seen as a reliable tool for starting off with Moving Average studies. As reliable as it may be, the basic moving average will work better when it's enhanced into an EMA .
Sine Weighted Moving Average
The Sine Weighted Moving Average assigns the most weight at the middle of the data set. It does this by weighting from the first half of a Sine Wave Cycle and the most weighting is given to the data in the middle of that data set. The Sine WMA closely resembles the TMA (Triangular Moving Average).
Smoothed LWMA - SLWMA
A smoothed version of the LWMA
Smoothed Moving Average - SMMA
The Smoothed Moving Average is similar to the Simple Moving Average ( SMA ), but aims to reduce noise rather than reduce lag. SMMA takes all prices into account and uses a long lookback period. Due to this, it's seen as an accurate yet laggy Moving Average.
Smoother
The Smoother filter is a faster-reacting smoothing technique which generates considerably less lag than the SMMA ( Smoothed Moving Average ). It gives earlier signals but can also create false signals due to its earlier reactions. This filter is sometimes wrongly mistaken for the superior Jurik Smoothing algorithm.
Super Smoother
The Super Smoother filter uses John Ehlers’s “Super Smoother” which consists of a Two pole Butterworth filter combined with a 2-bar SMA ( Simple Moving Average ) that suppresses the 22050 Hz Nyquist frequency: A characteristic of a sampler, which converts a continuous function or signal into a discrete sequence.
Three-pole Ehlers Butterworth
The 3 pole Ehlers Butterworth (as well as the Two pole Butterworth) are both superior alternatives to the EMA and SMA . They aim at producing less lag whilst maintaining accuracy. The 2 pole filter will give you a better approximation for price, whereas the 3 pole filter has superior smoothing.
Three-pole Ehlers smoother
The 3 pole Ehlers smoother works almost as close to price as the above mentioned 3 Pole Ehlers Butterworth. It acts as a strong baseline for signals but removes some noise. Side by side, it hardly differs from the Three Pole Ehlers Butterworth but when examined closely, it has better overshoot reduction compared to the 3 pole Ehlers Butterworth.
Triangular Moving Average - TMA
The TMA is similar to the EMA but uses a different weighting scheme. Exponential and weighted Moving Averages will assign weight to the most recent price data. Simple moving averages will assign the weight equally across all the price data. With a TMA (Triangular Moving Average), it is double smoother (averaged twice) so the majority of the weight is assigned to the middle portion of the data.
Triple Exponential Moving Average - TEMA
The TEMA uses multiple EMA calculations as well as subtracting lag to create a tool which can be used for scalping pullbacks. As it follows price closely, its signals are considered very noisy and should only be used in extremely fast-paced trading conditions.
Two-pole Ehlers Butterworth
The 2 pole Ehlers Butterworth (as well as the three pole Butterworth mentioned above) is another filter that cuts out the noise and follows the price closely. The 2 pole is seen as a faster, leading filter over the 3 pole and follows price a bit more closely. Analysts will utilize both a 2 pole and a 3 pole Butterworth on the same chart using the same period, but having both on chart allows its crosses to be traded.
Two-pole Ehlers smoother
A smoother version of the Two pole Ehlers Butterworth. This filter is the faster version out of the 3 pole Ehlers Butterworth. It does a decent job at cutting out market noise whilst emphasizing a closer following to price over the 3 pole Ehlers .
Variable Index Dynamic Average - VIDYA
Variable Index Dynamic Average Technical Indicator ( VIDYA ) was developed by Tushar Chande. It is an original method of calculating the Exponential Moving Average ( EMA ) with the dynamically changing period of averaging.
Variable Moving Average - VMA
The Variable Moving Average (VMA) is a study that uses an Exponential Moving Average being able to automatically adjust its smoothing factor according to the market volatility.
Volume Weighted EMA - VEMA
An EMA that uses a volume and price weighted calculation instead of the standard price input.
Volume Weighted Moving Average - VWMA
A Volume Weighted Moving Average is a moving average where more weight is given to bars with heavy volume than with light volume. Thus the value of the moving average will be closer to where most trading actually happened than it otherwise would be without being volume weighted.
Zero-Lag DEMA - Zero Lag Double Exponential Moving Average
John Ehlers's Zero Lag DEMA's aim is to eliminate the inherent lag associated with all trend following indicators which average a price over time. Because this is a Double Exponential Moving Average with Zero Lag, it has a tendency to overshoot and create a lot of false signals for swing trading. It can however be used for quick scalping or as a secondary indicator for confluence.
Zero-Lag Moving Average
The Zero Lag Moving Average is described by its creator, John Ehlers , as a Moving Average with absolutely no delay. And it's for this reason that this filter will cause a lot of abrupt signals which will not be ideal for medium to long-term traders. This filter is designed to follow price as close as possible whilst de-lagging data instead of basing it on regular data. The way this is done is by attempting to remove the cumulative effect of the Moving Average.
Zero-Lag TEMA - Zero Lag Triple Exponential Moving Average
Just like the Zero Lag DEMA , this filter will give you the fastest signals out of all the Zero Lag Moving Averages. This is useful for scalping but dangerous for medium to long-term traders, especially during market Volatility and news events. Having no lag, this filter also has no smoothing in its signals and can cause some very bizarre behavior when applied to certain indicators.
█ Volatility Goldie Locks Zone
The Goldie Locks Zone volatility filter is the standard first-pass filter used in all advanced GKD backtests (Complex, Super Complex, and Full GKd). This filter requires the price to fall within a range determined by multiples of volatility. The Goldie Locks Zone is separate from the core Baseline and utilizes its own moving average with Loxx's Exotic Source Types you can read about below.
On the chart, you will find green and red dots positioned at the top, indicating whether a candle qualifies for a long or short trade respectively. Additionally, green and red triangles are located at the bottom of the chart, signifying whether the trigger has crossed up or down and qualifies within the Goldie Locks zone. The Goldie Locks zone is represented by a white color on the mean line, indicating low volatility levels that are not suitable for trading.
█ Volatility Types Included in the Baseline Optimizer
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses. Each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. Users can also adjust the multiplier values in the settings.
This module includes 17 types of volatility:
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
Various volatility estimators and indicators that investors and traders can use to measure the dispersion or volatility of a financial instrument's price. Each estimator has its strengths and weaknesses, and the choice of estimator should depend on the specific needs and circumstances of the user.
Close-to-Close
Close-to-Close volatility is a classic and widely used volatility measure, sometimes referred to as historical volatility.
Volatility is an indicator of the speed of a stock price change. A stock with high volatility is one where the price changes rapidly and with a larger amplitude. The more volatile a stock is, the riskier it is.
Close-to-close historical volatility is calculated using only a stock's closing prices. It is the simplest volatility estimator. However, in many cases, it is not precise enough. Stock prices could jump significantly during a trading session and return to the opening value at the end. That means that a considerable amount of price information is not taken into account by close-to-close volatility.
Despite its drawbacks, Close-to-Close volatility is still useful in cases where the instrument doesn't have intraday prices. For example, mutual funds calculate their net asset values daily or weekly, and thus their prices are not suitable for more sophisticated volatility estimators.
Parkinson
Parkinson volatility is a volatility measure that uses the stock’s high and low price of the day.
The main difference between regular volatility and Parkinson volatility is that the latter uses high and low prices for a day, rather than only the closing price. This is useful as close-to-close prices could show little difference while large price movements could have occurred during the day. Thus, Parkinson's volatility is considered more precise and requires less data for calculation than close-to-close volatility.
One drawback of this estimator is that it doesn't take into account price movements after the market closes. Hence, it systematically undervalues volatility. This drawback is addressed in the Garman-Klass volatility estimator.
Garman-Klass
Garman-Klass is a volatility estimator that incorporates open, low, high, and close prices of a security.
Garman-Klass volatility extends Parkinson's volatility by taking into account the opening and closing prices. As markets are most active during the opening and closing of a trading session, it makes volatility estimation more accurate.
Garman and Klass also assumed that the process of price change follows a continuous diffusion process (Geometric Brownian motion). However, this assumption has several drawbacks. The method is not robust for opening jumps in price and trend movements.
Despite its drawbacks, the Garman-Klass estimator is still more effective than the basic formula since it takes into account not only the price at the beginning and end of the time interval but also intraday price extremes.
Researchers Rogers and Satchell have proposed a more efficient method for assessing historical volatility that takes into account price trends. See Rogers-Satchell Volatility for more detail.
Rogers-Satchell
Rogers-Satchell is an estimator for measuring the volatility of securities with an average return not equal to zero.
Unlike Parkinson and Garman-Klass estimators, Rogers-Satchell incorporates a drift term (mean return not equal to zero). As a result, it provides better volatility estimation when the underlying is trending.
The main disadvantage of this method is that it does not take into account price movements between trading sessions. This leads to an underestimation of volatility since price jumps periodically occur in the market precisely at the moments between sessions.
A more comprehensive estimator that also considers the gaps between sessions was developed based on the Rogers-Satchel formula in the 2000s by Yang-Zhang. See Yang Zhang Volatility for more detail.
Yang-Zhang
Yang Zhang is a historical volatility estimator that handles both opening jumps and the drift and has a minimum estimation error.
Yang-Zhang volatility can be thought of as a combination of the overnight (close-to-open volatility) and a weighted average of the Rogers-Satchell volatility and the day’s open-to-close volatility. It is considered to be 14 times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator.
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang (GKYZ) volatility estimator incorporates the returns of open, high, low, and closing prices in its calculation.
GKYZ volatility estimator takes into account overnight jumps but not the trend, i.e., it assumes that the underlying asset follows a Geometric Brownian Motion (GBM) process with zero drift. Therefore, the GKYZ volatility estimator tends to overestimate the volatility when the drift is different from zero. However, for a GBM process, this estimator is eight times more efficient than the close-to-close volatility estimator.
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
The Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) is a quantitative or statistical measure used to model or describe a time series. The EWMA is widely used in finance, with the main applications being technical analysis and volatility modeling.
The moving average is designed such that older observations are given lower weights. The weights decrease exponentially as the data point gets older – hence the name exponentially weighted.
The only decision a user of the EWMA must make is the parameter lambda. The parameter decides how important the current observation is in the calculation of the EWMA. The higher the value of lambda, the more closely the EWMA tracks the original time series.
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
This is the simplest calculation of volatility. It's the standard deviation of ln(close/close(1)).
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
This is calculated using a short- and long-run mean of variance multiplied by ?.
?avg(var;M) + (1 ? ?) avg(var;N) = 2?var/(M+1-(M-1)L) + 2(1-?)var/(M+1-(M-1)L)
Solving for ? can be done by minimizing the mean squared error of estimation; that is, regressing L^-1var - avg(var; N) against avg(var; M) - avg(var; N) and using the resulting beta estimate as ?.
Average True Range
The average true range (ATR) is a technical analysis indicator, introduced by market technician J. Welles Wilder Jr. in his book New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems, that measures market volatility by decomposing the entire range of an asset price for that period.
The true range indicator is taken as the greatest of the following: current high less the current low; the absolute value of the current high less the previous close; and the absolute value of the current low less the previous close. The ATR is then a moving average, generally using 14 days, of the true ranges.
True Range Double
A special case of ATR that attempts to correct for volatility skew.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation is a statistic that measures the dispersion of a dataset relative to its mean and is calculated as the square root of the variance. The standard deviation is calculated as the square root of variance by determining each data point's deviation relative to the mean. If the data points are further from the mean, there is a higher deviation within the data set; thus, the more spread out the data, the higher the standard deviation.
Adaptive Deviation
By definition, the Standard Deviation (STD, also represented by the Greek letter sigma ? or the Latin letter s) is a measure that is used to quantify the amount of variation or dispersion of a set of data values. In technical analysis, we usually use it to measure the level of current volatility.
Standard Deviation is based on Simple Moving Average calculation for mean value. This version of standard deviation uses the properties of EMA to calculate what can be called a new type of deviation, and since it is based on EMA, we can call it EMA deviation. Additionally, Perry Kaufman's efficiency ratio is used to make it adaptive (since all EMA type calculations are nearly perfect for adapting).
The difference when compared to the standard is significant--not just because of EMA usage, but the efficiency ratio makes it a "bit more logical" in very volatile market conditions.
Median Absolute Deviation
The median absolute deviation is a measure of statistical dispersion. Moreover, the MAD is a robust statistic, being more resilient to outliers in a data set than the standard deviation. In the standard deviation, the distances from the mean are squared, so large deviations are weighted more heavily, and thus outliers can heavily influence it. In the MAD, the deviations of a small number of outliers are irrelevant.
Because the MAD is a more robust estimator of scale than the sample variance or standard deviation, it works better with distributions without a mean or variance, such as the Cauchy distribution.
For this indicator, a manual recreation of the quantile function in Pine Script is used. This is so users have a full inside view into how this is calculated.
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Average True Range (ATR) is a widely used indicator for many occasions in technical analysis. It is calculated as the RMA of the true range. This version adds a "twist": it uses Perry Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio to calculate adaptive true range.
Mean Absolute Deviation
The mean absolute deviation (MAD) is a measure of variability that indicates the average distance between observations and their mean. MAD uses the original units of the data, which simplifies interpretation. Larger values signify that the data points spread out further from the average. Conversely, lower values correspond to data points bunching closer to it. The mean absolute deviation is also known as the mean deviation and average absolute deviation.
This definition of the mean absolute deviation sounds similar to the standard deviation (SD). While both measure variability, they have different calculations. In recent years, some proponents of MAD have suggested that it replace the SD as the primary measure because it is a simpler concept that better fits real life.
█ Loxx's Expanded Source Types Included in Baseline Optimizer
This indicator allows you to select from 33 source types. They are as follows:
Close
Open
High
Low
Median
Typical
Weighted
Average
Average Median Body
Trend Biased
Trend Biased (Extreme)
HA Close
HA Open
HA High
HA Low
HA Median
HA Typical
HA Weighted
HA Average
HA Average Median Body
HA Trend Biased
HA Trend Biased (Extreme)
HAB Close
HAB Open
HAB High
HAB Low
HAB Median
HAB Typical
HAB Weighted
HAB Average
HAB Average Median Body
HAB Trend Biased
HAB Trend Biased (Extreme)
What are Heiken Ashi "better" candles?
Heiken Ashi "better" candles are a modified version of the standard Heiken Ashi candles, which are a popular charting technique used in technical analysis. Heiken Ashi candles help traders identify trends and potential reversal points by smoothing out price data and reducing market noise. The "better formula" was proposed by Sebastian Schmidt in an article published by BNP Paribas in Warrants & Zertifikate, a German magazine, in August 2004. The aim of this formula is to further improve the smoothing of the Heiken Ashi chart and enhance its effectiveness in identifying trends and reversals.
Standard Heiken Ashi candles are calculated using the following formulas:
Heiken Ashi Close = (Open + High + Low + Close) / 4
Heiken Ashi Open = (Previous Heiken Ashi Open + Previous Heiken Ashi Close) / 2
Heiken Ashi High = Max (High, Heiken Ashi Open, Heiken Ashi Close)
Heiken Ashi Low = Min (Low, Heiken Ashi Open, Heiken Ashi Close)
The "better formula" modifies the standard Heiken Ashi calculation by incorporating additional smoothing, which can help reduce noise and make it easier to identify trends and reversals. The modified formulas for Heiken Ashi "better" candles are as follows:
Better Heiken Ashi Close = (Open + High + Low + Close) / 4
Better Heiken Ashi Open = (Previous Better Heiken Ashi Open + Previous Better Heiken Ashi Close) / 2
Better Heiken Ashi High = Max (High, Better Heiken Ashi Open, Better Heiken Ashi Close)
Better Heiken Ashi Low = Min (Low, Better Heiken Ashi Open, Better Heiken Ashi Close)
Smoothing Factor = 2 / (N + 1), where N is the chosen period for smoothing
Smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Open = (Better Heiken Ashi Open * Smoothing Factor) + (Previous Smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Open * (1 - Smoothing Factor))
Smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Close = (Better Heiken Ashi Close * Smoothing Factor) + (Previous Smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Close * (1 - Smoothing Factor))
The smoothed Better Heiken Ashi Open and Close values are then used to calculate the smoothed Better Heiken Ashi High and Low values, resulting in "better" candles that provide a clearer representation of the market trend and potential reversal points.
Heiken Ashi "better" candles, as mentioned previously, provide a clearer representation of market trends and potential reversal points by reducing noise and smoothing out price data. When using these candles in conjunction with other technical analysis tools and indicators, traders can gain valuable insights into market behavior and make more informed decisions.
To effectively use Heiken Ashi "better" candles in your trading strategy, consider the following tips:
-Trend Identification: Heiken Ashi "better" candles can help you identify the prevailing trend in the market. When the majority of the candles are green (or another color, depending on your chart settings) and there are no or few lower wicks, it may indicate a strong uptrend. Conversely, when the majority of the candles are red (or another color) and there are no or few upper wicks, it may signal a strong downtrend.
-Trend Reversals: Look for potential trend reversals when a change in the color of the candles occurs, especially when accompanied by longer wicks. For example, if a green candle with a long lower wick is followed by a red candle, it could indicate a bearish reversal. Similarly, a red candle with a long upper wick followed by a green candle may suggest a bullish reversal.
-Support and Resistance: You can use Heiken Ashi "better" candles to identify potential support and resistance levels. When the candles are consistently moving in one direction and then suddenly change color with longer wicks, it could indicate the presence of a support or resistance level.
-Stop-Loss and Take-Profit: Using Heiken Ashi "better" candles can help you manage risk by determining optimal stop-loss and take-profit levels. For instance, you can place your stop-loss below the low of the most recent green candle in an uptrend or above the high of the most recent red candle in a downtrend.
-Confirming Signals: Heiken Ashi "better" candles should be used in conjunction with other technical indicators, such as moving averages, oscillators, or chart patterns, to confirm signals and improve the accuracy of your analysis.
In this implementation, you have the choice of AMA, KAMA, or T3 smoothing. These are as follows:
Kaufman Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA)
The Kaufman Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) is a type of adaptive moving average used in technical analysis to smooth out price fluctuations and identify trends. The KAMA adjusts its smoothing factor based on the market's volatility, making it more responsive in volatile markets and smoother in calm markets. The KAMA is calculated using three different efficiency ratios that determine the appropriate smoothing factor for the current market conditions. These ratios are based on the noise level of the market, the speed at which the market is moving, and the length of the moving average. The KAMA is a popular choice among traders who prefer to use adaptive indicators to identify trends and potential reversals.
Adaptive Moving Average
The Adaptive Moving Average (AMA) is a type of moving average that adjusts its sensitivity to price movements based on market conditions. It uses a ratio between the current price and the highest and lowest prices over a certain lookback period to determine its level of smoothing. The AMA can help reduce lag and increase responsiveness to changes in trend direction, making it useful for traders who want to follow trends while avoiding false signals. The AMA is calculated by multiplying a smoothing constant with the difference between the current price and the previous AMA value, then adding the result to the previous AMA value.
T3
The T3 moving average is a type of technical indicator used in financial analysis to identify trends in price movements. It is similar to the Exponential Moving Average (EMA) and the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA), but uses a different smoothing algorithm.
The T3 moving average is calculated using a series of exponential moving averages that are designed to filter out noise and smooth the data. The resulting smoothed data is then weighted with a non-linear function to produce a final output that is more responsive to changes in trend direction.
The T3 moving average can be customized by adjusting the length of the moving average, as well as the weighting function used to smooth the data. It is commonly used in conjunction with other technical indicators as part of a larger trading strategy.
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
8. Metamorphosis - a technical indicator that produces a compound signal from the combination of other GKD indicators*
*(not part of the NNFX algorithm)
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
What is an Metamorphosis indicator?
The concept of a metamorphosis indicator involves the integration of two or more GKD indicators to generate a compound signal. This is achieved by evaluating the accuracy of each indicator and selecting the signal from the indicator with the highest accuracy. As an illustration, let's consider a scenario where we calculate the accuracy of 10 indicators and choose the signal from the indicator that demonstrates the highest accuracy.
The resulting output from the metamorphosis indicator can then be utilized in a GKD-BT backtest by occupying a slot that aligns with the purpose of the metamorphosis indicator. The slot can be a GKD-B, GKD-C, or GKD-E slot, depending on the specific requirements and objectives of the indicator. This allows for seamless integration and utilization of the compound signal within the GKD-BT framework.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
6. GKD-M - Metamorphosis module (Metamorphosis, Number 8 in the NNFX algorithm, but not part of the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Full GKD Backtest
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Kase Peak Oscillator
Confirmation 2: uf2018
Continuation: Vortex
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Metamorphosis: Baseline Optimizer as shown on the chart above
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, GKD-M, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2. Baseline agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Standard Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2a. Baseline agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Basline gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
1-Candle Baseline Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry
1a. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSVVC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Volatility/Volume agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
Confirmation 2 Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Volatility/Volume agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSC2C Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Confirmation 2 agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Volatility/Volume agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle
1b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
2b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, 1-Candle Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, 1-Candle Baseline Entry, Volatility/Volume Entry, 1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry, Confirmation 2 Entry, 1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry, or Pullback entry triggered previously
2. Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
4. Confirmation 1 agrees
5. Baseline agrees
6. Confirmation 2 agrees
█ Connecting to Backtests
All GKD indicators are chained indicators meaning you export the value of the indicators to specialized backtest to creat your GKD trading system. Each indicator contains a proprietary signal generation algo that will only work with GKD backtests. You can find these backtests using the links below.
GKD-BT Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest:
GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest:
GKD-BT Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest:
GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Super Complex Backtest:
GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest:
GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Simple Backtest:
Market Structure & Liquidity: CHoCHs+Nested Pivots+FVGs+Sweeps//Purpose:
This indicator combines several tools to help traders track and interpret price action/market structure; It can be divided into 4 parts;
1. CHoCHs, 2. Nested Pivot highs & lows, 3. Grade sweeps, 4. FVGs.
This gives the trader a toolkit for determining market structure and shifts in market structure to help determine a bull or bear bias, whether it be short-term, med-term or long-term.
This indicator also helps traders in determining liquidity targets: wether they be voids/gaps (FVGS) or old highs/lows+ typical sweep distances.
Finally, the incorporation of HTF CHoCH levels printing on your LTF chart helps keep the bigger picture in mind and tells traders at a glance if they're above of below Custom HTF CHoCH up or CHoCH down (these HTF CHoCHs can be anything from Hourly up to Monthly).
//Nomenclature:
CHoCH = Change of Character
STH/STL = short-term high or low
MTH/MTL = medium-term high or low
LTH/LTL = long-term high or low
FVG = Fair value gap
CE = consequent encroachement (the midline of a FVG)
~~~ The Four components of this indicator ~~~
1. CHoCHs:
•Best demonstrated in the below charts. This was a method taught to me by @Icecold_crypto. Once a 3 bar fractal pivot gets broken, we count backwards the consecutive higher lows or lower highs, then identify the CHoCH as the opposite end of the candle which ended the consecutive backwards count. This CHoCH (UP or DOWN) then becomes a level to watch, if price passes through it in earnest a trader would consider shifting their bias as market structure is deemed to have shifted.
•HTF CHoCHs: Option to print Higher time frame chochs (default on) of user input HTF. This prints only the last UP choch and only the last DOWN choch from the input HTF. Solid line by default so as to distinguish from local/chart-time CHoCHs. Can be any Higher timeframe you like.
•Show on table: toggle on show table(above/below) option to show in table cells (top right): is price above the latest HTF UP choch, or is price below HTF DOWN choch (or is it sat between the two, in a state of 'uncertainty').
•Most recent CHoCHs which have not been met by price will extend 10 bars into the future.
• USER INPUTS: overall setting: SHOW CHOCHS | Set bars lookback number to limit historical Chochs. Set Live CHoCHs number to control the number of active recent chochs unmet by price. Toggle shrink chochs once hit to declutter chart and minimize old chochs to their origin bars. Set Multi-timeframe color override : to make Color choices auto-set to your preference color for each of 1m, 5m, 15m, H, 4H, D, W, M (where up and down are same color, but 'up' icon for up chochs and down icon for down chochs remain printing as normal)
2. Nested Pivot Highs & Lows; aka 'Pivot Highs & Lows (ST/MT/LT)'
•Based on a seperate, longer lookback/lookforward pivot calculation. Identifies Pivot highs and lows with a 'spikeyness' filter (filtering out weak/rounded/unimpressive Pivot highs/lows)
•by 'nested' I mean that the pivot highs are graded based on whether a pivot high sits between two lower pivot highs or vice versa.
--for example: STH = normal pivot. MTH is pivot high with a lower STH on either side. LTH is a pivot high with a lower MTH on either side. Same applies to pivot lows (STL/MTL/LTL)
•This is a useful way to measure the significance of a high or low. Both in terms of how much it might be typically swept by (see later) and what it would imply for HTF bias were we to break through it in earnest (more than just a sweep).
• USER INPUTS: overall setting: show pivot highs & lows | Bars lookback (historical pivots to show) | Pivots: lookback/lookforward length (determines the scale of your pivot highs/lows) | toggle on/off Apply 'Spikeyness' filter (filters out smooth/unimpressive pivot highs/lows). Set Spikeyness index (determines the strength of this filter if turned on) | Individually toggle on each of STH, MTH, LTH, STL, MTL, LTL along with their label text type , and size . Toggle on/off line for each of these Pivot highs/lows. | Set label spacer (atr multiples above / below) | set line style and line width
3. Grade Sweeps:
•These are directly related to the nested pivots described above. Most assets will have a typical sweep distance. I've added some of my expected sweeps for various assets in the indicator tooltips.
--i.e. Eur/Usd 10-20-30 pips is a typical 'grade' sweep. S&P HKEX:5 - HKEX:10 is a typical grade sweep.
•Each of the ST/MT/LT pivot highs and lows have optional user defined grade sweep boxes which paint above until filled (or user option for historical filled boxes to remain).
•Numbers entered into sweep input boxes are auto converted into appropriate units (i.e. pips for FX, $ or 'handles' for indices, $ for Crypto. Very low $ units can be input for low unit value crypto altcoins.
• USER INPUTS: overall setting: Show sweep boxes | individually select colors of each of STH, MTH, LTH, STL, MTL, LTL sweep boxes. | Set Grade sweep ($/pips) number for each of ST, MT, LT. This auto converts between pips and $ (i.e. FX vs Indices/Crypto). Can be a float as small or large as you like ($0.000001 to HKEX:1000 ). | Set box text position (horizontal & vertical) and size , and color . | Set Box width (bars) (for non extended/ non-auto-terminating at price boxes). | toggle on/off Extend boxes/lines right . | Toggle on/off Shrink Grade sweeps on fill (they will disappear in realtime when filled/passed through)
4. FVGs:
•Fair Value gaps. Represent 'naked' candle bodies where the wicks to either side do not meet, forming a 'gap' of sorts which has a tendency to fill, or at least to fill to midline (CE).
•These are ICT concepts. 'UP' FVGS are known as BISIs (Buyside imbalance, sellside inefficiency); 'DOWN' FVGs are known as SIBIs (Sellside imbalance, buyside inefficiency).
• USER INPUTS: overall setting: show FVGs | Bars lookback (history). | Choose to display: 'UP' FVGs (BISI) and/or 'DOWN FVGs (SIBI) . Choose to display the midline: CE , the color and the line style . Choose threshold: use CE (as opposed to Full Fill) |toggle on/off Shrink FVG on fill (CE hit or Full fill) (declutter chart/see backtesting history)
////••Alerts (general notes & cautionary notes)::
•Alerts are optional for most of the levels printed by this indicator. Set them via the three dots on indicator status line.
•Due to dynamic repainting of levels, alerts should be used with caution. Best use these alerts either for Higher time frame levels, or when closely monitoring price.
--E.g. You may set an alert for down-fill of the latest FVG below; but price will keep marching up; form a newer/higher FVG, and the alert will trigger on THAT FVG being down-filled (not the original)
•Available Alerts:
-FVG(BISI) cross above threshold(CE or full-fill; user choice). Same with FVG(SIBI).
-HTF last CHoCH down, cross below | HTF last CHoCH up, cross above.
-last CHoCH down, cross below | last CHoCH up, cross above.
-LTH cross above, MTH cross above, STH cross above | LTL cross below, MTL cross below, STL cross below.
////••Formatting (general)::
•all table text color is set from the 'Pivot highs & Lows (ST, MT, LT)' section (for those of you who prefer black backgrounds).
•User choice of Line-style, line color, line width. Same with Boxes. Icon choice for chochs. Char or label text choices for ST/MT/LT pivot highs & lows.
////••User Inputs (general):
•Each of the 4 components of this indicator can be easily toggled on/off independently.
•Quite a lot of options and toggle boxes, as described in full above. Please take your time and read through all the tooltips (hover over '!' icon) to get an idea of formatting options.
•Several Lookback periods defined in bars to control how much history is shown for each of the 4 components of this indicator.
•'Shrink on fill' settings on FVGs and CHoCHs: Basically a way to declutter chart; toggle on/off depending on if you're backtesting or reading live price action.
•Table Display: applies to ST/MT/LT pivot highs and to HTF CHoCHs; Toggle table on or off (in part or in full)
////••Credits:
•Credit to ICT (Inner Circle Trader) for some of the concepts used in this indicator (FVGS & CEs; Grade sweeps).
•Credit to @Icecold_crypto for the specific and novel concept of identifying CHoCHs in a simple, objective and effective manner (as demonstrated in the 1st chart below).
CHoCH demo page 1: shifting tweak; arrow diagrams to demonstrate how CHoCHs are defined:
CHoCH demo page 2: Simplified view; short lookback history; few CHoCHs, demo of 'latest' choch being extended into the future by 10 bars:
USAGE: Bitcoin Hourly using HTF daily CHoCHs:
USAGE-2: Cotton Futures (CT1!) 2hr. Painting a rather bullish picture. Above HTF UP CHoCH, Local CHoCHs show bullish order flow, Nice targets above (MTH/LTH + grade sweeps):
Full Demo; 5min chart; CHoCHs, Short term pivot highs/lows, grade sweeps, FVGs:
Full Demo, Eur/Usd 15m: STH, MTH, LTH grade sweeps, CHoCHs, Usage for finding bias (part A):
Full Demo, Eur/Usd 15m: STH, MTH, LTH grade sweeps, CHoCHs, Usage for finding bias, 3hrs later (part B):
Realtime Vs Backtesting(A): btc/usd 15m; FVGs and CHoCHs: shrink on fill, once filled they repaint discreetly on their origin bar only. Realtime (Shrink on fill, declutter chart):
Realtime Vs Backtesting(B): btc/usd 15m; FVGs and CHoCHs: DON'T shrink on fill; they extend to the point where price crosses them, and fix/paint there. Backtesting (seeing historical behaviour):
